Lucent Msc Overview

Lucent Technologies—ProprietaryThis document contains proprietary information of

Lucent Technologies and is not to be disclosed or usedexcept in accordance with applicable agreements.

Copyright © 2002 Lucent TechnologiesUnpublished and Not for Publication

All Rights Reserved

401-610-006Issue 15July 2002

Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® WirelessNetworksExecutive Cellular Processor (ECP)Release 19.0System Description

Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page

Copyright © 2002 Lucent Technologies. All Rights Reserved.This material is protected by the copyright and trade secret laws of the United States and other countries. Itmay not be reproduced, distributed, or altered in any fashion by any entity (either internal or external to LucentTechnologies), except in accordance with applicable agreements, contracts or licensing, without the expresswritten consent of the Customer Training and Information Products organization and the businessmanagement owner of the material.

NoticeEvery effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the timeof printing. However, information is subject to change.

Federal Communications Commission Statement (FCC) Notification and Repair InformationNOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection againstharmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructionmanual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residentialarea is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference athis/her own expense.

Security StatementIn rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through theuse of remote access features. In such event, applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all networkcharges for traffic. Lucent Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make anyallowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.

Trademarks5ESS is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies.AUTOPLEX is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies.cdmaOne is a trademark of the CDMA Development Group (CDG).CDMA2000 is a trademark of the Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA).HP is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard, Inc.INTEL is a registered trademark of the Intel Corporation.Flexent is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies.Network Terminal Server is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.OpenWindows is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.Sun, Solaris, and SunOS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.All SPARC trademarks are licensed exclusively to Sun Microsystems, Inc.TEKTRONIX is a registered trademark of Tektronix, Inc.UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusivelythrough X/Open Company Ltd.X Window System is a trademark of Massachusetts Institute of Technology.

Other trademarks may appear in this document as well. They are marked on first usage.

Ordering informationThe ordering number for this document is <DocId>. To order this or other Lucent Technologies informationproducts, see “To obtain documentation, training, and technical support or submit feedback” on the401-010-001 Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® Wireless Networks System Documentation CD-ROM or thedocumentation web site at https://wireless.support.lucent.com/amps/rls_info/rls_doc/cd_docs/customer.support/customer.support_toc.pdf.wen.

Technical supportFor technical support, see “To obtain documentation, training, and technical support or submit feedback” on the401-010-001 Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® Wireless Networks System Documentation CD-ROM or thedocumentation web site at https://wireless.support.lucent.com/amps/rls_info/rls_doc/cd_docs/customer.support/customer.support_toc.pdf.wen.

Lucent Technologies—ProprietarySee notice on first page


Contents

Issue 15 July 2002 v


About This Document xxiii

■ Welcome to This Document xxiii■ Purpose xxiv■ Intended Audience xxv■ Prerequisite Skills and Knowledge xxv■ Reason for Reissue xxv■ How to Use This Document xxvi■ To Obtain Technical Support, Documentation,

and Training or Submit Feedback xxvii

1 Introduction to Wireless Technologies 1-1

■ Introduction 1-1Access Technologies 1-3

■ Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) 1-4Frequency Reuse 1-4Cell Plans 1-6

■ Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) 1-10Advantages of TDMA over FDMA 1-10Dual-Mode Operation 1-11Digital Control Channel (DCCH) 1-13TDMA Radio Interface 1-13TDMA System Access 1-13Handoff 1-13

■ Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) 1-15Dual-Mode Operation 1-18CDMA Carriers 1-20CDMA System Time 1-21

■ Mobile Units 1-26Classes of Mobile Units 1-26Types of Mobile Units 1-26Interoperability Mobile Unit Test Program 1-27

vi Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Contents

2 Call Processing 2-1

■ Introduction 2-1Mobile Switching Center (MSC) Software 2-2

■ System Elements 2-3Mobile Switching Center (MSC) 2-3Cell Site 2-3Mobile Units 2-3

■ Call Scenarios 2-4Signaling and Voice Paths 2-4AMPS/TDMA Call Scenarios 2-6CDMA Call Flow 2-26CDMA Call Scenarios 2-35CDMA Handoffs 2-51Other Types of CDMA Handoffs 2-59

3 Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® Wireless NetworksArchitecture 3-1

■ Introduction 3-1■ Mobile Switching Center (MSC) 3-2

Growth Beyond 222 Cell Sites 3-4Additional Hardware Components 3-4Remote Options 3-5MSC Key Features 3-5Mobile Unit 3-6System Capacity 3-6

■ Cell Sites 3-7■ Data Links 3-7■ Facilities (Interconnecting and Network Interface) 3-7■ Management Tools 3-7

WatchMark Prospect™ 3-9EESD for OMP-FX/ECP Software Updates 3-10

■ Third Generation (3G) Air Interfaces 3-11Additional Features 3-11New Physical Channels 3-12Key Attributes and Advantages 3-12Deploying CDMA2000TM 1X in Existing Cell Types3-13

Issue 15 July 2002 vii


ContentsFlexent Mobility Server 3-13

4 Executive Cellular Processor Complex (ECPC) 4-1

■ Introduction 4-1■ Architecture 4-1■ Benefits 4-2■ Executive Cellular Processor 4-3

ECP Functions 4-33B21D Processor Architecture 4-5Processor Cabinet 4-7ECP Software 4-8

■ IMS Ring 4-9RPCN 4-9IUN 4-9Ring Attached Processor (RAP) 4-10Call Processing/Data Base Node (CDN) 4-11Administrative Call Processing and Database

Node (ACDN) 4-11Direct Link Node (DLN) 4-11Link Nodes (LN) 4-12Enhanced Cell Site Node (CSNE) 4-12Enhanced Signaling System 7 Node (SS7E) 4-12EINE 4-13IMS Ring Node Maximums 4-13IMS Cabinet Layout Configuration 4-14

■ OMP-FX 4-15Supported Features 4-15ECP-to-OMP-FX Interface 4-17Hardware Description 4-18Detailed Information 4-24EMS 4-25

5 Mobility Manager Application Processor(MM-AP) 5-1

■ Introduction 5-1Benefits 5-2

viii Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

ContentsOptional feature 5-2Location 5-2Hardware 5-3Connection 5-3Software 5-3Applications 5-3

■ Network Architecture 5-8Executive Cellular Processor Complex (ECPC) 5-85ESS Digital Cellular Switch (DCS) 5-8Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster

(MM-APC) 5-8Operations and Management Platform (OMP) 5-8AUTOPLEX® and Flexent® Cells 5-9Ethernet Interface Node Enhanced (EINE) 5-9

■ MM-AP Evolution 5-10Flexent Mobility Server (FMS) 5-10Applications to Evolve 5-11

■ 500K BHCA Offer 5-12Description 5-12Optional feature 5-12Benefits 5-12Hardware requirements 5-12Software requirements 5-12Availability 5-13For Further Information 5-13

■ 700K BHCA Offer 5-14Optional Feature 5-14Benefits 5-14Availability 5-14Requirements 5-14For Further Information 5-14

■ Mobility Manager Hardware 5-15Installation needs 5-15Mobility Manager Application Processor

(MM-AP) 5-15Mobility Manager Application Processor

Frame (MM-APF) 5-15Frame types 5-17LMT 5-18MM-APC 5-18MMAPCC 5-18

Issue 15 July 2002 ix


ContentsMobility Manager Connections to Other

Network Elements 5-18■ Mobility Manager Software Architecture 5-21■ Legacy Application Processor 5-24

APF 5-26MFFU 5-27Fan Units 5-27Demarcation Panel 5-27WatchDog/Maintenance Module 5-28Dual LAN Hubs 5-28Code Switch 5-28Local Maintenance Terminal 5-29ECP Complex/EIN 5-29Radio Cluster Server (RCS) 5-29Software Architecture 5-30Detailed Information 5-32APCC 5-33

6 5ESS® Digital Cellular Switch (DCS) 6-1

■ Introduction 6-1Benefits 6-1

■ 5ESS DCS (U.S. Version) 6-3Architecture 6-35ESS DCS Hardware Components 6-6

■ 5ESS DCS (International Version) 6-16Architecture 6-16Hardware Components 6-17

7 Cell Site Types 7-1

■ Introduction 7-1■ Cell Functions 7-1■ Hardware Components 7-2■ Cell Product Family 7-2■ Series II Cell 7-4

Radio Channel Frame (RCF) 7-5Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) 7-9

x Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

ContentsAntenna Interface Frame (AIF) 7-10Hardware Options 7-12Additional Information 7-13Alarms 7-15Software 7-15

■ Series II TDMA 7-19RCF 7-19TDMA Hardware Options 7-24Additional Information 7-24

■ Series II CDMA 7-25CDMA Channel Units (CCUs) 7-25

■ Series IIe Cell Site 7-31■ Series IIm and Series IImm Cell Sites 7-33

Product Offering 7-37Series IIm T1/E1 Minicell 7-38Series IImm T1/E1 Microcell 7-39Series IIm and IImm Functional Overview 7-40

■ Series II Cellular CDMA Minicell 7-44Cellular CDMA Minicell Components 7-45Cellular Minicell AIF Cabinet 7-47CDMA/PCS Minicell Rack-Mounted Growth

Cabinets 7-49CDMA Double Density Growth Frame 7-50

■ PCS CDMA Minicell 7-54CDMA/PCS Special Omni Minicell 7-54

■ 850 CDMA Compact Minicell 7-55■ TDMA PCS Minicell 7-56■ Flexent® TDMA MultiRange Base Station 7-57

Hardware and Functionality 7-57General Characteristics 7-57

■ Flexent® OneBTS for TDMA networks 7-58Hardware and Functionality 7-58General Characteristics 7-58

■ Microcells 7-59External Structure 7-59External Physical Characteristics 7-59Environmental Diversity 7-61Environmental Operating Range 7-61Connection and Control 7-62Functions 7-63

Issue 15 July 2002 xi


ContentsAntennas 7-63Configuration Options 7-63Power Provisions 7-64Common Ancillary Equipment 7-65User Interface 7-68CDMA Technology 7-70TDMA Technology 7-75

■ CDMA Modular base station Sites 7-78External Structure 7-78External Physical Characteristics 7-78Connection and Control 7-79Environmental Considerations 7-81Functions 7-81Antennas 7-81Configuration Options 7-82Power Provisions 7-82Common Ancillary Equipment 7-82User Interface 7-84CDMA Technology 7-85

■ Flexent® CDMA Distributed Base Station 7-90■ Series II Cell Site Antennas 7-91

Omnidirectional Antenna 7-91Directional Antenna 7-93GPS Antenna 7-93Antenna Mast 7-93Series II Filters 7-95Series II RF Transmission 7-95Antenna Options 7-96

■ Related Documents 7-97

8 Power Products 8-1

■ Introduction 8-1■ MSC Power Products 8-2

DC Power Products 8-2AC Power Products 8-5

■ Series II Cell Site Power Products 8-6DC Power Products 8-6AC Power Products 8-8

xii Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Contents

9 Cellular Engineering 9-1

■ Introduction 9-1■ Planning 9-1

Locating Cell Sites and MSC 9-2System Layout 9-2FCC Application 9-3CGSA Planning 9-3

■ Cellular Configurations 9-4Cochannel Cell Layout 9-4Start-up Cell Configuration 9-5Growth 9-9

10 Applications 10-1

■ Introduction 10-1■ WIN 10-1

Network Overview 10-2■ Cellular Digital Packet Data Systems 10-5

Overview 10-6■ Cellular Gateway Switch 10-10

Introduction 10-10Overview 10-10

■ TTY/TDD for CDMA and TDMA 10-12

11 Building Requirements, EquipmentSpecifications, and Floor Plans 11-1

■ Introduction 11-1■ Mobile Switching Center (MSC) 11-1

Lighting 11-1Environmental Requirements 11-2Grounding and Surge Protection Requirements 11-4Equipment Power Requirements and Heat

Release 11-5Equipment Specifications 11-9

■ Series II Cell Site 11-15

Issue 15 July 2002 xiii


ContentsLighting 11-15Environmental Requirements 11-15Grounding Requirements 11-15Power Requirements 11-16Heat Release 11-16Equipment Specifications 11-17Floor Plans 11-17Fire/Intrusion Protection 11-17Antenna Installation 11-17

12 Mobility Solutions Services 12-1

■ Introduction 12-1Wireless Technical Support Service 12-2Wireless Consultation Service 12-2Wireless Expansion Services 12-3Wireless Integration Service 12-3Wireless Performance Management Service 12-3Wireless Program Management 12-4Wireless RF Engineering Service 12-4

xiv Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Contents

Issue 15 July 2002 xv


Figures

1 Introduction to Wireless Technologies

1-1. A Simplified Cellular Telecommunications System 1-21-2. Seven-Cell Reuse Pattern and Frequency

Assignments (Omnidirectional Cells) 1-51-3. Dual Cell Design for Omni, 3-Sector, and 6-Sector

Cell Sites 1-71-4. Partially Dualized 3-Sector Cells—Examples 1-81-5. TDMA—Time Division Multiplexing of Three

Mobiles onto a 30 KHz Channel 1-121-6. CDMA Modulation and Demodulation on the

Forward Link 1-191-7. Forward CDMA Channels (from Cell to Mobile) 1-211-8. Reverse CDMA Channel (from Mobile to Cell) 1-221-9. Reverse CDMA Channel Compositions 1-231-10. CDMA System Time at Various Points in the

CDMA System 1-241-11. Starting Points of Long Code and Zero-Offset

Pilot PN Sequences 1-25

2 Call Processing

2-1. Signaling and Voice Paths 2-52-2. AMPS/TDMA Mobile Unit to Landline Call

Processing (Sheet 1 of 4) 2-82-2. AMPS/TDMA Mobile Unit to Landline Call



Processing (Sheet 4 of 4) 2-112-3. AMPS/TDMA Landline to Mobile Call Processing

(Sheet 1 of 6) 2-132-3. AMPS/TDMA Landline to Mobile Call Processing

(Sheet 2 of 6) 2-142-3. AMPS/TDMA Landline to Mobile Call Processing

(Sheet 3 of 6) 2-15

xvi Issue 15 July 2002

401-610-006

Figures


2-3. AMPS/TDMA Landline to Mobile Call Processing(Sheet 4 of 6) 2-16



2-4. AMPS/TDMA Mobile Unit to Mobile Unit CallProcessing 2-20

2-5. Call Handoff Areas 2-212-6. AMPS/TDMA Hard Handoff (Sheet 1 of 3) 2-232-6. AMPS/TDMA Hard Handoff (Sheet 2 of 3) 2-242-6. AMPS/TDMA Hard Handoff (Sheet 3 of 3) 2-252-7. 5ESS DCS CDMA Components 2-272-8. 5ESS DCS CDMA Call Flow (Sheet 1 of 6) 2-292-8. 5ESS DCS CDMA Call Flow (Sheet 2 of 6) 2-302-8. 5ESS DCS CDMA Call Flow (Sheet 3 of 6) 2-312-8. 5ESS DCS CDMA Call Flow (Sheet 4 of 6) 2-322-8. 5ESS DCS CDMA Call Flow (Sheet 5 of 6) 2-332-8. 5ESS DCS CDMA Call Flow (Sheet 6 of 6) 2-342-9. CDMA Mobile-to-Landline Call Processing

(Sheet 1 of 4) 2-372-9. CDMA Mobile-to-Landline Call Processing



(Sheet 4 of 4) 2-402-10. CDMA Landline-to-Mobile Call Processing






(Sheet 6 of 6) 2-48

Issue 15 July 2002 xvii


Figures

2-11. CDMA Mobile Unit-to-Mobile Unit CallProcessing 2-50

2-12. CDMA Soft Handoff 2-552-13. CDMA Inter-SM Soft Handoff 2-592-14. PSU Interconnection via PHA

(via Point-to-Point ATM) 2-60

3 Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® WirelessNetworks Architecture

3-1. Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wirelessnetworks MSC 3-2

4 Executive Cellular ProcessorComplex (ECPC)

4-1. 3B21D Processor Architecture 4-44-2. Typical ECP Configuration 4-64-3. IMS Ring Architecture 4-104-4. IMS Basic Cabinet Configuration 4-144-5. Standard OMP-FX System Architecture 4-194-6. OMP-FX Equipment Cabinet and Miscellaneous

Cabinet (Front View) 4-204-7. OMP-FX Single Cabinet Configuration 4-224-8. EMS Interface 4-25

5 Mobility Manager ApplicationProcessor (MM-AP)

5-1. 400S and 800S MM-APs 5-175-2. MM-APC Connections to Other Network

Elements 5-195-3. MM-APC Software Architecture 5-215-4. Simplified APC Configuration 5-25

xviii Issue 15 July 2002

401-610-006

Figures


5-5. Application Processor Frame 5-265-6. RCSs on the AP 5-305-7. Star Network Configuration 5-35

6 5ESS® Digital Cellular Switch (DCS)

6-1. U.S. 5ESS DCS 6-46-2. U.S. 5ESS DCS (Ringless) 6-56-3. 5ESS DCS Components 6-66-4. 5ESS DCS VCDX 6-76-5. 5ESS DCS Administrative Module 6-86-6. 5ESS DCS CDMA Components 6-116-7. A Generalized Digital Communication System

and How It Maps to the TDMA and CDMASystems 6-12

6-8. International 5ESS DCS 6-18

7 Cell Site Types

7-1. Series II Cell Site Architecture 7-57-3. Radio Control Complex (RCC) Architecture 7-77-4. Linear Amplifier Frame Input/Output Connections 7-97-5. Antenna Interface Frame Input/Output

Connections 7-117-6. Transportable Cell Site Building 7-147-7. Digital and Analog Radio TDM Bus Interfaces 7-217-9. Basic Configuration of a CDMA Series II Cell

Site Radio Shelf 7-257-10. PL FT Message Flow 7-307-11. Series IIe Hardware Configuration 7-327-12. Series IIm T1/E1 Minicell Hardware

Configuration 7-357-13. Series IImm T1/E1 Microcell Hardware

Configurations 7-367-14. Series IIm RF Transmit Path 7-417-15. Series IImm RF Transmit Path 7-41

Issue 15 July 2002 xix


Figures

7-16. Series IIm and Series IImm RF Receive Path 7-427-18. Mini AIF 7-487-19. Primary, Single Growth, and Rack-Mounted

Cabinets Configuration 7-497-20. Double Density Growth Frame, Cellular

CDMA Minicell Primary Frame 7-517-21. Double Density Growth Frame with the

SII Primary Frame 7-527-22. Microcell 7-607-23. Simplified View of Microcell-to-MSC Relationship 7-627-24. Common Ancillary Equipment Example 7-667-25. PDC Cabinet Diagrams 7-677-26. CDMA Microcell Interior 7-707-27. CDMA Microcell Signal Flow 7-727-28. TDMA Microcell Signal Flow 7-767-29. CDMA Modular base station Exterior 7-807-30. Simplified View of Modular base station-to-MSC

Relationship 7-807-31. Common Modular base station Ancillary

Equipment Example 7-837-32. CDMA Modular base station Interior 7-857-33. CDMA Modular base station Signal Flow 7-877-36. GPS Antenna and Satellite 7-95

8 Power Products

8-1. LINEAGE 2000 Microprocessor-ControlledSystem Battery Plant with200 -Amp, 3-Phase Rectifiers 8-3

8-2. LINEAGE 2000 ECS Power Plant with12 - 100-Amp Rectifiers 8-7

9 Cellular Engineering

9-1. Determination of Cochannel Cells with 7-CellReuse Pattern 9-5

xx Issue 15 July 2002

401-610-006

Figures


9-2. Cochannel Reuse Ratio (D/R) for 7-CellReuse Pattern 9-6

9-3. Cochannel Reuse Ration (D/R) for 4-Cell ReusePattern 9-7

9-4. Cells Served by Omnidirectional Antennas 9-89-5. Cells Served by Three Directional Antennas 9-109-6. Cells Served by Six Directional Antennas 9-119-7. Cell Split (Start-up-to-Growth Configurations) 9-129-8. Location of Cell Sites in Cell-Splitting Process 9-139-9. Cell Site Antenna Arrangement after Cell Splitting 9-14

10 Applications

10-1. Wireless Intelligent Network 10-310-2. CDPD Mobile Data Network 10-710-3. Trunking Fully Connected 10-1010-4. Trunking-Hierarchical 10-11

11 Building Requirements, EquipmentSpecifications, and Floor Plans

11-1. Representative Non-Flexent 5ESS DCSConfiguration (Release 17.0). 11-10

11-2. ECPC/PCS Access Manager Release 17.0 andBeyond (Flexent/IS-634) 11-11

11-3. ECPC/PCS Access Manager Release 17.0and Beyond (Non-Flexent). 11-13

11-4. Representative Flexent/IS-634 5ESS DCSConfiguration (Release 17.0). 11-14

11-5. Typical 200-Channel Series II Cell Site Floor Plan 11-18

12 Mobility Solutions Services

Issue 15 July 2002 xxi

Tables


About This Document

1 Introduction to Wireless Technologies

2 Call Processing

3 Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® Wireless NetworksArchitecture

3-1. Release 14.01 Database Server HardwareRequirements 3-10

4 Executive Cellular Processor Complex (ECPC)

5 Mobility Manager Application Processor (MM-AP)

6 5ESS® Digital Cellular Switch (DCS)

7 Cell Site Types

7-1. Series II Cell Site Voice Channel and OutputPower Maximums 7-3

xxii Issue 15 July 2002

000-111-222

Tables


7-4. Physical Specifications 7-607-5. CDMA Modular Specifications 7-79

8 Power Products

9 Cellular Engineering

10 Applications

11 Building Requirements, Equipment Specifications,and Floor Plans

11-1. Ambient Temperature and Humidity Limits forthe MSC 11-2

11-2. Allowable Contaminants for the MSC 11-311-3. Transient Voltage Limits 11-511-4. AC Input Power to MSC 11-611-5. System Power Requirements Part 1 11-611-6. System Power Requirements Part 2 11-811-8. Full Battery Holdover Time 11-1611-9. Series II Cell Site Equipment Specifications 11-17

12 Mobility Solutions Services

Issue 15 July 2002 xxiii


About This Document

Welcome to This Document

Wireless telecommunications services are growing rapidly, exceeding the mostoptimistic forecasts for demand of only a few years ago. International wirelesscommunications markets are expanding at an even greater rate. Wirelesssubscriber growth is likely to expand by 40 percent per year.

Wireless service providers must squeeze more and more capacity from thefrequency spectrum that is allocated by national communications regulators. Thebasic analog technology is Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA). Thestandard for the first practical FDMA system in this country was the AdvancedMobile Phone Service (AMPS).

With FDMA technology, additional capacity is gained by splitting cells and the useof various techniques to manage frequency interference. In many cases, theanalog air-interface technology has reached its limit. When the limit is reached,service providers cannot add more cells for system capacity without sacrificingcall quality.

xxiv Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Wireless service providers that use analog air-interface technologies are notalone in the need to address capacity concerns. Additional spectrum capacity ismade available for new Personal Communications Services (PCS) in the 2 GHzradio spectrum. PCS requires advanced digital technology to integrate IntelligentNetwork Services with wireless systems. In both cellular and PCS markets, dataapplications are becoming increasingly important, which further strain systemcapacity. New services must implement the most efficient technology available sothat they may gain the maximum return on their investment and not be limited bycapacity.

As a leading provider of superior telecommunications equipment, LucentTechnologies is at the forefront of wireless communications networks in both theUnited States and the global market. One of Lucent Technologies strongestadvantages is the ability to provide wireless networks based on the major wirelessstandards, including

■ Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA)

■ Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)

■ Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)

■ Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Lucent Technologies provides a flexible, modular distributed system that issupported with state-of-the-art research and production. The Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless network provides seamless coverage for the largest orsmallest market. Whether deploying new systems or expanding existing systems,the architecture of the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless network allows for growthby adding and evolving equipment.

Purpose

This System Description describes the attributes and advantages of the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless network, discusses its components and functions, andexplains how to implement access technologies within the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX®

wireless network.

This document provides an overview of the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wirelessnetwork and describes the system components and how the components functiontogether. This document Also includes general high-level information onengineering, auxiliary products, Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networkapplications, and Lucent Technologies Mobility Solutions Services.

Issue 15 July 2002 xxv


About This Document

Intended Audience

This document is intended for anyone who needs an overview of the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless network elements, system requirements, and/or planninginformation.

Prerequisite Skills and Knowledge

To use this document effectively, you need a general understanding of wirelesstelecommunications technology.

Reason for Reissue

This document has been updated to reflect the impact of Executive CellularProcessor (ECP) Release 19. With each release, discontinued hardwareequipment and software tools are deleted.

Changes and Additions for ECP Release 19

This document has been updated to reflect newer technology, that is, themigration of call processing applications from the Executive Cellular Processor(ECP) to the Mobility Manager Application Processor (MM-AP), and the newname and organization given to the Mobility Solutions Services group.

xxvi Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

How to Use This Document

For an overview of the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless network, begin to read thisdocument at Chapter 1. For information on a specific element or aspect of theFlexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless network, read the appropriate chapter of thedocument. The document includes the following chapters:

■ Chapter 1, "Introduction to Wireless Technologies," describes FDMA,TDMA, and CDMA wireless technologies.

■ Chapter 2, "Call Processing," describes call scenarios for FDMA, TDMA,and CDMA.

■ Chapter 3, "Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® Wireless Networks Architecture,"provides a general overview of the system.

■ Chapter 4, "Executive Cellular Processor Complex (ECPC)," describes thearchitecture of the ECP Complex and provides specific information on theECP, Interprocess Message Switch (IMS) Ring, and Operations andManagement Platform for Flexent (OMP-FX) hardware and software.

■ Chapter 5, "Mobility Manager Application Processor (MM-AP)," describesthe MM-AP and its associated components.

■ Chapter 6, "5ESS® Digital Cellular Switch (DCS),"describes thearchitecture and hardware of the 5ESS® DCS.

■ Chapter 7, "Cell Site Types," describes the various types of cell sites in theFlexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless network.

■ Chapter 8, "Power Products,"describes the power products used in theMobile Switching Center (MSC) and the Series II cell sites.

■ Chapter 9, "Cellular Engineering," describes the issues that serviceproviders must consider to engineer a new cell site. These topics includelocation, layout, FCC application, CGSA planning, and wirelessconfigurations.

■ Chapter 10, "Applications," describes Lucent Technologies network, data,and billing applications.

■ Chapter 11, "Building Requirements, Equipment Specifications, and FloorPlans," describes building and floor requirements for the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless network.

■ Chapter 12, "Mobility Solutions Services," describes services that LucentTechnologies offers in areas such as engineering, training, installation, andmaintenance.

■ The Glossary defines terms that relate to the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX®

wireless network.

■ The Index identifies the location of information on specific topics in thisdocument.

Issue 15 July 2002 xxvii


About This Document

To Obtain Technical Support,Documentation, and Training orSubmit Feedback

The 401-010-001 Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® Wireless Networks SystemsDocumentation CD-ROM and web site provide a “To obtain documentation,training, and technical support or send feedback” document. That documentexplains how to

■ obtain technical support from Lucent Technologies

■ register as an authorized user of the Lucent Technologies customertechnical support web site

■ access the most current AMPS/PCS and related 5ESS® Digital CellularSwitch (DCS) documentation on the web site

■ order system and product documentation from Lucent Technologies

■ order Lucent Technologies training products or register for classroomtraining courses

■ submit comments and feedback about Lucent Technologies documentationand training

xxviii Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Contents

Issue 15 July 2002 1-i


1Introduction to WirelessTechnologies

Introduction 1-1

■ Access Technologies 1-3

Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) 1-4

■ Frequency Reuse 1-4■ Cell Plans 1-6

Sectoring 1-6Dual Cell Design 1-6Supervisory Audio (Analog Color) Tones 1-8FDMA Fiber-Link Microcell Support 1-9

Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) 1-10

■ Advantages of TDMA over FDMA 1-10Other advantages 1-11

■ Dual-Mode Operation 1-11IS-136 Compliant Dual-Mode Mobile Stations 1-11IS-136 Compliant Dual-Mode, Dual-Band Mobile Stations 1-12

■ Digital Control Channel (DCCH) 1-13■ TDMA Radio Interface 1-13■ TDMA System Access 1-13■ Handoff 1-13

Mobile-Assisted Handoff (MAHO) Procedure 1-14Hybrid MAHO or Digital Locate TDMA Handoff Algorithm 1-14

Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) 1-15

■ Dual-Mode Operation 1-18IS-95A Compliant Mobile Stations 1-20J-STD-008 Compliant Mobile Stations 1-20

■ CDMA Carriers 1-20

1-ii Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

ContentsForward CDMA Channel Signals 1-21Reverse CDMA Channel Signals 1-21

■ CDMA System Time 1-21

Mobile Units 1-26

■ Classes of Mobile Units 1-26■ Types of Mobile Units 1-26■ Interoperability Mobile Unit Test Program 1-27

Issue 15 July 2002 1-1


1Introduction to Wireless Technologies

Introduction

This chapter describes the access technologies that are supported by Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks. This chapter also defines mobile units, explainsthe different classes and types of mobile units, and provides information onordering mobile units.

In a cellular radio system, the service area is divided into geographical units(which are called cells0. Each cell is served by its own radio and controlequipment, which are located at the cell site (see Figure 1-1). Each cell siteprovides the radio connection between mobile units in its area and the rest of thenetwork. The cell sites are connected to the Mobile Switching Center (MSC) bytrunks. Other trunks connect the MSC to the public switched telephone network(PSTN).

NOTE:The term cellular usually refers to wireless service that uses the 850 MHz block offrequencies. The term Personal Communications Services (PCS) refers to thewireless services that use the 1.9 GHz block of frequencies. In this chapter,mobile refers to any wireless telephone. The terms mobile user and cellular userare synonymous.

1-2 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Each cell site is allocated a set of radio frequencies. To avoid interference,neighboring cell sites are assigned different frequencies. Cell sites that aresufficiently far apart can simultaneously use the same frequencies. This allowschannel reuse for different conversations many times in a given service area. Cellsplitting, the process of adding new cell sites between existing cell sites to form agrid of smaller cells, provides still more radio channels to meet service demands.

As soon as a call is requested, the system locates the active mobile unit in its areaand sets up the call. As the subscriber drives from one cell to another, the systemautomatically hands off the call from cell to cell without service interruption.

These concepts of handoff, channel reuse, and cell splitting are utilized in theFlexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks.

Figure 1-1. A Simplified Cellular Telecommunications System

CENTERMOBILE SWITCHINGMSC

MSC

NETWORKTELEPHONE

DATACONTROL

VOICE

CELL SITECS

CS

CS

CS



Introduction to Wireless Technologies

Access Technologies

There are three air interfaces, or access technologies, for wireless telephoneservice currently in use in the North American market. These air interfaces areused to distinguish the type of system operated by service providers. These threeaccess technologies are the following:

■ Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA). This is commonly calledAMPS (Advanced Mobile Phone Service) by Lucent employees becausethat was the original name AT&T gave to the AUTOPLEX® mobile phonesystem. FDMA is analog service. In this document, the terms “AMPS” and“FDMA” are used interchangeably.

■ Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA). TDMA technology followsstandards set by the Telecommunications Industries Association (TIA)standards numbered IS-54/IS-136. In TDMA digital encoding is performedby the mobiles with timeslot multiplexing to increase capacity.

■ Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA). CDMA technology follows TIAstandard IS-95. CDMA uses sophisticated encoding of digital signals tomultiplex multiple channels on the same carrier.

A fourth access technology, Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), isnot supported by the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks. GSM is thestandard for Europe and other parts of the world. GSM is based on TDMA, butNorth American TDMA mobiles are not compatible with GSM.



401-610-006

Frequency Division Multiple Access(FDMA)

In FDMA, the entire allocated cellular frequency spectrum is divided into a numberof 30-kHz channels, each with its specific carrier frequency. Communicationconsists of pairs of carrier frequencies; each pair is assigned a unique RF channelnumber. One carrier frequency is used for transmission from the cell site to themobile station (forward channel or downlink), and the other is used fortransmission from the mobile station to the cell site (reverse channel or uplink).

Frequency Reuse

Frequency reuse is the use of the same RF frequency repeatedly in the samegeneral area in one cellular system. Each cell site is allocated a set offrequencies, or channels. Neighboring cells are assigned different frequencies inorder to avoid interference. Cell sites sufficiently far apart can simultaneously usethe same frequencies, which allows reuse of each frequency (channel) fordifferent calls many times in a given service area.

Maximizing the number of times that each channel can be reused in a servicearea is the key to efficient cellular system design. The more times a channel canbe reused in a given service area, the more calls the system can handle. Cell sitesemploy low-power transmitters for that very reason: cell sites using the samechannels can be located closer together with negligible co-channel (samechannel) interference. Figure 1-2 on page 1-5 illustrates the concept of afrequency reuse pattern.

NOTE:The power transmitted by a cell is only large enough to communicate with mobilestations located near the edge of the cell’s coverage area. In a start-up system,the radius of a cell might be eight miles—referred to as a large cell. In a maturesystem, the radius of a cell might be one mile or less—referred to as a small cell.




Figure 1-2. Seven-Cell Reuse Pattern and Frequency Assignments (OmnidirectionalCells)

D

D

C

B

D

G

E

C

A F

D

G

C

B

A F D

E

B

A

D

G

E

C

B

F

D

G B

A F

D

RADIUS

SEPARATION

DISTANCE

A. OMNIDIRECTIONAL SITES

FORMULA: D/R = 4.

B

E

C

A

F

G

E

B

F

C

A

G

R



401-610-006

Cell Plans

The objective of a cell plan is to cover the service area as economically aspossible, while allowing for maximum flexibility for future frequency reuse.

Sectoring

In the initial expansion stages, it is possible to add previously unallocated userchannels to cells that need more capacity. Adding new channels requiresadditional radios and associated RF equipment at the selected cell sites. A cellrequiring more capacity also may be divided into sectors, each of which has adirectional antenna that radiates more power in some directions than in others.Directional antennas are important tools in minimizing interference.

Sectoring is normally done with 120-degree directional antennas, where threetransmit antennas are used to cover the full 360 degrees.

Dual Cell Design

Another way to accommodate system growth without adding new cell sites is touse the dual cell design. A dual cell is functionally equivalent to a large cell and asmall cell located at the same site. Typically, the larger cell has a cell radiusapproximately twice that of the smaller cell. The larger cell is known as theunderlaid cell, and the smaller cell is known as the overlaid cell. (See Figure 1-3.)

NOTE:The dual cell design is a Series II Cell Site feature applicable to FDMA and TDMAbut not CDMA.

The assigned frequencies for a dual cell are separated into two different servergroups (subsets of radios) operating at independent power levels. The primaryserver group, designated SG0 in Figure 1-3, operates at low power to realize theoverlaid cell.

The secondary server group, designated SG1 in Figure 1-3, operates at highpower to realize the underlaid cell. The primary server group serves mobiles closeto the cell, and the secondary server group serves mobiles farther from the cell.




Figure 1-3. Dual Cell Design for Omni, 3-Sector, and 6-Sector Cell Sites

A dual cell provides a way to restrict the use of certain frequencies to a muchsmaller geographical area than the area used by other frequencies at the samecell site. This is desirable, for example, if some, but not all, of the frequencies ofan assigned frequency set are reused at a nearby cell site. The frequenciesreused nearby would be assigned to the primary server group, while frequencieswith no reuse problems would be assigned to the secondary server group. Withinthe overlaid cell, the amount of power transmitted by both the cell site and themobiles would be reduced, which would reduce the amount of interference fromco-channel cell sites.

Handoffs occur between overlaid and underlaid cells as well as between otherneighboring cells. Handoffs from an overlaid cell to an underlaid cell are calleddownward handoffs. Handoffs from an underlaid cell to an overlaid cell are calledupward handoffs.

Radios assigned to separate server groups of a dual cell may share the use of thesame physical antenna. The combination of server group and physical antenna iscalled a logical antenna face. In a cell site using sector antennas, two servergroups (primary, secondary) may be uniquely assigned to a particular sector. (SeeFigure 1-4 for examples.) A cell site having six physical antenna faces (alpha,beta, gamma, delta, epsilon, zeta) and two unique server groups (primary,secondary) on each face is said to have 12 logical antenna faces.

3-SECTORDUAL CELL DESIGN

OMNIDIRECTIONALDUAL CELL DESIGN

6-SECTORDUAL CELL DESIGN

OVERLAIDCELL

UNDERLAIDCELL

SG0

SG1

SG0

SG1

SG0

SG1



401-610-006

Figure 1-4. Partially Dualized 3-Sector Cells—Examples

Supervisory Audio (Analog Color) Tones

In FDMA, adjacent cell clusters are allocated different supervisory audio tone(SAT) codes so that a cell can identify local cell traffic from distant interferingtraffic. The use of SAT tones minimizes the probability of the cell makingerroneous control decisions due to co-channel or adjacent-channel interference.

NOTE:The most significant interference for a cell is from a distant mobile that operateson the same frequency (co-channel interference).

ONE FACE DUALIZED(FOUR LOGICAL ANTENNA FACES)

TWO FACES DUALIZED(FIVE LOGICAL ANTENNA FACES)

SG0

SG1

SG0

SG1




FDMA Fiber-Link Microcell Support

System capacity and/or coverage for a Series II Cell Site can be improvedsubstantially by the addition of microcells. Microcells are low-power RF systemsthat attach to host cells (often referred to as a macrocells) to provide coveragefrom perhaps a few hundred feet (60 meters) up to 3,280 feet (1 kilometer) inradius. Microcells compensate for macrocell coverage deficiencies by increasingsystem capacity in high-density urban areas and by bringing coverage to areaswhere macrocells cannot penetrate, such as inside buildings, airports, andtunnels.

The Series II Cell Site can host either of the following microcell systems:

■ A Series II Microcell system

■ A Universal Fiber Microcell system.

Either system attaches to the host Series II Cell Site via optical-fiber links andoperates under the direction of the host. The host performs the voice and controlchannel signal processing and exchanges RF signals with the attached microcellsystem.

NOTE:The Series II Microcell not only supports FDMA but also supports TDMA, CDMA,and other digital wireless technologies. The fiber-link microcell system alsosupports FDMA, TDMA, or CDMA, depending on the radio hardware installed.

1-10 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Time Division Multiple Access(TDMA)

TDMA is a digital wireless air interface that divides each carrier frequency into anumber of time slots, each of which constitutes an independent telephone circuit.The Telecommunications Industries Association (TIA) endorsed TDMA in 1990,and since that time, TDMA has proven to be a reliable access technology formany North American digital wireless systems. It is also the basis for the GSMstandard.

Advantages of TDMA over FDMA

Cellular TDMA offers up three times the traffic capacity of current cellular FDMAnetworks. It provides for new user applications and improved, more flexible,service. Initial user applications include short message service, mobile sleepmode, and private networks. The enhanced set of services include: messagewaiting indicator, calling number identification, voice privacy, authentication, dataservices, closed user groups, and more.

Assuming a frequency reuse factor similar to the analog design, the resultingcapacity with TDMA is one call per 10 kHz of spectrum, or three times that of theFDMA system. It may also support the reduction of the frequency re-use factorfrom the traditional seven to six or even lower, further increasing system capacity.

Issue 15 July 2002 1-11



Other advantages

■ Fraud Prevention. An advanced authentication technique eliminates theneed for a PIN code, while making cloning virtually impossible. Optionalencryption software secures voice and control channels.

■ Improved radio efficiency. The Digital Control Channel (DCCH) offers highpaging capacity, sharing TDMA traffic and control on the same digital radiomaximizes system efficiency, and reduces hardware costs. DCCH alsoprovides the platform for a new generation of advanced wirelesscapabilities.

■ Investment protection. The ability to download new features remotelyprotects your investment in TDMA equipment. Features of the Series IIanalog products have been duplicated for digital TDMA products.

■ Improved voice quality. The TDMA vocoder uses the Algebraic CodeExcited Linear Predictive (ACELP) encoding algorithm to provide advancedvoice technology. Error checking algorithms improve correction of erroredframes or channels, demodulation, and equalization.

■ Nationwide roaming. The inherent compatibility between FDMA andTDMA, coupled with the deployment of dual-mode/dual-band terminalsensures ubiquitous network access for mobile subscribers whether in PCSor in combined analog-TDMA cellular serving areas.

Both cellular TDMA and PCS TDMA provide a basic modulation efficiency of threecalls per 30-kHz of bandwidth. A 30-kHz channel is subdivided into timeslots forTDMA transmissions. The mobiles are synchronized so that they transmit onlyduring their respective timeslots.

Figure 1-5 is a simplified representation showing the three air interface channelswhich are multiplexed before being sent to the MSC.

Dual-Mode Operation

The TIA IS-136 standards include provision for future service additions andexpansions of system capabilities. In addition, the architecture defined by thestandards permits such expansion without the loss of backward compatibility withthe FDMA system.

IS-136 Compliant Dual-Mode Mobile Stations

IS-136 compliant dual-mode mobiles can access the TDMA system via the ACCor the digital control channel (DCCH).

1-12 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 1-5. TDMA—Time Division Multiplexing of Three Mobiles onto a 30 KHzChannel

IS-136 compliant dual-mode mobile can obtain service by communicating witheither TDMA or FDMA radios. Whether the communication is TDMA or FDMAdepends on the availability of either system in the geographic area of the mobilestation as well as the preferred call mode requested by the mobile whenaccessing the system. The preferred call mode can be TDMA only, FDMA only, ordual-mode TDMA (either TDMA or FDMA).

IS-136 Compliant Dual-Mode, Dual-Band MobileStations

The IS-136 compliant dual-mode, dual-band mobiles can obtain service bycommunicating with either PCS TDMA or FDMA radios. Thus, the preferred callmode requested by an IS-136 compliant dual-mode, dual-band mobile whenaccessing the system can be PCS TDMA only, FDMA only, or dual-mode, dual-band PCS TDMA (either PCS TDMA or FDMA).

NOTE:IS-136 compliant dual-mode, dual-band mobiles access the PCS TDMA systemvia the DCCH.

DIGITAL

DIGITAL

DIGITAL

TDMA MOBILES

30 KHz CHANNEL

MULTIPLEXER

Issue 15 July 2002 1-13



Digital Control Channel (DCCH)

The DCCH performs the setup function for mobile subscribers using IS-136compliant mobiles. The DCCH is used in place of the ACC. The ACC is intendedto provide basic system access (that is, call setup, registration, paging, callorigination, call termination, authentication, and so on). The DCCH is intended toprovides basic system access plus air interface support for many new features.

TDMA Radio Interface

The TDMA radio interface between the serving cell site and the mobiles is a 3-layered communications architecture. The physical layer is referred to as the airinterface. The physical layer not only supports the functions required for thetransmission of bit streams on the air interface, but also provides accesscapabilities to the upper layers. The uppermost layer carries messages that aretransparent to the cell site; the messages convey call control and mobile accessinformation between the MSC and the mobile station.

TDMA System Access

Mobile originations and page response messages are transmitted to or receivedfrom the cellular TDMA system over the ACC unless the DCCH feature is in effectat the cell site and the accessing mobile is an IS-136 compliant mobile. In thelatter case, mobile originations and page response messages may be transmittedto or received from the cellular TDMA system over the DCCH. IS-136 compliantdual-mode, dual-band mobiles can only access the PCS TDMA system via theDCCH.

Handoff

Handoff is the passing of a call from one traffic channel to another traffic channelto provide better service—higher quality communication—to the mobile user.Conditions that can trigger a handoff include poor signal strength and poor signalquality. Handoff is required to maintain a call in progress as the mobile stationpasses from one cell site coverage area to another.

There are three basic types of handoff:

■ Intra-cell handoff: Handoff within the same cell site.

■ Inter-cell handoff: Handoff between neighboring cell sites within the sameMSC.

■ Inter-MSC handoff: Handoff between neighboring cell sites controlled bytwo different cell sites in two different MSCs.

1-14 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

For all three types of handoff, the serving cell initiates the handoff by sending aHandoff Request Message to the MSC. Included in the message is a list ofoptimal cell site candidates to which the call may be switched. The MSC selects acandidate from the list and initiates the handoff-related procedure.

NOTE:There are cases where the MSC will initiate a handoff without direction from thecell site, for the purpose of traffic balancing or maintenance, such as to transfer allcalls from a particular cell site to another so that the cell site can be taken off-linefor testing.

The Lucent Technologies TDMA platform supports the following additional typesof handoff:

■ TDMA to TDMA

■ TDMA to FDMA

■ FDMA to FDMA

■ PCS TDMA to TDMA

■ TDMA to PCS TDMA

■ PCS TDMA to FDMA

Mobile-Assisted Handoff (MAHO) Procedure

The TDMA mobile-assisted handoff (MAHO) procedure serves all TDMAcompliant mobiles when they are served on TDMA or PCS TDMA digital trafficchannels. The mobiles measure the signal strength of neighboring antenna facesand report the measurements to the serving cell to determine optimal candidatefaces for handoff.

Hybrid MAHO or Digital Locate TDMA HandoffAlgorithm

The hybrid MAHO or digital locate TDMA handoff algorithm feature gives theservice provider the option to select on a per logical face basis either the standardMAHO algorithm or the hybrid MAHO or digital locate TDMA handoff algorithm asthe means for handing off calls on TDMA digital traffic channels. Prior to theintroduction of this feature, all calls on digital traffic channels were handed off viathe standard MAHO algorithm, as explained in “Mobile-Assisted Handoff (MAHO)Procedure” on page 1-14.

Issue 15 July 2002 1-15



Code Division Multiple Access(CDMA)

CDMA is a digital wireless air interface and networking standard based on theprinciple of spread-spectrum techniques, which allow multiple users to access thesystem simultaneously on the same carrier frequency. Information, either voice ordata, is encoded in packets which are spread over a wide frequency spectrum.This packet approach allows more information to be transmitted per unit ofbandwidth than with any other technology. Also, the encoded information providesgreater security than other air interface standards.

CDMA’s spread-spectrum technology provides significant quality improvements.Using advanced encoding algorithms, CDMA reduces noise and muting by usinga unique soft handoff capability. This is especially important to providers of packetdata networks.

CDMA exploits the sporadic nature of conversation. People speak only about 35%of the time during a typical telephone conversation. When users assigned to theCDMA carrier are not talking, all others on the carrier benefit from lessinterference. The voice activity factor reduces mutual interference by 65%, greatlyincreasing the actual carrier capacity.

Cellular CDMA conforms to the TIA IS-95A standard, and PCS CDMA conformsto the ANSI J-STD-008 standard. Cellular CDMA provides an increase in capacityover current FDMA cellular networks by as much as tenfold. It can also providenew user applications and improved quality of service.

CDMA is a direct-sequence spread-spectrum system in which two or more userscommunicate simultaneously over the same wide frequency band known as theCDMA carrier. (Initially, every CDMA omni cell or cell sector uses the same CDMAcarrier.) To distinguish between users, the system assigns each user a distinctbinary code.

CDMA technology enhances wireless communications and provides a number ofbenefits, which taken together represent an advance over FDMA wirelesstechnology. The primary advantage of both CDMA and TDMA technology overFDMA technology is capacity.

■ Increases capacity. The major advantage of CDMA is increased capacitythrough more efficient use of the spectrum. Greater capacity enables yourCDMA wireless network to handle higher call density at a lower cost.

The number of users that can use the same CDMA carrier and still haveacceptable performance is determined by the total interference power thatall of the users generate in the receiver. There is no hard limit on thenumber of system users in a CDMA system. Spread spectrum takesadvantage of the fact that at any given time, there will be enough openholes in the spectrum for enough information to get through.

1-16 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

The odds of a conflict depends only on the likelihood of two or more userslanding on the same frequency at the same time. The more users, themore collisions. Signal quality is measured as a bit error rate (BER).

■ Improves voice quality and system performance. CDMA technologyincreases the reliability and quality of service by reducing static andimproving voice clarity. The soft handoff feature ensures that calls areconnected before handoff is completed, minimizing dropped calls andspeech disruption. Multipath signals are combined for increased signalintegrity. The Lucent Technologies CDMA offering provides full intra-MSCand inter-MSC soft handoffs.

■ Increases mobile unit battery life. CDMA requires less RF power than theother access technologies. It allows the mobile to operate at a power levelmany times lower than analog and TDMA. This conserves the batterypower of the mobile unit, increasing talk time, and as a result, revenues.

■ Multipathing. Whereas FDMA and TDMA suffer losses and interferencedue to naturally occurring multipath RF signals, CDMA signal qualityactually improves under such conditions. This characteristic greatlyimproves in-building RF penetration, for example.

CDMA receivers (called rake receivers) use three or four parallelcorrelators to receive and track separately the strongest of signals inmultiple paths. The receiver then combines the signals constructively (in-phase) and uses the result to demodulate the signal. While there is fadingon each arrival, the fades are usually independent of one another. A loss inperformance occurs only when all correlators experience fades at the sametime.

■ Soft handoff. A soft handoff permits a call to be carried by two to six cells orsectors at the same time while the mobile station is traveling through ahandoff zone. The difference in arrival time of signals from the cells orsectors is treated just as multipathing—the mobile receiver combines thesignals constructively.

A handoff in FDMA or TDMA, referred to as a hard handoff, is performedon a “break before make” basis: the old link is dropped before the new linkis established. In contrast, a soft handoff in CDMA is performed on a “makebefore break” basis: the mobile chooses the best quality signal frommultiple links (up to six).

A soft handoff virtually eliminates the interference, clipping, and clickscommonly associated with a hard handoff. Since every cell uses the sameCDMA carrier, the only difference in transmission is the binary codes(sequences). Under normal circumstances there is no handoff from onefrequency to another frequency. The probability that a CDMA call will bedropped because a handoff command has been received in error is greatlyreduced.

Issue 15 July 2002 1-17



■ Security. CDMA uses spread-spectrum technology in which the informationcontent is spread over a wider bandwidth than the frequency content of theoriginal information. Each subscriber is assigned a unique binary code thatdistinguishes that user from all other users simultaneously transmittingover the same frequency band. Would-be eavesdroppers hear onlyunintelligible noise and can only decode the signal with the appropriateequipment and binary codes.

■ Eliminates need to engineer reuse pattern. CDMA’s N=1 frequency reusepattern provides superior Radio Frequency (RF) coverage for a giventransmit power level and simplifies frequency engineering when configuringthe network.

In FDMA and TDMA, frequency management is both a critical and difficulttask to carry out. Since the frequency reuse factor is 1 for CDMA, nofrequency management is needed for CDMA.

Unlike current FDMA and TDMA access technologies, which requirefrequency engineering to avoid co-channel (same channel) interference innearby cells, the same block of CDMA spectrum may be reused in everycell or sector. CDMA, by its very design, can decode the proper signal inthe presence of high interference.

■ Enables seamless integration of data applications. Variable rate signalcoding permits higher-rate voice coding and bandwidth-on-demand fordata transmissions. CDMA’s packetized communications structure is well-suited to data transmissions and services. Packetized data transmission isalso available to TDMA cells.

■ Suitability for microcell and in-building systems. CDMA is a naturalwaveform suitable for microcell and in-building wireless systems becauseof its tolerance to noise and interference.

■ Gives you a competitive edge. CDMA provides the technology platform foradvanced revenue-generating features such as calling numberidentification presentation, message waiting indicator, and short messageservice.

With CDMA, as shown in Figure 1-6, the transmitter spreads the bandwidth of auser’s data over a larger bandwidth (1.23 MHz) by multiplying the data by a binarycode (sequence). The receiver uses the same code to undo the spreading andrecover the original data—accomplished by multiplying the received signal by theknown code and filtering through a low-pass filter. The other users’ data, whosecodes do not match, remain scattered over the wide transmission band of theCDMA carrier. They contribute only to the noise and represent a self-interferencegenerated by the system.

1-18 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Dual-Mode Operation

Both the TIA IS-95A and ANSI J-STD-008 standards include provision for futureservice additions and expansions of system capabilities. In addition, thearchitecture defined by the standards permits such expansion without the loss ofbackward compatibility with the FDMA system.

Issue 15 July 2002 1-19



Figure 1-6. CDMA Modulation and Demodulation on the Forward Link

0

20 KHz

CORRELATOR

RF CARRIER

DATA FROM OTHER USERS’

(SEE NOTE)

USER’S DATA

IN

DIGITAL

FILTER

BINARY CODE

(1.2288 Mbps)

RF CARRIER

BINARY CODE

(1.2288 Mbps)

USER’S DATA

OUT

SPREAD SPECTRUM

SIGNAL

NOTE: NOT SHOWN IS THAT DATAFROM OTHER USERS’ HAS ALREADY BEEN SPREAD USING DISTINCT BINARY CODES

DIGITAL

CMBR

fo

≅

fo

BACKGROUNDNOISE

EXTERNALINTERFERENCE

OTHER CELLINTERFERENCE

fo

1.23 MHz1.23 MHz

OTHER USERNOISE

fo

0

20 KHz

DATA

fo

1.23 MHz

WIDEBANDSPECTRUM

1.23 MHz

fo

SAME CODE

DATA

1-20 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

IS-95A Compliant Mobile Stations

A mobile station that complies with the TIA IS-95A standard can obtain service bycommunicating with either CDMA or FDMA radios. Whether the communication isCDMA or FDMA depends on the availability of either system in the geographicarea of the mobile station as well as the preferred call mode requested by themobile when accessing the system. The preferred call mode can be CDMA only,FDMA only, or dual-mode CDMA (either CDMA or FDMA).

J-STD-008 Compliant Mobile Stations

Currently, a mobile station complying with the ANSI J-STD-008 standard can onlyobtain service by communicating with PCS CDMA1 radios. Thus, the preferredcall mode requested by an ANSI J-STD-008 compliant mobile station whenaccessing the system is limited to PCS CDMA only. For PCS CDMA/FDMA dual-mode, dual-band mobiles there are three call modes: PCS CDMA only, FDMA-only, or dual-mode (either PCS CDMA or FDMA).

CDMA Carriers

A CDMA carrier is a 1.23-MHz wide block of RF spectrum. A CDMA carrier can bereused in every omni cell or cell sector of the CDMA system. Each omni cell or cellsector operating on the CDMA carrier is identified by a pilot pseudo-noise (PN)sequence offset. Since there are 512 pilot PN sequence offsets, 0 through 511,there may be as many as 512 forward CDMA channels on one CDMA carrier.(See Figure 1-7 on page 1-21.)

NOTE:Although there is no frequency management for the CDMA system, there is time(phase) PN offset management. Neighboring cells or cell sectors operating on thesame CDMA carrier are assigned different pilot PN sequence offsets in order forIS-95A or J-STD-008 compliant mobiles to distinguish between the different cellsor cell sectors. Cell sites sufficiently far apart can simultaneously use the samepilot PN sequence offset, which allows reuse of a pilot PN sequence offset fordifferent calls many times in a given service area. See the CDMA RF EngineeringGuidelines (401-614-012) and PCS CDMA RF Engineering Guidelines (401-703-201) for more information.

1 PCS CDMA radios are simply CDMA radios that interface with upbanding anddownbanding hardware needed to operate in the 1900-MHz frequency band.

Issue 15 July 2002 1-21



Figure 1-7. Forward CDMA Channels (from Cell to Mobile)

Forward CDMA Channel Signals

A forward CDMA channel contains one or more code channels that aretransmitted on a CDMA carrier using a specific pilot PN sequence offset. Thecode channels are associated with the pilot channel, sync channel, pagingchannels, and traffic channels.

Reverse CDMA Channel Signals

A reverse CDMA channel is the CDMA channel from the mobile station to the cellsite. From the cell site’s perspective, the reverse CDMA channel is the sum of allmobile station transmissions on a CDMA carrier (see Figure 1-8 on page 1-22).

CDMA System Time

CDMA system time uses the Global Positioning System (GPS) time scale, whichis synchronous with Universal Time Code (UTC). The start of CDMA system timecoincides with the start of GPS time— January 6, 1980 00 (hr):00 (min):00 (sec)UTC. The current CDMA system time, or GPS time, is represented at the CDMAcell sites as the number of seconds that have elapsed since January 6, 198000:00:00 UTC.

CDMA CARRIER

PILOT PN

FORWARDCDMA

CHANNEL

OFFSET0

PILOT PN

OFFSETX

PILOT PN

OFFSET510

PILOT PN

OFFSET511

PILOT PN

OFFSET1

SEQUENCE SEQUENCE SEQUENCE SEQUENCE SEQUENCE

TRAFFICCHANNEL

PILOTCHANNEL

TRAFFICCHANNEL

PAGINGCHANNEL

SYNCCHANNEL

1-22 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 1-8. Reverse CDMA Channel (from Mobile to Cell)

UTC is an internationally agreed-upon time scale maintained by the BureauInternational de l’Heure in Paris, France. GPS and UTC differ by an integernumber of seconds, specifically the number of leap second corrections made toUTC since January 6, 1980. At the end of June, 1997, GPS was ahead of UTC by12 seconds.

All CDMA cell sites use the same system time. As shown in Figure 1-10, IS-95Aor J-STD-008 compliant mobile stations use the same system time, offset by thepropagation delay from the cell site to the mobile. The cell sites receive systemtime from the GPS satellite network, and the mobiles receive system time from thecell sites. Mobiles receive system time information via the sync channel which istransmitted by each serving omni cell or cell sector.

An IS-95A or J-STD-008 compliant mobile aligns its transmit timing to the earliestwave front it is receiving from the cell site. Thus, a mobile will be transmitting atsome time delayed from true GPS time, where each mile of separation betweenthe mobile and the cell corresponds to approximately five microseconds of delay.The cell site sees twice as much delay on the received signal because of theround-trip. Time measurements are referenced to the transmit and receiveantennas of the cell site and the RF connector of the mobile station.

CDMA CARRIER

REVERSECDMA

CHANNEL

TRAFFICCHANNEL

PN

OFFSET0

SEQUENCE

ACCESSCHANNEL

TRAFFICCHANNEL

ACCESSCHANNEL

Issue 15 July 2002 1-23



Figure 1-9. Reverse CDMA Channel Compositions

Each CDMA cell site or mobile uses a base reference of time from which all time-critical CDMA transmission signals are derived, including the long code PNsequences, pilot PN sequences, and Walsh functions. This base reference is timealigned to CDMA system time.

Figure 1-11 helps clarify how a cell site or mobile uses its base reference to derivethe time-critical CDMA transmission signals. The figure shows the long code andthe zero-offset pilot PN sequences in their initial states at the precise zero instantof CDMA system time.2 The long code PN sequence will repeat about every 42days, and the pilot PN sequence will repeat about every 26.7 ms. The PNsequences can be thought of as the output of two master PN generators that havebeen running continuously since January 6, 1980 00:00:00 UTC. By knowingCDMA system time, a cell site or mobile can calculate the starting points of its ownlong code and pilot PN generators to align their operation with that of the masterPN generators. The Walsh functions, themselves, are aligned to the locallygenerated pilot PN sequence.

2 The initial state of the long code PN sequence is the first “1” output following 41consecutive zeroes, with the binary mask consisting of 1 in the most significant bit positionfollowed by 41 zeroes. The initial state of the pilot PN sequence is the first 1 outputfollowing 15 consecutive zeroes.

ACCESSCH 1

ACCESSCH N

TRAFFICCH N

TRAFFICCH 1

1.23-MHz RADIO CHANNELRECEIVED BY CELL SITE

REVERSE CDMA CHANNEL

IDENTIFIED BY DISTINCT LONG CODE SEQUENCES

N IN CH N DENOTES THE NUMBER OF MOBILES CURRENTLY ACCESSING THE CDMA SYSTEM ON THECDMA CARRIER.

NOTE:

1-24 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 1-10. CDMA System Time at Various Points in the CDMA System

TRUE GPS TIME

CELLTRANSMIT

MOBILERECEIVE

TRUE GPS TIMEOFFSET BY

ONE-WAY DELAY

MOBILETRANSMIT

TRUE GPS TIMEOFFSET BY

TWO-WAY DELAY

-5 µs /MILE

CELLRECEIVE

-5 µs /MILE

Issue 15 July 2002 1-25



Figure 1-11. Starting Points of Long Code and Zero-Offset Pilot PN Sequences

CELLTRANSMIT

MOBILETRANSMIT

MOBILERECEIVE

CELLRECEIVE

LONG CODE MASK = 10 (41)

ZERO-OFFSET I PILOT PN SEQUENCE

ZERO-OFFSET Q PILOT PN SEQUENCE

JAN 6, 198000:00:00 UTC

JAN 6, 198000:00:00 UTC

JAN 6, 198000:00:00 UTC

... 10 (15) 1 ...

... 10 (15) 1 ...

... 10 (41) 1 ...

... 10 (15) 1 ...

... 10 (15) 1 ...

... 10 (41) 1 ...

... 10 (15) 1 ...

... 10 (15) 1 ...

... 10 (41) 1 ...

... 10 (15) 1 ...

... 10 (15) 1 ...

... 10 (41) 1 ... LONG CODE MASK = 10 (41)









-5 µs /MILE -5 µs /MILE

TIME MEASUREMENTS ARE MADE AT THE ANTENNAS OF CELL SITES AND THE RF CONNECTORS

NOTES:

1.

2. 0 (N) DENOTES A SEQUENCE OF 41 or 15 CONSECUTIVE ZEROES.

OF MOBILE STATIONS.

1-26 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Mobile Units

A mobile unit is a piece of wireless equipment that connects a user to a wirelesstelephone system over a radio link. The mobile unit can be mounted inside a car,in which case it is usually called a car telephone, or it can be contained in a smallhand-held unit, often called a mobile or mobile unit.

A mobile unit always contains a control unit, a transceiver, and an antenna.

Mobile units are classified according to the amount of power that they transmit.Three classes of mobile units are available.

Classes of Mobile Units

The Class I mobile unit can output up to 3 watts of power. This is the mostpowerful mobile unit with the greatest range. The Class I mobile unit is called avehicle-mounted mobile unit. It is permanently mounted in a car and has anantenna attached to the car roof.

The Class II mobile unit can output up to 1.2 watts of power. This is called atransportable mobile unit because it is stored in a bag that can be carried fromplace to place.

The Class III mobile unit can output up to 0.5 watts of power. This is called aportable mobile unit because the equipment is contained in a unit small enough tobe held in one hand and easily carried from place to place.

Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks supports all three classes of mobileunits.

Types of Mobile Units

Mobile units can be of three types.

■ analog

■ digital

■ dual-mode (analog/digital)

Analog mobile units are used where traditional analog AMPS using FDMA serviceis provided. Digital mobile units are used for TDMA or CDMA service. Dual-modemobile units provide both analog and digital service on the same unit to insure thatcommunications are provided where digital systems do not yet completely coverthe service area.

Issue 15 July 2002 1-27



Mobile units can also be dual-band. A dual-band mobile unit can operate withinseveral different frequency bands. A dual-band mobile unit can be used, forexample, in areas of the United States where both PCS and traditional cellularservice is available.

Interoperability Mobile Unit Test Program

Lucent Technologies is committed to testing for compatibility with mobile unitsusing Lucent Technologies’ network equipment. An interoperability program hasbeen developed for this purpose and endorsed by the CellularTelecommunications Industry Association (CTIA). The program allows mobile unitequipment manufacturers to test network equipment with Lucent Technologiesprior to commercialization. The key objective is to provide the highest qualityequipment deployed to the marketplace.

Interoperability Testing includes industry standard, network, feature, and humaninterface testing. These tests are conducted at the manufacturer’s location and atLucent Technologies’ Interoperability Laboratory in Whippany, NJ.

1-28 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Contents



2Call Processing

Introduction 2-1

■ Mobile Switching Center (MSC) Software 2-2

System Elements 2-3

■ Mobile Switching Center (MSC) 2-3■ Cell Site 2-3■ Mobile Units 2-3

Call Scenarios 2-4

■ Signaling and Voice Paths 2-4■ AMPS/TDMA Call Scenarios 2-6

Mobile-to-Land Call 2-6Land-to-Mobile Call 2-12Mobile-to-Mobile Call 2-19AMPS/TDMA Hard Handoff 2-21

■ CDMA Call Flow 2-26■ CDMA Call Scenarios 2-35

Mobile-to-Land Call 2-35Land-to-Mobile Call 2-41Mobile-to-Mobile Call 2-49

■ CDMA Handoffs 2-51CDMA to AMPS Hard Handoff 2-51CDMA to CDMA Hard Handoff 2-52CDMA Semi-Soft Handoff 2-52CDMA Soft and Softer Handoff 2-54

Soft Handoff Call Flow 2-54Softer Handoff Call Flow 2-57Soft and Softer Handoff Combinations 2-58

■ Other Types of CDMA Handoffs 2-59



401-610-006

ContentsCDMA Inter-SM Soft Handoff 2-59Inter-DCS Soft and Semi-Soft Handoff (IDSHO) 2-60Border Cell Sector Handoffs 2-61Six-Way Soft Handoff 2-61



2Call Processing

Introduction

This chapter describes the system elements that are required for call processingfunctions in the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks, and provides callscenarios for Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) using the AdvancedMobile Phone Service (AMPS) standard, Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)and Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA).

The Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks products are supported withcomprehensive and fully integrated software management tools that addresscurrent and future operational needs. The underlying component platforms andarchitectural framework allow for seamless growth of additional tools as newrequirements emerge.



401-610-006

Mobile Switching Center (MSC) Software

Software for the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks operates mainly in theExecutive Cellular Processor (ECP) Complex and Interprocess MessageSwitch/Common Network Interface (IMS/CNI). The software runs under theUNIX® RTR operating system. UNIX RTR provides a hierarchy of virtualmachines in four levels:

■ Kernel

■ Kernel process

■ Supervisor process

■ User process.

Software written for the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks occupies allthree process levels. Kernel processes are used for work that is real-time criticalor strongly hardware related. Supervisor processes use the memory managementand time-slice services of the operating system. User processes interface withUNIX RTR through the use of a shared library of UNIX functions.



Call Processing

System Elements

The following sections describe the system components involved in callprocessing and a description of how call processing is performed by these systemelements.

Mobile Switching Center (MSC)

In the Flexent® /AUTOPLEX® wireless networks, the MSC is equipped with anECP, an IMS/CNI, and a Digital Cellular Switch (DCS). The ECP provides controlfunctions. The IMS/CNI handles message traffic between the ECP, DCSs, and cellsites. In the Flexent® /AUTOPLEX® wireless networks, the IMS also handlescertain call processing functions.

The DCS provides all the wireless network switching required to process calls toand from the wireless subscriber. The DCS also provides a wireless interface intothe land telephone network. Calls from and to the telephone network, andmobile-to-mobile calls within different service areas, pass through the DCS.

Calls from mobile to mobile within the same service area need not enter thetelephone network. Such calls may be switched by the DCS via loop aroundtrunks for completion over the cell site radio links.

The 5ESS DCS supports analog calls using the FDMA protocol (referred tohereafter as AMPS) and digital calls using the TDMA and CDMA protocols.

Cell Site

The cell site contains radio and associated control equipment which links thewireless subscriber through the MSC to the telephone network and to otherwireless subscribers. Calls from subscribers to parties within the telephonesystem are referred to as mobile-to-land calls. Calls from parties within thelandline telephone system to wireless subscribers are referred to asland-to-mobile calls.

Mobile Units

Mobile units can be either hand-held (portable) units or vehicle-mounted units.Both types contain a microprocessor that continually performs operations andcommunications with the cell sites, even when the mobile unit is not in use.



401-610-006

Call Scenarios

The following sections describe the signaling and voice paths for the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks and provide call scenarios for AMPS, TDMA, andCDMA.

Signaling and Voice Paths

Figure 2-1 on page 2-5 illustrates the signaling path of the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX®

wireless networks and the mobile unit. The signaling path provides a means topass control messages from the mobile unit to the cell sites, and then, to the ECPComplex via the IMS/CNI ring. These messages contain control and datainformation necessary to complete a wireless call.

The data links provide connections between the cell sites, the DCS, and the ECPComplex. The components of the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks usethese data links to pass control messages required to complete call processingtasks.

The ECP Complex includes an IMS/CNI ring which processes all messages toand from the ECP. Several types of nodes exist on both of these rings to provideinterfaces between the IMS/CNI ring and other wireless components. Thesenodes contain processors which pass messages between the ECP Complex,5ESS DCSs, cell sites, and other networked Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wirelessnetworks components.

The ECP connects to the IMS/CNI ring through ring peripheral controller (RPC)nodes. The cell sites connect to the IMS/CNI ring through the cell site nodes(CSN). The DCS connects to the IMS/CNI ring through the Signaling System(SS7).



Call Processing

Figure 2-1. Signaling and Voice Paths

ECP Complex

MSC

Series IICell Site

Voice Trunks:Control/ Signaling:

Mobile Unit

IMS/CNIRing

DCS

ECP

PSTN

NIP

NIT

Land-BasedSubscriber


DCS: Digital Cellular SwitchECP: Executive Cellular ProcessorIMS/CNI: Interprocess Message Switch/

Common Network Interface RingMSC: Mobile Switching CenterNIP: Network Interface PointsNIT: Network Interface TrunksPSTN: Public Switched Telephone Network

Series IICell Site

Series IICell Site

THE



401-610-006

Figure 2-1 on page 2-5 illustrates the voice path in the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX®

wireless networks. These voice paths are the voice trunks that connect a DCS tocell sites and to Network Interface Points (NIPs) in the Public Switched TelephoneNetwork (PSTN). A radio channel is set up by the ECP Complex to establish avoice path from the mobile units to the cell sites. Calls to and from the PSTN, andmobile-to-mobile calls, pass through the DCS.

AMPS/TDMA Call Scenarios

In the AMPS/TDMA configuration, the ECP Complex and the DCS perform thecall processing activities.

The following call scenarios represent the more typical call types.

■ Mobile-to-land: A mobile unit places a call to a land-based subscriber.

■ Land-to-mobile: A land-based subscriber makes a call to a mobile unit.

■ Mobile-to-mobile: A mobile unit places a call to another mobile unit.

■ Call handoff: A mobile unit moves from the service area of one cell site tothe service area of another cell site during an active call.

To protect against fraudulent access, for each call scenario a validation orauthentication process takes place. The ECP Complex verifies the dialed digitsand serial number of the mobile unit in an attempt to verify that the call is notfraudulent. The ECP Complex allows valid calls to proceed, but terminates invalidcalls.

Mobile-to-Land Call

A mobile-to-land call is a call that is placed from a mobile unit to a land-basedcustomer. The mobile-to-land call scenario (also known as a mobile callorigination) consists of the following phases:

1. Preorigination: Preorigination represents the activities performed toprepare for a call from a mobile unit to the land-based customer. Asubscriber places a call on the mobile unit by dialing the desired digits andpressing the SEND key. The mobile unit transmits a channel requestmessage to the cell site.

2. Origination: (Figure 2-2 on page 2-8). In the origination phase, the mobileunit sends the called telephone number to the ECP Complex via the cellsite where the call processing is begun. When the SEND key is pressed, themobile unit sends a service request message to the cell site. The messageincludes the dialed digits, the allowed modes (AMPS or TDMA), and themobile identification number (MIN). A MIN is a 34-bit number which is adigital representation of the 10-digit directory telephone number assigned



Call Processing

to a mobile unit. The selected cell site associated with the selected setupchannel receives this information and relays it to the ECP Complex via theIMS/CNI Ring.

3. Channel Assignments: (Figure 2-2 on page 2-9). In this phase, the ECPComplex establishes a talk path between the mobile unit and the DCS. TheECP Complex analyzes the dialed digits (received from the mobile unit) todetermine routing and charging information. The ECP Complex performsthe call authentication and, if the call is valid, the ECP Complex notifies thecell site that the call may proceed. The ECP Complex then selects a cellsite trunk to the cell site, and sends a voice channel assignment to the cellsite, which the cell site relays to the mobile unit. The mobile unit tunes tothe specified voice channel and notifies the cell site that it has seized avoice channel. At this point, the mobile unit has a reserved voice path tothe DCS via the cell site.

4. Digit Outpulsing: (Figure 2-2 on page 2-10). The ECP Complex sends theDCS a setup message which contains a list of trunk groups it can use toconnect to the NIP in the PSTN, digits to outpulse over the networkinterface trunk (NIT), and the identity of the selected cell site trunk. TheDCS seizes the NIT and sets up a path to the cell site trunk in order toconnect the mobile unit to a land-based subscriber. The dialed digits aresent to the PSTN where the NIP performs routing to the land-basedsubscriber. The NIP then sends audible ringing tone to the mobile unit viathe cell site.

5. Talking State: (Figure 2-2 on page 2-11). In this phase, the land-basedsubscriber answers the call and the voice path is completed from themobile unit to the land-based subscriber.

The mobile subscriber’s voice is transported, in digital form (Pulse CodeModulation) from the cell site to the Digital Line and Trunk Unit (DLTU2) where thecell site trunk terminates. The DLTU2 passes the digitized voice to the Time SlotInterchange Unit (TSIU), where a time slot is assigned, and on to the DLTU2 onwhich the NIT terminates. This DLTU2 then relays the digitized voice to the PSTN.The PSTN subscriber’s voice is similarly transported in the reverse direction.



401-610-006

Figure 2-2. AMPS/TDMA Mobile Unit to Landline Call Processing (Sheet 1 of 4)

Complex

MSC

Series IICell Site


Mobile Unit

ECP

PSTN

NIPNIT

Series IICell Site

Series IICell Site

DCS

LandBased

Subscriber

Setup Channel:

A. Origination



Call Processing


Complex

MSC

Series IICell Site


Mobile Unit

ECP

PSTN

NIPNIT

Series IICell Site

Series IICell Site

DCS

LandBased

Subscriber

Voice Channel:

Confirmation:Voice Channel

B. Channel Assignment

2-10 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006


Complex

MSC

Series IICell Site


Mobile Unit

ECP

PSTN

NIPNIT

Series IICell Site

Series IICell Site

DCS

LandBased

Subscriber

Voice Channel:

C. Digit Outpulsing

Selected

AudibleRing

Issue 15 July 2002 2-11


Call Processing


Complex

MSC

Series IICell Site


Mobile Unit

ECP

PSTN

NIPNIT

Series IICell Site

Series IICell Site

DCS

LandBased

Subscriber

Voice Channel:

D. Talking State

2-12 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Land-to-Mobile Call

A land-to-mobile call, which is also called a mobile terminated call, is a call that isplaced from a land-based customer to a mobile unit. The land-to-mobile callscenario consists of the following phases:

1. Routing Analysis: (Figure 2-3 on page 2-13). In the routing analysis phase,the mobile unit for the call is identified. A land-based subscriber originatesa call and dials the telephone number of a mobile unit. From the callingparty’s Network Interface Point (NIP) in the PSTN, a Network InterfaceTrunk (NIT) is seized, connecting the land-based subscriber to the DCS ofthe MSC. The DCS collects the dialed digits and passes them, along withthe NIT group member identification, to the ECP Complex via the IMS/CNIring. The information is analyzed in the ECP Complex for validation.

2. Paging and Audible Ringing: (Figure 2-3 on page 2-14). In this phase, themobile unit is located and an audible ringing tone is sent back to the callingparty in the PSTN. The ECP Complex locates the cell sites to page themobile unit. The ECP Complex then sends a message to the cell sites andthe cell sites perform the paging via the paging channels. At the same time,the ECP Complex directs the DCS to return audible ringing to theland-based subscriber. The DCS provides the audible ringing tone over theNIT to the calling party through the NIP.

3. Page Response: (Figure 2-3 on page 2-15). In this phase, the mobile unitidentifies itself so that the call can be completed. The mobile unitrecognizes its page and responds to the serving cell site. The cell site thenreports the page response to the ECP Complex over the dedicated datalink. If the mobile unit does not respond to the page, the calling party isnormally routed to an announcement or voice mail system.

4. Channel Assignment: (Figure 2-3 on page 2-16). The ECP Complexassigns a voice channel for communication between the cell site and themobile unit. The ECP Complex sends the voice channel assignment to thecell site which relays it to the mobile unit. The mobile unit tunes to thespecified channel.

5. Alerting: (Figure 2-3 on page 2-17). The alerting phase informs the mobileunit of an incoming call. The ECP Complex directs the cell site to transmitan alert message to the mobile unit to signal that it has an incoming call.The mobile unit subscriber then answers the call.

6. Talking State: (Figure 2-3 on page 2-18). In this phase, the final talk path isestablished. The cell site recognizes the answer indication and informs theECP Complex. The ECP Complex then sends an accept message,containing the cell site trunk identity, to the DCS. The DCS completes thetalk path to the cell site trunk and removes the audible ring.

Issue 15 July 2002 2-13


Call Processing

Figure 2-3. AMPS/TDMA Landline to Mobile Call Processing (Sheet 1 of 6)

Complex

MSC

Series IICell Site


Mobile Unit

ECP

PSTN

NIP

NITSeries IICell Site

Series IICell Site

DCS

LandBased

Subscriber

A. Routing Analysis

Dial Mobile UnitsDigits

2-14 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006


Complex

MSC

Series IICell Site

Voice Trunks:Control/ Data Links:

Mobile Unit

ECP

PSTN

NIP


Series IICell Site

DCS

LandBased

Subscriber

B. Paging And Audible Ringing

Audible Ring

Paging Channels:

Issue 15 July 2002 2-15


Call Processing


Complex

MSC

Series IICell Site


Mobile Unit

ECP

PSTN

NIP


Series IICell Site

DCS

LandBased

Subscriber

C. Page Response

Page Response Channel:

2-16 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006


Complex

MSC

Series IICell Site


Mobile Unit

ECP

PSTN

NIP


Series IICell Site

LandBased

Subscriber

D. Channel Assignment

DCS

ChannelAssignment Data:

Voice Channel:

Issue 15 July 2002 2-17


Call Processing


Complex

MSC

Series IICell Site


Mobile Unit

ECP

PSTN

NIP


Series IICell Site

LandBased

Subscriber

E. Alerting

DCS

Signaling Tone:

Voice Channel:

2-18 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006


Complex

MSC

Series IICell Site


Mobile Unit

ECP

PSTN

NIP


Series IICell Site

LandBased

Subscriber

F. Talking State

DCS

Voice Channel:

Issue 15 July 2002 2-19


Call Processing

Mobile-to-Mobile Call

A mobile-to-mobile call occurs when a mobile unit places a call to another mobileunit. An AMPS/TDMA mobile-to-mobile call is actually a combination of the twocall scenarios previously described. The mobile-to-land scenario represents amobile-originated call and the land-to-mobile scenario represents a mobiletermination. In a mobile-to-mobile call, the ECP Complex treats the two halves ofthe call as separate, individual calls.

In the usual mobile-to-land scenario, the mobile unit originates the call, and theECP Complex directs the DCS to select an outgoing NIT to the PSTN. The ECPComplex completes the call by directing the DCS to interconnect the cell site trunkand the NIT, and to outpulse the digits over the NIT so that the NIP can completethe call.

In the usual land-to-mobile call scenario, the call is originated via an incoming NITfrom the PSTN. The ECP Complex recognizes a call intended for a mobile unitwithin its service area, and directs the DCS and the cell site to complete theconnection between the NIT and the mobile unit.

In each of these cases, a NIT between the DCS and the PSTN is required. Thesame is true for a mobile-to-mobile call, except that the trunk does not interfacewith the PSTN. Instead, it originates and terminates within the same MSC. This iscalled a loop-around trunk. If the two mobile units are served by different DCSswithin the MSC, an inter-DCS (IDCS) trunk is used. The IDCS trunk performs thesame functions of the loop-around trunk, it simply terminates on a different DCSwithin the MSC.

For a mobile-to-mobile call, the mobile-to-land call processing scenario is used toestablish a call to an outgoing loop-around trunk. Next, the land-to-mobile callprocessing scenario is used to establish a mobile termination from the incomingside of the loop-around trunk to the terminating mobile unit.

The loop-around trunk may connect between two modules1, or it may connectback to the same module. Figure 2-4 on page 2-20 shows how themobile-to-mobile call is interconnected. For clarity and ease of understanding, thisfigure shows the loop-around trunk interconnecting two separate modules, but thisis not a requirement. If the two mobile units are being served through differentDCSs, the connection is made over inter-DCS trunks.

1 Called Switching Module (SM) in the 5ESS DCS.

2-20 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 2-4. AMPS/TDMA Mobile Unit to Mobile Unit Call Processing

ECP Complex

MSC

Loop Around Trunk

DCS

* Consists of the Administrative Module (AM) and the CommunicationModule (CM) in the 5ESS DCS.

† Called Switching Module (SM) in the 5ESS DCS.

Module

Processor*

Series IICell Site Mobile Termination Mobile Origination

Mobile Unit

Series IICell Site

Mobile Unit

Voice Trunks:Control/Data Links:

Voice Channel:

Module†

Issue 15 July 2002 2-21


Call Processing

AMPS/TDMA Hard Handoff

A hard handoff is the action of switching an established call from one radiochannel to another. Hard handoffs are used to allow established calls to continueby switching them to another radio resource as the mobile unit moves from onecell to another. Figure 2-5 on page 2-21 shows the handoff areas as the mobileunit moves between cell sites.

Figure 2-5. Call Handoff Areas

During an AMPS call, an AMPS-to-AMPS hard handoff occurs when the mobileunit moves between cell sites. No other type of hard handoff is used for AMPScalls.

DCS

HANDOFFAREA

Series IICell

HANDOFFAREA

Series IICell

Series IICell

HANDOFFAREA

2-22 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

The TDMA protocol supports two types of hard handoffs depending on thesituation and the types of cell sites serving the TDMA customer. The hardhandoffs include:

■ TDMA-to-TDMA: Used when both the original and the new cell site supportTDMA capabilities.

■ TDMA-to-AMPS: Used when the original cell site has TDMA capability andthe new cell site does not.

Once a call has been handed off from a TDMA cell site to an AMPS cell site, itremains in the AMPS protocol until the call is disconnected. If the TDMA mobileunit moves from the AMPS service area back into a TDMA service area, the callmay remain in the AMPS protocol unless the Digital Preference for Handoffsfeature is available. Any new calls may be made using the TDMA protocol,however.

Hard handoffs are valid in all call scenarios (mobile-to-land, land-to-mobile, andmobile-to-mobile). Three-port conference circuits within the DCS provide themeans to bridge the new cell site onto the call.

An AMPS/TDMA hard handoff call occurs as follows:

1. New Cell Site Selection: (Figure 2-6 on page 2-23). When a wireless call isin progress, the mobile unit may move from one cell area to another. As themobile unit moves away from the cell site carrying the call, the handoffprocess is begun.

2. New Cell Site Connected: (Figure 2-6 on page 2-24). The ECP Complexdirects the DCS to seize a cell site trunk for the new cell site. At this point,the NIT, the original cell site, and the new cell site are all connected to thesame 3-port conference circuit.

3. Original Cell Site Released: (Figure 2-6 on page 2-25). The 3-portconference circuit and the path to the original cell site are released. Afterthe mobile unit retunes to the new cell site channel, the ECP Complex isnotified by the new cell site. The ECP Complex then directs the DCS to teardown the talk path from the original cell site and to release the 3-portconference circuit.

This hard handoff call scenario cannot occur if a 3-port circuit is not available orone is already in use for the call (a typical 3-way call). Instead a non-bridgedhandoff is required. A new talk path is reserved from the Time Slot InterchangeUnit (TSIU) to the new cell site and the talk path between the TSIU and theoriginal cell site is torn down. The ECP Complex directs the DCS to break theoriginal talk path and then complete the new path via a new cell site trunk. In thissituation, the customers may hear a brief pop of noise as the new connection isestablished. Using a 3-port circuit is preferred to reduce this type of noise.

Issue 15 July 2002 2-23


Call Processing

Figure 2-6. AMPS/TDMA Hard Handoff (Sheet 1 of 3)

ECP Complex

MSC

DCS



Module

Processor*

Series IICell Site

Series IICell Site


PSTN

Mobile Unit

Module†

A. New Cell Site Selection

2-24 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006


ECP Complex

MSC

DCS



Module

Processor*

Series IICell Site

Series IICell Site


PSTN

Mobile Unit

B. Connection to 3-Port Conference Circuit

Module†

Issue 15 July 2002 2-25


Call Processing


ECP Complex

MSC

DCS



Processor*

Series IICell Site

Series IICell Site


PSTN

Mobile Unit

Module† Module

C. 3-Port Conferences Circuit Released

2-26 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

CDMA Call Flow

Figure 2-7 on page 2-27 illustrates the different units in a 5ESS DCS and how theunits are connected to process a CDMA wireless call. The hardware elements inthe 5ESS DCS interact to connect a call between a mobile subscriber and thePublic Switched Telephone Network (PSTN).

To process a CDMA call, the 5ESS DCS must be equipped with a packetswitching unit model 2 (PSU2), and an echo canceller and signaling unit (ECSU).The ECSU may be supplied from Lucent Technologies or stand-alone echocanceller products are supported (either Lucent or other vendor). Throughout thissection, PSU2 is referred to as PSU. The PSU contains the protocol handlers forvoice (PHV), protocol handlers 4 (PH4), and protocol handlers for asynchronoustransfer mode (PHA).

The PH4 hardware contains the software and data required to perform the framerelay protocol handler (FRPH) function. Packet pipe trunks are assigned to thePH4 and the FRPH function demultiplexes the packetized voice from the packetpipes and delivers it to the packet bus. In the other direction, the FRPH selectspackets from the packet bus and multiplexes them onto the packet pipe fordelivery to the cell site. Since this section focuses on the functionality rather thanthe hardware, the term FRPH is used.

In a similar manner, the PHV hardware contains software and data necessary toperform the Speech Handler (SH) function. Because this section focuses on thefunctionality rather than the hardware, the term SH is used.

The SH converts voice packets from the packet bus to 64 kbps PCM digitizedvoice for delivery to the TSIU. In the reverse direction, the SH converts 64 kbpsPCM digitized voice into voice packets and delivers them to the packet bus.

The echo canceller and signaling unit (ECSU) provides echo cancellationbetween the 5ESS DCS and the PSTN. For simplicity, the ECSU has not beenshown in many of the figures in this document, but it or a stand-alone echocanceller is assumed to be present.

Issue 15 July 2002 2-27


Call Processing

Figure 2-7. 5ESS DCS CDMA Components

ECP Complex

MSCSeries IICell Site

Mobile Unit

PSTN

NIPNIT


5ESS DCSSwitch DCS

DFMP

PHA SH FRPH

100 Mb Packet Bus

PSU2

ECSU TSIU GDSU

DLTU DLTU

SM

AM

CM

s

AM: Administrative ModuleCM: Communications ModuleDCS: Digital Cellular SwitchDFMP: Data Fanout Multiple PIDBDLTU: Digital Line Trunk UnitECP: Executive Cellular ProcessorECSU: Echo Canceler and

Signaling Unit

FRPH: Frame Relay Protocol HandlerGDSU: Global Digital Service UnitMSC: Mobile Switching CenterPHA: Protocol Handler Asynchronous

Transfer ModeSH: Speech HandlerSM: Switching ModuleTSIU: Time Slot Interchange Unit

Voice TrunksPacket PipesControl/Data Links

To Other PSU

2-28 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 2-8 on page 2-29 through Figure 2-8 on page 2-34 illustrate theinterconnections of these units in order to complete a CDMA call within the 5ESSDCS.

1. Packet Pipe Facility Termination: Figure 2-8 on page 2-29 illustrates packetpipe facility termination. When a mobile unit is on a CDMA call, thesubscriber’s voice is converted into packets at the mobile unit, and thepackets are multiplexed at the cell site into a 2- to 16-time slot bundlecalled a packet pipe. Up to14 conversations may be multiplexed into a4-DS0 packet pipe and multiple packet pipes may be offered from anygiven cell site. The facilities terminate into the digital line trunk unit (DLTU2)of the switching module (SM) in the 5ESS DCS.

2. Packet Pipe Time Slot Nail-Up: When the packet pipe is installed, thepacket pipe time slots are nailed-up from the Digital Facility Interface (DFI)through the TSI to the PH4. Figure 2-8 on page 2-30 illustrates packet pipetime slot nail-ups. The DLTU2 connects the packet pipes to the time slotinterchange unit (TSIU) where they are provisioned to terminate on aspecified FRPH via the data fanout multiple PIDB (DFMP).

3. Packet Pipe to PCM Speech Conversion: Figure 2-8 on page 2-31illustrates packet pipe to PCM speech conversion. The FRPHdemultiplexes the packet pipes and sends the voice packets to the PSUpacket bus. The PHV selects packets from the PSU packet bus andconverts them into 64 Kbps Pulse Code Modulated (PCM) digitized voicesamples. The PHV then passes the PCM to the TSIU via the DFMP.

4. PSTN Connection: Figure 2-8 on page 2-32 illustrates the PSTNconnection. The TSIU assigns a time slot to the PCM voice samples andsends it to the PSTN via a second DLTU2. If an ECSU is provisioned andactivated for this time slot, the 5ESS DCS provides cancellation of echoeshaving up to 64 ms of tail end delay.

5. Land-to-Mobile Voice Path: Figure 2-8 on page 2-33 illustrates voice pathfrom the land line, or PSTN station, to the mobile unit. The PSTN trunkterminates on a DLTU2. The DLTU2 receives digitized voice from thePSTN and passes it through the TSIU to a SH trunk assigned for the call.The SH converts the digitized voice to packetized voice and transfers thepackets to the packet bus. The FRPH assigned for the call selects thepackets from the packet bus and multiplexes them onto the packet pipewhich passes through the TSIU and another DLTU2 and on to the cell siteserving the mobile unit.

6. Mobile-to-Land Voice Path: Figure 2-8 on page 2-34 illustrates voice pathfrom the mobile unit to the landline or PSTN station. The cell site receivespacketized voice from the mobile unit and multiplexes the packets onto apacket pipe. In the 5ESS DCS, the packet pipe passes through the DLTU2,the TSIU, and the DFMP and is terminated on the FRPH. The FRPHdemultiplexes the packets and transfers them to the packet bus. The SH

Issue 15 July 2002 2-29


Call Processing

assigned for the call selects the voice packets and converts them to PCMdigitized voice, passes the digitized voice to the TSIU via the SH trunk andonward through another DLTU2 trunk to the PSTN.

Figure 2-8. 5ESS DCS CDMA Call Flow (Sheet 1 of 6)

ECP Complex


Mobile Unit

PSTN

NIPNIT


5ESS DCSSwitch DCS

DFMP

SH FRPH

100 Mb Packet Bus

PSU2

TSIU

DLTU DLTU

SM

AM

CM

s

Voice TrunksPacket PipesControl/Data LinksPacketized Voice:Traffic Channel:

A. Packet Pipe Facility Termination

2-30 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006


ECP Complex


Mobile Unit

PSTN

NIPNIT


5ESS DCSSwitch DCS

DFMP

SH FRPH

100 Mb Packet Bus

PSU2

TSIU

DLTU DLTU

SM

AM

CM

s


B. Packet Pipe Time Slot Nail-Up

Issue 15 July 2002 2-31


Call Processing


ECP Complex


Mobile Unit

PSTN

NIPNIT


5ESS DCSSwitch DCS

DFMP

SH FRPH

100 Mb Packet Bus

PSU2

TSIU

DLTU DLTU

SM

AM

CM

s


C. Packet Pipe PCM Speech Conversion

2-32 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006


ECP Complex


Mobile Unit

PSTN

NIPNIT


5ESS DCSSwitch DCS

DFMP

SH FRPH

100 Mb Packet Bus

PSU2

TSIU

DLTU DLTU

SM

AM

CM

s


D. PSTN Connection

Issue 15 July 2002 2-33


Call Processing


ECP Complex


Mobile Unit

PSTN

NIPNIT

5ESS DCSSwitch DCS

DFMP

SH FRPH

100 Mb Packet Bus

PSU2

TSIU

DLTU DLTU

SM

AM

CM

s


E. Land-to-Mobile Voice Path

64 KbpsPCM


2-34 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006


ECP Complex


Mobile Unit

PSTN

NIPNIT

Land-BasedSubscriber 5ESS DCS

Switch DCS

DFMP

SH FRPH

100 Mb Packet Bus

PSU2

TSIU

DLTU DLTU

SM

AM

CM

s


F. Mobile-to-Land Voice Path

64 KbpsPCM

Issue 15 July 2002 2-35


Call Processing

CDMA Call Scenarios

In the CDMA configuration, the ECP Complex and the DCS perform the callprocessing activities. The 5ESS DCS performs the functions of the DCS.

The call scenarios described here represent the more typical call types. Theseinclude:

■ Mobile-to-land: A mobile unit places a call to a land-based subscriber.

■ Land-to-mobile: A land-based subscriber makes a call to a mobile unit.

■ Mobile-to-mobile: A mobile unit places a call to another mobile unit.

■ Call handoff: A mobile unit moves from the service area of one cell site tothe service area of another cell site.

The CDMA call scenarios are similar to AMPS/TDMA call scenarios. Thedifference is that CDMA uses the PSU for speech processing. To preventfraudulent access, for each call scenario, the ECP Complex performs a validationor authentication process, just as described for the AMPS/TDMA protocols. TheECP Complex allows valid calls to proceed, but provides incomplete treatment forinvalid calls.

Mobile-to-Land Call

A mobile-to-land call is a call that is placed from a mobile unit to a land-basedcustomer. The successful mobile-to-land call scenario (also known as a mobilecall origination) consists of the following phases:

1. Preorigination: Preorigination represents the activities performed toprepare for a call from a mobile unit to a land-based customer. A subscriberplaces a call on the mobile unit by dialing the desired digits and pressingthe SEND key on the handset. The mobile unit transmits a channel requestmessage to the cell site.

2. Origination: (Figure 2-9 on page 2-37). In the origination phase, the mobileunit sends the called telephone number to the ECP Complex where the callprocessing is begun. When the SEND key is pressed, the mobile unit sendsa service request message to the cell site. The message includes thedialed digits, the allowed modes (AMPS or CDMA), and the MobileIdentification Number (MIN). The MIN is a 34-bit number which is a digitalrepresentation of the directory telephone number assigned to a mobile unit.The selected cell site associated with the selected setup channel receivesthis information and relays it to the ECP Complex via the IMS/CNI Ring.

3. Channel Assignments: (Figure 2-9 on page 2-38). The ECP Complexanalyzes the dialed digits (received from the mobile unit) to determinerouting and charging information. If the call is invalid, the ECP Complexterminates it. If the call is valid, the ECP Complex sends an originationmessage to the cell site and requests a SH assignment from the 5ESS

2-36 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

DCS. The cell site assigns the traffic code channel. The 5ESS DCSallocates a SH and notifies the ECP Complex which passes the informationon to the cell site. The cell site then initiates the packet protocol with theSH.

4. Digit Outpulsing: (Figure 2-9 on page 2-39). The ECP Complex sends asetup message to the 5ESS DCS. The setup message contains the callidentification, digits to outpulse to the PSTN, the SH trunk identification,and a list of PSTN trunk groups to choose from to connect a call. The 5ESSDCS seizes the PSTN trunk necessary to connect the mobile unit to aland-based subscriber. The 5ESS DCS sends the dialed digits to the PSTNand the NIP completes the final routing to the land-based subscriber. TheNIP then returns audible ringing to the mobile unit via the DCS and the cellsite.

5. Talking State: (Figure 2-9 on page 2-40). In this phase, the land-basedsubscriber answers the call and the voice path is completed from themobile unit to the land-based subscriber. The NIP removes audible ringingtone from the mobile unit. The SH and the FRPH provide a bi-directionalvoice path between the mobile unit and the land-based customer aspreviously described in section “CDMA Call Flow” on page 2-26.

Issue 15 July 2002 2-37


Call Processing

Figure 2-9. CDMA Mobile-to-Landline Call Processing (Sheet 1 of 4)

ECP Complex


Mobile Unit

PSTN

NIPNIT

5ESS DCSSwitch DCS

DFMP

SH FRPH

100 Mb Packet Bus

PSU2

TSIU

DLTU DLTU

SM

AM

CM

s

Voice TrunksPacket PipesControl/Data LinksPacketized Voice:CDMA Access Channel:

A. Origination

64 KbpsPCM


2-38 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006


ECP Complex


Mobile Unit

PSTN

NIPNIT

5ESS DCSSwitch DCS

DFMP

SH FRPH

100 Mb Packet Bus

PSU2

TSIU

DLTU DLTU

SM

AM

CM

s

Voice TrunksPacket PipesControl/Data LinksPacketized Voice:Access Channel:

B. Channel Assignment

64 KbpsPCM


Traffic Channel:

(SH Assign)

Issue 15 July 2002 2-39


Call Processing


ECP Complex


Mobile Unit

PSTN

NIPNIT

5ESS DCSSwitch DCS

DFMP

SH FRPH

100 Mb Packet Bus

PSU2

TSIU

DLTU DLTU

SM

AM

CM

s

Voice TrunksPacket PipesControl/Data LinksPacketized Voice:Selected Traffic

C. Digit Outpulsing

64 KbpsPCM


Channel:

(SETUP)

Audible Ring

2-40 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006


ECP Complex


Mobile Unit

PSTN

NIPNIT

5ESS DCSSwitch DCS

DFMP

SH FRPH

100 Mb Packet Bus

PSU2

TSIU

DLTU DLTU

SM

AM

CM

s

Voice TrunksPacket PipesControl/Data LinksPacketized Voice:Selected Traffic

D. Talking State

64 KbpsPCM

Channel:


Issue 15 July 2002 2-41


Call Processing

Land-to-Mobile Call

A land-to-mobile call, also known as a mobile terminated call, is a call placed froma land-based customer to a mobile unit. The land-to-mobile call scenario consistsof the following phases:

The 5ESS DCS receives a call via an incoming trunk from the PSTN. The ECPComplex analyzes the dialed digits from the PSTN and broadcasts a page requestto the cell sites serving the appropriate location area. If a mobile unit responds tothe page, the ECP Complex performs validation and authentications functions. Ifthe call is invalid, the ECP Complex terminates the call. If the call is valid and themobile unit responds to the page, the ECP Complex communicates with thecorresponding cell site to set up a traffic channel for the mobile unit. The ECPComplex directs the 5ESS DCS to seize a cell site trunk, a corresponding NIT andconnect a talk path. A land-to-mobile call is as follows:

1. Routing Analysis: (Figure 2-10 on page 2-43). In this phase, the mobile unitfor the call is identified. A land-based subscriber originates a call and dialsthe telephone number of a mobile unit. From the calling party’s NetworkInterface Point (NIP) in the PSTN, a Network Interface Trunk (NIT) isseized, connecting the land-based subscriber to the 5ESS DCS of theMSC. The 5ESS DCS collects the dialed digits and passes them, alongwith the NIT group member identification, to the ECP Complex via the IMS/CNI ring. The information is analyzed in the ECP Complex for validation.

2. Paging and Audible Ringing: (Figure 2-10 on page 2-44). In this phase, theECP Complex checks where the mobile unit was last seen and directs the5ESS DCS to return audible ringing to the land-based subscriber. An LDSUwithin the 5ESS DCS provides the audible ringing tone over the NIT to thecalling party in the NIP. [In the SM-2000, a digital service circuit model 3(DSC3) provides a local digital service function (LDSF) which replaces theLDSU.)

3. Page Response: (Figure 2-10 on page 2-45). In this phase, the mobile unitidentifies itself so that the call can be completed. The mobile unitrecognizes its page and responds to the serving cell site identifying itself asa CDMA-capable unit. The cell site then reports the page response to theECP Complex over the dedicated data link. If the mobile unit does notrespond to the page, the calling party is normally routed to anannouncement or voice mail system.

4. Channel Assignment: (Figure 2-10 on page 2-46). The ECP Complexverifies that the call can be completed as a CDMA call. The serving cell sitethen informs the mobile unit of its traffic channel assignment. At the sametime, the ECP Complex requests a SH assignment from the 5ESS DCS.The DCS allocates the SH and informs the ECP Complex which in turninforms the cell. The cell site then initiates the packet pipe protocol with theSH.

2-42 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

5. Alerting: (Figure 2-10 on page 2-47). The alerting phase informs the mobileuser of an incoming call. The cell site transmits an alert message to themobile unit to signal that it has an incoming call. The mobile unit thenanswers the call.

6. Talking State: (Figure 2-10 on page 2-48). In this phase, the final talk pathis established. The cell site recognizes answer indication and informs theECP Complex. The ECP Complex then sends an accept message,containing the SH trunk identity, to the DCS. The 5ESS DCS completes thepath and removes the audible ringing. The SH and the FRPH provide abi-directional voice path between the mobile unit and the land-basedcustomer as described in “CDMA Call Flow” on page 2-26.

Issue 15 July 2002 2-43


Call Processing

Figure 2-10. CDMA Landline-to-Mobile Call Processing (Sheet 1 of 6)

ECP Complex


Mobile Unit

PSTN

NIPNIT

5ESS DCSSwitch DCS

DFMP

SH FRPH

100 Mb Packet Bus

PSU2

TSIU

DLTU DLTU

SM

AM

CM

s

Voice TrunksPacket PipesControl/Data LinksPacketized Voice:

A. Routing Analysis

Dial Mobile UnitsDigits

Land BasedSubscriber

2-44 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006


ECP Complex


Mobile Unit

PSTN

NIPNIT

5ESS DCSSwitch DCS

DFMP

SH FRPH

100 Mb Packet Bus

PSU2

TSIU

DLTU DLTU

SM

AM

CM

s


B. Paging and Audible Ringing


Audible Ringing

Paging Channel

Issue 15 July 2002 2-45


Call Processing


ECP Complex


Mobile Unit

PSTN

NIPNIT

5ESS DCSSwitch DCS

DFMP

SH FRPH

100 Mb Packet Bus

PSU2

TSIU

DLTU DLTU

SM

AM

CM

s


C. Page Response


Audible Ringing

LSDU

Access Channel:

2-46 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006


ECP Complex


Mobile Unit

PSTN

NIPNIT

5ESS DCSSwitch DCS

DFMP

SH FRPH

100 Mb Packet Bus

PSU2

TSIU

DLTU DLTU

SM

AM

CM

s



Audible Ringing

LSDU

Assignment Data:Traffic Channel

D. Channel Assignment

Issue 15 July 2002 2-47


Call Processing


ECP Complex


Mobile Unit

PSTN

NIPNIT

5ESS DCSSwitch DCS

DFMP

SH FRPH

100 Mb Packet Bus

PSU2

TSIU

DLTU DLTU

SM

AM

CM

s



Audible Ringing

LSDU

Traffic Channel

E. Alerting

2-48 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006


ECP Complex


Mobile Unit

PSTN

NIPNIT

5ESS DCSSwitch DCS

DFMP

SH FRPH

100 Mb Packet Bus

PSU2

TSIU

DLTU DLTU

SM

AM

CM

s



LSDU

Traffic Channel

F. Talking State

Issue 15 July 2002 2-49


Call Processing

Mobile-to-Mobile Call

A mobile-to-mobile call occurs when a mobile unit places a call to another mobileunit. A CDMA mobile-to-mobile call is actually a combination of the two callscenarios previously described. The mobile-to-land scenario represents amobile-originated call and the land-to-mobile scenario represents a mobiletermination. In a mobile-to-mobile call, the ECP Complex treats the two halves ofthe call as separate, individual calls.

In the usual mobile-to-land scenario, the mobile unit originates the call, and theECP Complex directs the DCS to select an outgoing NIT to the PSTN. The ECPComplex completes the call by directing the DCS to interconnect the SH trunk andthe NIT, and to outpulse the digits over the NIT so that the NIP can complete thecall.

In the usual land-to-mobile call scenario, the call is terminated via an incomingNIT from the PSTN. The ECP Complex recognizes a call intended for a mobileunit within its service area, and directs the DCS and the cell site to complete theconnection between the NIT and the mobile unit.

In each of these cases, a NIT between the DCS and the PSTN is required. Thesame is true for a mobile-to-mobile call, except that the trunk does not interfacewith the PSTN. Instead, it originates and terminates within the same MSC. This iscalled a loop-around trunk.

For a mobile-to-mobile call, the mobile-to-land call processing scenario is used toestablish a call to an outgoing loop-around trunk. Next, the land-to-mobile callprocessing scenario is used to establish a mobile termination from the incomingside of the loop-around trunk to the terminating mobile unit.

The loop-around trunk may connect between two Switching Modules (SMs), or itmay connect back to the same SM. Figure 2-11 on page 2-50 shows how themobile-to-mobile call is interconnected. For clarity and ease of understanding, thisfigure shows the loop-around trunk interconnecting two separate SMs, but this isnot a requirement. If the two mobile units are being served through differentDCSs, the connection is made over inter-DCS trunks.

2-50 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 2-11. CDMA Mobile Unit-to-Mobile Unit Call Processing

5ESS DCS

Mobile Unit

ECPComplex

AM

CM

TSIU

DLTU DLTU

PSU2

DFMP

100 Mb Packet Bus

SH FRPH

Series IICell Site

TSIU

DLTU DLTU

PSU2

DFMP

100 Mb Packet Bus

SHFRPH

Switch DCS

GDSU SMSM

Series IICell Site

LEGEND:

AM: Administrative ModulePSTN:Mobile Switching CenterATM: Asynchronous Transfer Mode NIP:Network Interface Points

CM: Communications Module NIT:Network Interface TrunksDCS: Digital Cellular SwitchPSTN:Public Switched Telephone Network

DFMP: Data Fanout Multiple PIDB SM:Switching ModuleDLTU: Digital Line Trunk Unit TSIU:Time Slot Interchange Unit

DSU: Digital Services UnitECP: Executive Cellular Processor

FRPH: Frame Relay Protocol Handler

Mobile Unit

Select Traffic Channel:

Packet Voice:Voice Trunks:Control/Data Links:

Mobile Termination Mobile Origination

Loop AroundTrunk

Issue 15 July 2002 2-51


Call Processing

CDMA Handoffs

A handoff allows established calls to continue without interruption by usingavailable radio resources as a mobile unit moves from one cell to another.Handoffs are valid in all call scenarios (mobile-to-land, land-to-mobile, andmobile-to-mobile). Figure 2-5 on page 2-21 shows the handoff areas as themobile unit moves between cell sites.

The CDMA protocol supports hard and soft handoffs. The AUTOPLEX CDMAimplementation supports the following handoffs:

■ CDMA to AMPs Hard Handoff: “break before make” connection. The cellhands off the mobile unit’s call to another cell then releases its resourcesfor the mobile unit.

■ CDMA to CDMA Hard Handoff: handoff occurs between MSCs through anIS-41 networking relationship.

■ CDMA Semi-Soft Handoff: “break before make” connection. The mobileunit’s call is moved from one CDMA carrier frequency to a different CDMAcarrier frequency while being served by the same speech handler (SH). Asemi-soft handoff can only occur between CDMA cells which have accessto the same SH.

■ CDMA Soft Handoff: “make before break” connection. The connectionbetween the mobile unit and the cell site is established and may bemaintained indefinitely to the two or three cells serving that call. Softhandoff provides uninterrupted speech continuity while the mobile ismoving form one cell site to another. A soft handoff can only occur betweenCDMA cells which have access to the same SH.

■ CDMA Softer Handoff: intracell handoff occurring between sectors of atwo-sector or three-sector sub-cell. This type of handoff only occurs at thecell site and is independent of the MSC.

Once a call has been handed off from a CDMA cell site to an AMPS cell site, itremains in the AMPS protocol until the call is disconnected. If the CDMA mobileunit moves from the AMPS service area back into a CDMA service area, the callremains in the AMPS protocol. However, any new calls may be made using theCDMA protocol.

CDMA to AMPS Hard Handoff

A CDMA-to-AMPS hard handoff occurs in cases where the mobile unit movesfrom a CDMA cell to an AMPS cell. When a hard handoff is necessary, the dualmode (both digital and analog capability) CDMA mobile unit is instructed tochange its mode from one protocol to the other.

2-52 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

NOTE:This type of handoff may occur on the same physical cell site and sector if thesector is equipped for CDMA and AMPS.

CDMA to CDMA Hard Handoff

A CDMA-to-CDMA hard handoff occurs between MSCs through an ANSI-41networking relationship. The Revision C of the ANSI-41 standard addressesCDMA handoff parameters, therefore both MSCs in the handoff must comply withRevision C. CDMA to CDMA hard handoffs may occur between MSCs within thesame system or between inter-vendor MSCs.

When a CDMA to CDMA hard handoff takes place, the following process occurs:

■ The serving system seizes an Inter-vendor voice trunk. It then sends asignaling message to the target system with the information parametersneeded to perform the handoff.

■ The target system returns a message with information such as the channeldata, code channel list, and search window. It also sends the mobile unit amessage with information needed to tune to the new channel.

CDMA Semi-Soft Handoff

A CDMA semi-soft handoff may be used to move a call from the CDMA carrierfrequency currently serving the call to a different CDMA carrier frequency. Thismay be necessary when discontinuous coverage areas exist (such as at systemboundaries) where the serving carrier is not available at a neighbor cell. It mayalso be necessary when resources are temporarily unavailable (due to heavyusage conditions or maintenance activities) at a neighbor cell site.

From the mobile unit's perspective, a semi-soft handoff is the same as a hardhandoff because the mobile completely ceases communication with one cell siteand then begins communication with a new cell site using different air-interfaceparameters.

For the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks, the semi-soft handoff is similarto the CDMA soft handoff (described in “CDMA Soft and Softer Handoff” onpage 2-54). Like the soft handoff process, the semi-soft handoff process isexecuted without the involvement of the call processing software in the DCS orECP Complex. The call processing is performed entirely by the cell sites and thePSU2 in the 5ESS DCS. The ECP Complex is informed after a semi-soft handoffhas been performed.

The CDMA semi-soft handoff call flow is as follows:

Issue 15 July 2002 2-53


Call Processing

1. Based on signal strength measurements reported by the mobile unit, theprimary cell may make a decision to request a semi-soft handoff. It is alsopossible for a primary cell's request for a soft handoff to be escalated to asemi-soft handoff by the secondary cell. This is done if the secondary cellhas insufficient resources to serve the soft handoff request.

A semi-soft handoff between any two antenna faces (on different cells oron the same cell) is possible under the same conditions as a soft handoff,provided the Channel Elements (CE) connected to each antenna face arecapable of establishing a connection (via the packet pipes) to the same SH.

2. The primary cell site sends a message to the secondary cell siterequesting a semi-soft handoff to the desired antenna face.

3. The secondary cell allocates a CE to serve the semi-soft handoff. Theallocated CE is activated and sets up a connection with the same SH that iscurrently serving the call via the primary cell site. Once this connection isestablished, the secondary cell site allocates a traffic channel to be usedon the new antenna face. Then the CE begins transmitting forward voiceframes (that it receives from the SH via the packet pipe) using the trafficchannel over the new antenna face. At this point, two CEs (possibly atdifferent cell sites) are now transmitting voice frames simultaneously overtheir respective antenna faces; however, they are doing so on differentCDMA carrier frequencies.

4. The secondary cell site informs the primary cell site that it has successfullyconnected to the SH. The primary cell site then instructs the mobile unit tostop operating on the current CDMA carrier frequency and to tune to thenew carrier being used at the secondary cell site. The mobile unit tunes tothe new carrier and begins sending and receiving frames from thesecondary cell site. The secondary cell site sends the frames it receivesfrom the mobile unit to the SH via the packet pipe, and it informs theprimary cell site that it has acquired the signal from the mobile unit on thenew carrier.

5. The old primary cell site sends a message to the secondary cell site,instructing it to begin acting as the primary cell site for the call (“PrimaryTransfer”). The new primary cell site takes over responsibility for managingthe call, including handoff evaluation and supervision of forward andreverse traffic. Meanwhile, the old primary cell site CE ceases transmittingframes to the mobile, and disconnects from the SH. All resources at the oldprimary cell associated with the call are then released for use by othercalls.

2-54 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

NOTE:In the semi-soft handoff process, when the SH has connections from both cellsites, it only receives voice data frames from the old primary cell site and thenfrom the new primary cell site after the mobile is retuned. This is because themobile ceases transmitting on the old carrier before it tunes to and beginstransmitting on the new carrier. That causes a short break in voice continuityduring a semi-soft handoff (unlike the soft/softer handoff).

CDMA Soft and Softer Handoff

One of the major benefits of a CDMA system is the ability of the mobile unit tocommunicate with more than one cell site (or with multiple sectors of a cell), thusgiving some of the MSC call control responsibilities to the cell site, mobile unitsand SH. This is accomplished by having a primary cell site that coordinates othercell sites as they are added or deleted from the call. This allows multiple sectors/cell sites to transmit and receive voice frames with a single mobile unit for aparticular call.

The channels between the mobile unit and multiple cell sites are established andmay be maintained indefinitely as long as the mobile unit is within the radiodistance of the cell sites. The SH on the 5ESS DCS selects, on a packet by packetbasis, the best signal from the participating cell sites to convert to PCM digitizedvoice. In the other direction, the SH converts PCM digitized voice to multiple voicepackets for transmission to each cell site associated with the soft handoff. Themobile unit, which has its own vocoder, then selects the highest quality packetfrom the associated cell sites. This provides a high-quality voice transmission.

The following sections detail the call flow for a CDMA Soft and Softer handoff.

Soft Handoff Call Flow

Refer to Figure 2-12 on page 2-55, which illustrates the soft handoff described inthis section.

1. During an active call, the CDMA mobile unit constantly monitors the signalstrength from the serving and neighboring CDMA cells. The mobile unitreports these signal strength measurements to the primary cell site. Whenthe primary cell site determines that the signal strength from anotherantenna face has reached the Pilot Detection Threshold, the primary cellsite makes a determination as to whether a softer handoff can be set upwith that antenna face. If a softer handoff is not possible, then the primarycell site will attempt to perform a soft handoff. A soft handoff between anytwo antenna faces (on different cells or on the same cell) is possible aslong as CEs connected to each antenna face are capable of establishing aconnection (via the packet pipes) to the same SH.

Issue 15 July 2002 2-55


Call Processing

Figure 2-12. CDMA Soft Handoff

2. The primary cell site sends a message to the secondary cell site requestinga soft handoff with the desired antenna face and various parameters(including an address identifier for the SH).

3. The secondary cell allocates a CE to serve the soft handoff. The allocatedCE is activated and sets up a connection with the same SH that is currentlyserving the call via the primary cell site. Once this connection isestablished, the secondary cell site allocates a new code channel to beused on the new antenna face. The CE now begins transmitting forwardvoice frames (that it receives from the SH via the packet pipe) using thiscode channel over the new antenna face via the BCR connected to thatantenna face. At this point, two CEs (possibly at different cell sites) are nowtransmitting voice frames simultaneously over their respective antennafaces.

5ESS DCS

ECPComplex

AM

CM

Cell Site

Cell Site

TSIU

PSU2

DFMP

PACKET BUS

SH

Switch DCS

Cell Site

FRPHSH FRPHFRPH

SMDLTU

DFI

DFI

DFI

DFI

PSTN

64KbpsPCM

MobileUnit

TrafficChannels

SelectTraffic Channel:

Voice Trunks:Packetized Voice:

2-56 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

4. The secondary cell site informs the primary cell site that it has successfullyconnected to the SH. The primary cell site then instructs the mobile unit tobegin demodulating the new code channel, in addition to the original codechannel already in use by the mobile unit. The mobile unit now receivesvoice frames from the two CEs. As was the case in the softer handoff, themobile unit performs frame selection by selecting the “best” frame receivedfrom either of the antenna faces. As long as the mobile receives the framewithout error via at least one of the two paths, then the mobile is able to usethat frame.

At the same time, the CEs at both the primary and the secondary cell arereceiving reverse voice frames from the mobile unit via their respectiveantenna faces. In the case of the soft handoff, each CE is receiving framesvia only one antenna face, so neither CE performs frame selection. Framesreceived by each CE are passed on to the SH via each cell's packet pipe.

5. At the DCS, the packet pipes pass through the TSIU and DFMP and areassigned to terminate on a FRPH. The packet pipes are demultiplexed inthe FRPH, and sent to the same SH via the PSU packet bus.

6. During a soft handoff, the SH must execute the frame selection process byselecting the best quality voice frame sent via the FRPH from one of thetwo cell sites serving the soft handoff. The SH performs this function bycomparing the error indicators included in each of the packets by the CEs.The SH selects the best packets and other packets received are discarded.In the other direction, the SH converts PCM digitized voice to multiple voicepackets for transmission to each cell site serving the soft handoff.

7. A call will remain in a soft handoff until the mobile unit determines that thesignal strength of one of the antenna faces has fallen below the Pilot DropThreshold for a specified period of time (the Drop Timer), it will report thisevent to the primary cell site.

8. The primary cell site instructs the mobile unit to stop demodulating thecode channel associated with the antenna face being dropped. Once themobile unit acknowledges that it has done so, two scenarios are possible:

a. The antenna face to be dropped from is at the secondary cell. In thiscase, the primary cell site sends a message to the secondary cellsite instructing it to drop from the soft handoff. The secondary cellsite CE ceases transmitting frames to the mobile and disconnectsfrom the SH. All resources at the secondary cell associated with thesoft handoff are then released for use by other calls (CE, CodeChannel, and so on)

b. The antenna face to be dropped is at the primary cell. In this case,the primary cell site sends a message to the secondary cell site,instructing it to begin acting as the primary cell site for the call. Thenew primary cell site takes over responsibility for managing the call,including handoff evaluation and supervision of forward and reverse

Issue 15 July 2002 2-57


Call Processing

traffic. Meanwhile, the old primary cell site CE ceases transmittingframes to the mobile and disconnects from the SH. All resources atthe old primary cell associated with the call are then released for useby other calls.

The soft handoff process is executed without the involvement of the callprocessing software in either the DCS or the ECP Complex. The call processing isperformed entirely by the cell sites and the PSU2 in the 5ESS DCS. However, theECP Complex is informed after a soft handoff has been set up or ended.

Close coordination must occur between each of the cell sites. The SH and the cellsites continuously exchange clock adjustment packets during the call to adjustvoice packets. This allows the cell sites, mobile unit, and SH to synchronize thesending and receiving of packets. Otherwise, delays in voice processing mayoccur causing poor voice quality transmission.

Softer Handoff Call Flow

1. During an active call, the CDMA mobile unit constantly monitors the signalstrength from the serving and neighboring CDMA cells. The mobile unitreports these signal strength measurements to the primary cell site. (Thisprocess is called “mobile assisted handoff”.) When the primary cell sitedetermines that the signal strength from a neighboring antenna face havereached a specified threshold (called the Pilot Detection Threshold), theprimary cell site makes a determination as to whether a softer handoff canbe set up with that antenna face. A softer handoff between two antennafaces at the same cell site is possible if:

a. The Channel Element (CE) currently serving the call belongs to aCDMA subcell which serves both of the antenna faces.

b. Both Baseband Combiner and Radios (BCRs) serving the twoantenna faces are in service and are both accessible to the CEcurrently serving the call (access to a BCR could be blockedtemporarily due to maintenance activity).

c. The call is not already in a softer handoff. Only two-way softerhandoff is supported. If a call needs to be served by three antennafaces at the same cell site, then it can be served by a combination ofsofter and soft handoffs. If an intra-cell handoff cannot be served asa softer handoff, then it may be served as an intra-cell soft handoff.

2. The primary cell site allocates a new code channel to be used on the newantenna face. The CE now begins transmitting forward voice packets (thatit receives from the SH via the packet pipe) using this code channel overthe new antenna face via the BCR connected to that antenna face. The CEcontinues transmitting over the first antenna face as well (using the codechannel originally allocated for that antenna face). At this point, the CE istransmitting voice packets simultaneously over both antenna faces(possibly using a different code channel over each face).

2-58 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

3. The primary cell site instructs the mobile unit to begin demodulating thenew code channel, in addition to the original code channel already in useby the mobile unit. The mobile unit now receives voice packets via both ofthe antenna faces of the cell site. The mobile unit performs frame selection,where it selects the “best” frame received from either of the antenna faces.As long as the mobile receives the frame without error via at least one ofthe two paths, then the mobile is able to use that frame.

At the same time, the CE receives reverse voice frames from the mobileunit via each of the antenna faces/BCRs. The CE also performs frameselection, where it selects the “best” frame received via either antennaface, and sends it to the SH via the packet pipe.

4. A call remains in a softer handoff until the mobile unit determines that thesignal strength of one of the antenna faces has fallen below the Pilot DropThreshold for a specified period of time (the Drop Timer), it reports thisevent to the primary cell site.

5. The primary cell site instructs the mobile unit to stop demodulating thecode channel associated with the antenna face being dropped. Once themobile unit acknowledges that it has done so, the CE ceases transmittingover the antenna face being dropped. The code channel associated withthe dropped antenna face is then released to be reused by other calls onthat face.

Soft and Softer Handoff Combinations

Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks supports both two-way and three-waysoft handoffs, that is, one mobile unit may be in a soft handoff between up to threedifferent cells at one time. Combinations of soft and softer handoffs are alsopossible. A mobile unit could be in a softer handoff with two antenna faces at onecell site and in soft handoff with a third antenna face at a second cell site. In thiscase, frame selection would be performed both by one of the CEs (in the softerhandoff) and by the SH.

Issue 15 July 2002 2-59


Call Processing

Other Types of CDMA Handoffs

CDMA Inter-SM Soft Handoff

Figure 2-13 on page 2-59 illustrates an inter-SM soft handoff. As previouslymentioned, a soft handoff can only occur if the new cell site has access to thesame SH as the original cell site. The PHA provides this type of access eventhough the cells are served by different SMs.

Figure 2-13. CDMA Inter-SM Soft Handoff

MSC

5ESS DCS

ECPComplex

AM

CM

TSIU

DLTU DLTU

PSU2

DFMP

100 Mb Packet Bus

SH FRPH

Series IICell Site

TSIU

DLTU DLTU

PSU2

DFMP

100 Mb Packet Bus

SH PHA

Switch DCS

GDSU

PSTN

SMSM

Series IICell Site

FRPH PHA

Mobile Unit

SelectTraffic Channel:

Voice Trunks:Control/Data Links:Packetized Voice:

2-60 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

The PHA extends the packet bus between PSUs and provides high-bandwidthconnectivity so that a single SH can be used to process the call. Again, the 5ESSDCS and the cell sites complete the inter-SM soft handoff without the assistanceof the ECP Complex or DCS call processing software. Figure 2-14 on page 2-60illustrates how the PHA can provide point-to-point connections between PSUs.

Inter-DCS Soft and Semi-Soft Handoff (IDSHO)

Inter-DCS soft and semi-soft handoffs (IDSHO) of CDMA calls in MSCs withmultiple CDMA 5ESS switches within the same Switch are supported; therefore,there is no interruption of transmission.

Figure 2-14. PSU Interconnection via PHA (via Point-to-Point ATM)

NOTE:Each pair of 5ESS DCS SMs with a common soft or semi-soft handoff bordermust have an Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) connection. This ATMconnection is required between switching modules via PHA.

PSU2

PSU2

PSU2

PSU2

PSU2

PSU2

Connections supported by the PHA

Issue 15 July 2002 2-61


Call Processing

The IDSHO feature permits soft and semi-soft handoffs of CDMA calls acrossmultiple Digital Cellular Switches (DCSs) that are within the same Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks.

■ Soft handoffs—The same SH being used for a call prior to the start of softhandoff is employed during and after the soft handoff as long as nosubsequent hard handoff occurs. Unlike a hard handoff, the soft handoffcauses no interruption in the transmission of the end-user’s payload (voiceor signaling packets).

■ Semi-soft handoffs—The same SH being used for a call prior to the start ofsemi-soft handoff is employed during and after the semi-soft handoff aslong as no subsequent hard handoff occurs. Unlike a soft handoff, thesemi-soft handoff does interrupt the transmission of the end-user’s payload(voice or signaling packets).

Border Cell Sector Handoffs

The Border Sector cells are at the edge of CDMA coverage or at the edge of thecoverage for a particular carrier. These border cells facilitate calls being handedoff to an analog or some other carrier. The types of handoffs that the border cellsperform include:

■ Directed Frequency. A directed frequency handoff is an intra-sectorsemisoft handoff sent to a particular frequency.

■ Directed Neighbor List. A directed neighbor list handoff is a translations-defined handoff for a particular sector. There can be up to three handoffneighbors for one sector. Handoff neighbors can be CDMA or analog.

■ Handdown to Analog. A handdown to analog handoff is a call that ishanded off to an analog cell in the same sector.

Six-Way Soft Handoff

The Six-Way soft handoff increases the possible number of pilots monitored by amobile from three to six. This type of handoff:

■ allows detection of the strongest signal

■ enables the mobile to respond more rapidly to a changing RF environment

■ reduces the number of dropped calls.

The maximum number of legs that are allowed on a call is on a per-sector basis.For every handoff attempt, the primary Radio Control Complex decides themaximum number of legs applicable to the current call. The decision is based onthe cell software release at the target cell, the feature option status, and themaximum legs translation values.

The Six-Way soft handoff applies to intra-MSC and inter-MSC soft handoffs.

2-62 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Contents



3Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® WirelessNetworks Architecture

Introduction 3-1

Mobile Switching Center (MSC) 3-2

■ Growth Beyond 222 Cell Sites 3-4■ Additional Hardware Components 3-4■ Remote Options 3-5■ MSC Key Features 3-5■ Mobile Unit 3-6■ System Capacity 3-6

Cell Sites 3-7

Data Links 3-7

Facilities (Interconnecting and Network Interface) 3-7

Management Tools 3-7

■ WatchMark Prospect™ 3-9Hardware Requirements 3-10

■ EESD for OMP-FX/ECP Software Updates 3-10

Third Generation (3G) Air Interfaces 3-11

■ Additional Features 3-11■ New Physical Channels 3-12■ Key Attributes and Advantages 3-12■ Deploying CDMA2000TM 1X in Existing Cell Types 3-13■ Flexent Mobility Server 3-13



401-610-006

Contents



3Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® WirelessNetworks Architecture

Introduction

Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks offers state-of-the art equipment,providing flexibility in serving cellular markets of various sizes and with varyinggrowth potential.

The basic system consists of the following components:

■ A Mobile Switching Center (MSC)

■ One or more cell sites

■ Data links

■ Facilities (interconnecting and network interface)

■ Management Tools

With ECP Release 17.0, the evolution of Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wirelessnetworks from Second Generation (2G) IS-95B CDMA Systems to 3G CDMAsystems (under the IS-2000 standard) essentially begins. This evolution impactsthe basic system components, with the addition of new hardware and associatedsoftware and the elimination of mature hardware and its associated software.



401-610-006


Figure 3-1 on page 3-2 illustrates an MSC with growth potential of up to 384 cells.

Figure 3-1. Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks MSC

SS7Es

SS7Es

IMS/CNIRing

ECP

5ESS DCS

ECP Complex/PCS Access Manager

Legend:ACDN = Administrative Call Processing Database NodeAP = Application ProcessorCDN = Call Processing/Database Node (type III or IIIE)CSNE = Enhanced Cell Site NodeDCI = Dual Serial Channel Computer InterfaceDCS = Digital Cellular SystemDLN = Direct Link NodeECP = Executive Cellular ProcessorEINE = Enhanced Ethernet Interface Node

DCI

OMP-FX = Operations and Management Platformfor Flexent®

PDN = Packet Data NetworkPSTN = Public Switched Telephone NetworkRPCN = Ring Peripheral Controller NodeSS7E = Enhanced Signaling System 7 NodeSTP = Signal Transfer PointWSCP = Wireless Service Control Point

OMP-FX

RPCN

DLN-60

CSNEs

* Any CDN may become the ACDN.Indicates duplicated pairs.

STP

OtherMSCsWSCP

CDNs

ACDN*

EINEs

AP ClusterComplex

MSC

Non-Flexenttype cell sites

Flexent-Typecell sites

SS7Es

PDN

PSTN

DataLinks

DCI

APCLAN

InternationalMSCs



Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® Wireless Networks Architecture

■ Executive Cellular Processor Complex (ECPC) /PCS Access Manager -The ECPC /PCS Access Manager processes calls. It also provides centralcoordination and cellular administrative control. Functions specific tocellular service are distributed among the ECPC /PCS Access Manager,the cell sites and the mobile units. See Chapter 4, “Executive CellularProcessor Complex (ECPC).

■ Application Processor Cluster Complex (APCC). The ApplicationProcessor Cluster Complex (APCC) provides additional hardware andsoftware impacts necessary to accommodate advanced cell site equipmenttechnology. See Chapter 5, “Application Processor Cluster Complex(APCC) for further details.

NOTE:Systems configured strictly for non-Flexent-type cell operation, do not require anAPCC with its associated Ethernet Interface Nodes (EINs).

■ Interprocess Message Switch/Common Network Interface (IMS/CNI) Ring -The IMS/CNI Ring provides an interface between system components. Itallows processors attached to the IMS/CNI Ring to communicate directlywith one another to increase the processing capacity of the system. SeeChapter 4, “Executive Cellular Processor Complex (ECPC).

■ 5ESS DCS - The 5ESS DCS connects the system with the Public SwitchedTelephone Network (PSTN). It switches calls over voice and data trunksbetween cell sites or between cell sites and the PSTN. The cell sitesconnect the system with mobile units via two types of radio links: voicechannels and control channels. See Chapter 6, “5ESS® Digital CellularSwitch (DCS).”

■ Operations and Management Platform for Flexent (OMP-FX). The OMP-FXprovides real-time centralized processing support and Operations,Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) interfaces. See Chapter 4,“Executive Cellular Processor Complex (ECPC).”



401-610-006

Growth Beyond 222 Cell Sites

Growth beyond the previous limit of 222 cell sites can consist of any combinationof Series II cell sites, Flexent cell sites and IS-634 cell sites.

NOTE:ECP Release 17.0 does not support Series I cell sites.

Service Providers may grow their networks beyond 222 cell sites when the mostlimiting item in their network is the number of cell sites. Most limiting items arespecified in the System Capacity Monitoring and Engineering (SCME) Guidelines,401-610-009.

As the cell site number grows, other most limiting items may prevent the networkfrom growing to the full 384-cell site capacity.

Additional Hardware Components

In addition to the major hardware components, several other elements arerequired for MSC operation. They are as follows:

■ 48 V power plant (see Chapter 11, “Power Products”)

■ Batteries (one or more battery strings) (see Chapter 11, “Power Products”)

■ Wall-mounted audible and visual alarm panel

■ Transmission equipment (customer option)

■ Distributing frame or cross-connect panels




Remote Options

The interfaces for the system include the normal interfaces between IMS/CNI, 5EDCS, Executive Cellular Processor (ECP), and cell sites, plus certain remoteoptions. One or more 5E DCSs may be located remotely from the ECP.

The following remote options communicate with the ECP via data sets:

■ Software Change Administration and Notification System (SCANS) —provides for software changes for the 5ESS

■ Enhanced Electronic Software Delivery (EESD) — provides for softwareupdates for the ECP and APC.

■ Remote recent change/verify terminal — administrative interface with theECP

■ Remote receive-only printer — provides maintenance and administrativeprintouts

■ Remote maintenance terminal — color CRT terminal providing remotemaintenance for ECP

■ Switching control center — remote control of switching functions.

■ Remote dial-up — dial-up terminal to ECP for field support monitoring ofECP and cell site equipment

■ Remote alarms — from cell sites, over cell site data links

MSC Key Features

Key architectural design features of the Mobile Switching Center are its proven5ESS DCS, associated digital processor, and IMS/CNI Ring. The basictechniques used in the MSC design are:

■ Stored Program Control — The functions performed by the MSC arespecified by programs consisting of appropriate combinations of preciselydefined instructions.

■ Functional Concentration — The MSC equipment is concentrated in asmall number of highly efficient units, each specialized in some broadsystem function such as control, input, output, etc. The result is a singleoverall MSC equipment organization.

■ Modular Design — The MSC elements are provided in modular blocks foreconomical system growth.

■ Plug-In Equipment Units — A major portion of the MSC elements areplug-in units. Faulty units can be replaced quickly and conveniently.



401-610-006

■ Fault Tolerance— All key MSC equipment units are fully duplicated toprovide continuous customer service.

■ System Reliability — The MSC is designed for minimum downtime. Theprocessor equipment cabinets are duplicated so that a cabinet failure willnot reduce processor capability. The internal and external interfaces arealso duplicated so that any single problem encountered in transferringdata, either within the processor or to the external peripheral network, willnot result in a system failure. The processor cabinets are diagnosed bymaintenance software on a regular basis. Malfunctioning cabinets detectedduring this diagnosis are automatically removed from service. In someinstances, standby cabinets are switched on-line to replace themalfunctioning cabinets. In other instances, the function normallyperformed by the failed unit is assigned to another operating unit capableof performing the same function.

■ Automatic Fault Location — The MSC automatically performs a thoroughcheck for system malfunctions. This check compares the outputs ofduplicate processors and scans the maintenance points of peripheral units.When a malfunction is detected, system tests indicate which unit is faulty,and a fault recovery program removes it from active status. Further testingdetermines exactly what caused the malfunction. These programs are runin the background of the main processor.

■ Features and Services — Stored program control allows flexibility in thefeatures and services provided by the MSC. Thus, it can offer a largevariety of features and services to meet various customer needs. Thesefeatures and services are expanded and updated on an ongoing basis.

■ Overload Protection — The processors of the MSC have many protectionsdesigned to handle overloads. The processors take preventive steps duringoverload conditions to minimize degradation of service.

Mobile Unit

A variety of mobile units are available. However, the basic functions of all unitsare the same. The mobile unit contains a microprocessor and is continuallyperforming operations and communicating with the cell sites, even when not beingused by the subscriber. The mobile unit performs these functions in order to beready to receive an incoming call or make a call.

For more information, see Chapter 12, “Mobile Units”.

System Capacity

For information about Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks system capacity,See System Capacity Monitoring and Engineering Guidelines (401-610-009).




Cell Sites

Cell sites are the specific network elements responsible for providing an airinterface between a mobile terminal, for example, cellular telephone, and theMobile Switching Center (MSC).

Cell Site equipment consists of radio control, linear amplifier, power, and antennaequipment.

For specific information pertaining to the various types of cells that are availablefor use with this system, refer to Chapter 9, “Cell Types.

Data Links

Call processing information is passed between the DCS and the ECP, the ECPand the cell sites, and from one cell site to other cell sites over dedicated datalinks via the IMS/CNI Ring.

Facilities (Interconnecting andNetwork Interface)

Cell sites communicate with mobile units by transmitting information over controlchannels and over voice channels. Voice channels transmit voice bandinformation and some control and supervision data. Control channels handle dataexchange between the cell site and the mobile unit.

Management Tools

The Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks management tools are built usingopen-system computing technology. They allow the operation and managementof the MSC to be integrated into an MIS system. As a result, Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks appears as an extension to the user’s MISnetwork. Such functions as customer care, operations, engineering, and billingcan be closely controlled to increase the level of service you can provide yoursubscribers.

The management tools, which include the OMP-FX and the WatchMarkProspect™ System, allow for contemporary multiwindow and point-and-clickinterfaces for ease of use.



401-610-006

The Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks integrated management toolsprovide a full range of capabilities including:

■ Configuration Management —The OMP-FX provides a centralized tool formanaging network topology including configuration of the ECP, DCS, cellsites, and microcells.

■ Performance Management — Customized reports provide detailedanalysis of service indicators and their trends over time, enabling a systemoperator to spot and correct performance bottlenecks. Threshold levels forperformance alarms can be set.

■ Security Management — The OMP-FX provides a flexible mechanism forcontrolling access to the maintenance interfaces. The OMP-FX is host toseveral innovative features to combat wireless fraud.

■ Fault Management — The OMP-FX provides real-time automateddetection and reporting of fault conditions. By detecting problems in real-time, the OMP-FX enhances user satisfaction and reduces operationscosts. Fault data is stored in the OMP-FX for historical analysis.

■ Account Management — The OMP-FX runs on industry standardcomputing platforms to be easily integrated with business and accountingsystems for delivery of billing and customer information.

■ Remote Access — The OMP-FX permits remote access via LAN/WANconnections.

■ Access to 5ESS switch, ECP, and Application Processors (APs) — TheOMP-FX provides cut through switch capabilities to other elements in thesystem.




WatchMark Prospect™

The WatchMark Prospect™ product provides a set of performance analysis toolsthat can be used to help fine-tune or troubleshoot existing Flexent®/AUTOPLEX®

wireless networks. Four modules, each used to investigate a different type ofperformance data, can be included in WatchMark Prospect™ as follows:

■ Traffic Analysis — used to analyze and report service measurement datacollected every hour by the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks.Reports are user-definable to meet the specific needs of each customer.

■ Configuration Management — used to provide reports describing theconfiguration of a particular Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks asdefined by the parameters stored in a database on the Executive CellularProcessor (ECP). Standardized tabular and geographic reports, as well asuser-defined tabular reports are available.

■ Maintenance Message Analysis — used to analyze and filter messagesgenerated by call processing failures. These messages can be grouped interms of subscriber number, system equipment, terminal manufacturer, andso on, to identify root causes of failed calls.

■ Special Engineering Studies — used to schedule and analyze a variety ofstudies to help engineers grow, fine-tune, or troubleshoot systems and theirperformance. The results of these studies help engineers understanddetails associated with handoffs and power levels of subscriber calls.

The WatchMark Prospect™ product is a multi-user system that is based on aclient-server architecture for flexibility. The WatchMark Prospect™ clients are PCswith an industry standard Graphical User Interface (GUI) that increasesoperational efficiency and reduces training costs.

The WatchMark Prospect™ product interfaces with the OMP-FX to accesswireless system data. As the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks evolveswith new and enhanced features, WatchMark Prospect™ enables systemoperators to access and analyze the data required to maintain the quality of theirsystems.

For information about the WatchMark Prospect™ product, either contactWatchMark Corporation directly at 425 564 8000 or at the following url:

http://www.watchmark.com

3-10 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Hardware Requirements

Table 3-1 lists hardware requirements for the Database Server for WatchMarkProspect™.

EESD for OMP-FX/ECP Software Updates

The Enhanced Electronic Software Distribution (EESD) feature enables serviceproviders to download Software Updates (SUs) for the ECP, OMP-FX and APCfrom an EESD server that is supported by Lucent Technologies CustomerTechnical Support (CTS). The software/data is downloaded directly to an OMP-FXor a central computer of the service provider and then distributed to the OMP-FX.

Table 3-1. Release 14.01 Database Server Hardware Requirements

Resource Requirement

CPU Sun® Microsystems UltraSparc or Netra t.

RAM 512Mb or more (actual amount will depend on the size of the oracledatabase and the number of concurrent users)

Disk 4Gb (for general-purpose use)Separate disk drives for oracle table space are recommended. Sizedepends on the amount of data to be stored on-line.

OtherEquipment

CD-ROM drive (for OS installation).5Gb 4mm tape drive (for WatchMark Prospect™ software and backups)or 8mm tape drive for existing customer sites without 4mm drive.

Issue 15 July 2002 3-11



Third Generation (3G) Air Interfaces

Third Generation (3G) IMT2000 Standards call for the introduction of new airinterfaces and core network interfaces, each backward compatible with existingSecond Generation (2G) IS-95B CDMA Systems. This need for compatibility isfurther supported by the desire to provide inter-operability among the different 3Gstandards and for the future vision of networks that will converge around a set ofcommon Internet Protocol (IP) based feature servers and network elements.

IS-2000 allows for a 3G system that supports the following Radio Frequency (RF)channel bandwidths:

■ 1.25MHz

■ 5MHz

■ 10MHz

■ 15MHz

■ 20MHz

In addition to increased voice capacity, the different channel sizes supportincreased data rates to satisfy the demand for higher speed data services. For itsfirst 3G implementation, Lucent has chosen to develop the 1.25MHz, one-carriersystem. This system is referred to as 3G-1X.

The 3G-1X air interface allows for additional voice capacity above 2G, in the same1.25 MHz RF bandwidth. The standard also provides the capability to supportpacket data services up to data rates of 307.2 kbps (initially, the 3G-1X productwill support rates up to 153.6 kbps).

Additional Features

The air interface provides the new 3G-1X capabilities by adding several features:

■ improved convolutional coding as well as turbo coding for higher data rates

■ coherent pilot-based demodulation of reverse link at base station

■ fast power control (800 Hz) on both forward and reverse links of reverselink at base

■ variable length Walsh codes depending on data rate

■ true QPSK spreading which makes available twice as many Walsh codesas IS-95 BPSK

■ continuous reverse link

3-12 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

New Physical Channels

The following physical channels are added to the 2G channel structure to support3G-1X:

■ From the base station to the mobile:

— Supplemental

— Quick paging

■ From the mobile to the base station:

— Reverse pilot

— Supplemental

Key Attributes and Advantages

The proposed CDMA2000TM 1X air interface provides the following key attributesand advantages:

■ Backward compatibility to IS-95A/B. A 3G-1X system will have thecapability to provide IS-95 service as well as 3G-1X service. Any channelavailable on a 3G-1X channel unit can be assigned as a 2G or 3G-1X trafficor overhead channel.

■ Co-existence with 2G service in the same RF spectrum. Service Providerscan overlay a 3G-1X system in the same spectrum as a IS-95 2G systemby adding 3G-1X channel units, while reusing the existing infrastructure.3G-1X and 2G users are orthogonal due to proper allocation of Walshcodes between both systems and the air interface capacity will be sharedbetween both systems.

■ Evolution from 2G service to next generation 3G services (3G-3X, 3G-6X,3G-9X, 3G-12X). The CDMA2000TM standard allows for migration to thenext phases of 3G functionality.

■ Future support of advanced technologies. Potential future enhancementsinclude beam forming and steering, transmit antenna diversity, enhancedaccess schemes and auxiliary pilots for individual or groups of users.

■ Increased air interface call processing capacity over 2G. Capacityestimates for 3G-1X. voice traffic are greater than that of IS-95 inErlangs/sector. The architecture has been designed to meet the highest airinterface capacity possible given the constraints of the system.

Issue 15 July 2002 3-13



Deploying CDMA2000TM 1X in Existing CellTypes

The CDMA2000TM 1X wireless system incorporates both AUTOPLEX Series IIand Flexent platform architecture. CDMA2000TM 1X upgrades the followingexisting CDMA platforms:

■ AUTOPLEX SERIES II 850 MHz (includes the Growth Frame and DoubleDensity Growth Frame)

■ AUTOPLEX SERIES IIe 850 MHz (includes Growth Frame)

■ AUTOPLEX SERIES II 850 MHz Hybrid Minicell (includes Double DensityGrowth Frame)

■ AUTOPLEX SERIES II 850 MHz Compact Minicell

■ AUTOPLEX PCS Minicell Rel. 3.5 and 4.0 (includes primary, growth, andrack-mounted cabinets)

■ Flexent CDMA Microcell (cellular and PCS)

■ Flexent CDMA Modular Cell (cellular and PCS)

■ Flexent CDMA Distributed Base Station (cellular and PCS)

Flexent Mobility Server

To meet the needs of the CDMA2000TM architecture, Lucent introduces a new APplatform, the Flexent Mobility Server (FMS), in Release 17.0. The FMS willsupport:

■ Greater system capacity that allows for significantly higher busy hour callattempts, specified in the System Capacity Monitoring and Engineering(SCME) Guidelines, 401-610-009. The capacity improvements areachieved through the FMS platform in combination with various elements.

■ Migration of ECP IMS/CNI ring functions to the FMS platform allowing foran eventual ringless architecture.

■ Up to 384 cell sites.

■ Migration of OA&M to the EMS interface.

In Release 17.0, the FMS platform will allow the Application Processor ClusterComplex (APCC) to support a maximum of six frames, five of which constituteApplication Processor Frames (APFs). See Chapter 5, “Application ProcessorCluster Complex (APCC) for additional details.

3-14 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Contents



4Executive Cellular ProcessorComplex (ECPC)

Introduction 4-1

Architecture 4-1

Benefits 4-2

Executive Cellular Processor 4-3

■ ECP Functions 4-3■ 3B21D Processor Architecture 4-5■ Processor Cabinet 4-7

Power Distribution Cabinet 4-7■ ECP Software 4-8

IMS Ring 4-9

■ RPCN 4-9■ IUN 4-9■ Ring Attached Processor (RAP) 4-10■ Call Processing/Data Base Node (CDN) 4-11■ Administrative Call Processing and Database Node (ACDN) 4-11■ Direct Link Node (DLN) 4-11■ Link Nodes (LN) 4-12■ Enhanced Cell Site Node (CSNE) 4-12■ Enhanced Signaling System 7 Node (SS7E) 4-12

ITU-T SS7 Capabilities 4-12■ EINE 4-13■ IMS Ring Node Maximums 4-13■ IMS Cabinet Layout Configuration 4-14

Growth in IMS Cabinets 4-14

OMP-FX 4-15

■ Supported Features 4-15



401-610-006

Contents■ ECP-to-OMP-FX Interface 4-17■ Hardware Description 4-18

Reusable Equipment 4-18Dual Cabinet Configuration 4-19

Equipment Cabinet Components and PowerRequirements 4-19

Miscellaneous Cabinet Components and PowerRequirements 4-21

Single Cabinet Application 4-21■ Detailed Information 4-24■ EMS 4-25

Minimum Client Terminal Platform 4-26Detailed Information 4-26



4ExecutiveCellularProcessorComplex(ECPC)

Introduction

The Executive Cellular Processor Complex (ECPC) controls system operation. Itinteracts with the following, via messages sent over data links and theInterprocess Message Switch (IMS) Ring:

■ A Digital Cellular Switch (DCS)

■ The Mobility Manager Application Processor (MM-AP)

■ Associated cell sites

Architecture

The ECPC (Figure 3-1 on page 3-2) is composed of the following major entities:

■ Executive Cellular Processor (ECP)

■ Interprocess Message Switch (IMS) Ring

■ Operations and Management Platform for Flexent® (OMP-FX)



401-610-006

Benefits

Lucent Technologies ECP Complex gives wireless networks these advantages:

■ Distributed Architecture. The architecture allows growth and evolution tooccur easier. As new features and additional traffic is added to the systemthe various system component resources can be grown as needed.

■ Increased Call Capacity. See System Capacity Monitoring and EngineeringGuidelines (401-610-009) for specifics.

■ Superior reliability. The fault-tolerant duplex computer, 3B21D processor,has full redundancy of all major functional units, helping to providecontinuous customer service. Lucent Technologies software enables yoursystem to perform at maximum efficiency.

■ Long-term savings. The 3B21D Executive Cellular Processor consumesless power than earlier models resulting in lower utility and coolingexpenses. OA&M processing speed enables technicians to work quicklyand efficiently to reduce labor costs. The system design incorporates fewercomponents, reducing floor space and simplifying maintenance.

■ Investment protection. The 3B21D processor is designed to allow for futuregrowth of subscriber and administrative demands at minimal cost.

■ Improved performance. Faster internal clocks and increased processingpower enable the 3B21D to process more computer instructions persecond, reducing the time required to perform daily routines. More memoryand use of advanced chips increase node capacity and speed.



Executive Cellular Processor Complex (ECPC)

Executive Cellular Processor

The ECP consists of a 3B21D Model 3 processor plus peripherals (Figure 4-1 onpage 4-4).

ECP Functions

Until the transition to Technician-Interface Output Process (TIOP) and DatabaseManagement applications on the Mobility Manager-Application Processor (MM-AP) is realized (see ROP Evolution on page 5-3 and Database ManagementSystem on page 5-4) the ECP controls:

■ Initialization

■ Diagnostics

■ Automatic Message Accounting (AMA)

■ Recent Change and Verify (RC/V)

■ Voice Channel Assignment (VCA)

■ Input/Output (I/O) activity

■ Audits



401-610-006

Figure 4-1. 3B21D Processor Architecture

The ECP also provides the human interface for the following:

■ Both automatic and manual system configuration management

— Initialization and recovery

— Office growth and de-growth

— Diagnostics and audits.

■ System monitoring data collector and router for:

— Plant measurements

— Service quality analysis.

■ Billing

— AMA teleprocessing

— AMA tape writing.

■ Subscriber-related and other configuration database maintenance.

DuplicatedProcessor Units

Digital Audio Tape

Terminals andPrinter

3B21D

Disk Drive

Interprocess

Message Switch

Data Links to RemoteAdministration andMaintenance Facilities

Central Control

Main Memory

Disk File Controller

Input/Output Processors




3B21D Processor Architecture

The core of a 3B21D is the control unit, a 32-bit minicomputer that includes acentral control, a main memory, direct memory access and associated Input/Output (I/O) channels. The central control, main memory, disk file, and Input/Output Processors (IOPs) are duplicated for reliability.

The 3B21D also includes devices for peripheral control. The IOP is amicroprocessor-controlled interface between the 3B21D and peripheral devices,such as CRT terminals and data sets. The IOP circuits buffer and format data to fitthe individual requirements of the peripherals. In addition, they switch theperipherals between the two control units.

The 3B21D also includes a disk file controller that may control up to eight diskdrives. The disk file system is a secondary storage system that contains a backupof all system software. Information from the disk file system is transferred to themain memory when needed by the central control.

Up to six separate cell generics can be maintained on disk by one ECP.

Maintenance on the ECP is performed at the maintenance CRT terminal, which ispart of the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® operation, administration, and maintenanceposition.

The 3B21D processor provides the following advantages:

■ Duplicated processors stacked in a single cabinet for higher reliability

■ Reduced footprint

■ Digital Audio Tape (DAT)

■ Improved memory storage

The ECP consists of the following cabinets (Figure 4-2 on page 4-6):

■ Processor Cabinet

■ Power Distribution Cabinet.



401-610-006

Figure 4-2. Typical ECP Configuration

MODULAR FUSEUNITFILTER FUSE

PANEL

OFFICEALARMUNIT

CONTROL

PROCESSOR UNIT

FUTURE GROWTH

PROCESSOR UNIT

PROCESSOR 0

BIDIRECTIONALFAN & FILTER UNIT

PROCESSOR 1

PROCESSOR UNIT

POWERDISTRIBUTION

CABINETPROCESSOR CABINET




Processor Cabinet

The processor cabinet pair is shown in Figure 4-2 on page 4-6. The processorcabinet contains two independent processors, 0 and 1. At any given time one isactive and the other is standby.

Processors 0 and 1 each contain the following units:

■ 48 V DC power filter unit

■ Central processing unit

■ Main store, I/O, and disk file controller unit

■ Main store and IOP growth unit (optional)

■ IOP basic unit

■ Cooling unit

■ Port switch (located in processor cabinet 0 only)

■ Two SCSI hard disk units

■ SCSI DAT cartridge tape drives.

The basic, plus growth, IOP units in each processor can accommodate up to 16peripheral controller cards. The two processors can support up to 32 peripheralcontroller cards. Each of these cards is capable of operating with either of the tworedundant central processing units. These cards control data links and performother peripheral functions.

Power Distribution Cabinet

The power distribution cabinet is shown in Figure 4-2 on page 4-6. This cabinetcontains power conditioning and distribution circuits as well as fuses. Theindependent power buses are used, each of which feeds half of the ECP circuits.The power distribution cabinet also contains an office alarm unit for interfacingwith a wall-mounted audible and visual alarm panel.



401-610-006

ECP Software

The Executive Cellular Processor software runs under the UNIX Real TimeReliable (RTR) operating system. The RTR operating system provides a hierarchyof virtual machines in four levels: the kernel, the kernel process, the supervisorprocess, and the user process.

The ECP performs its own local functions, coordinates actions of the other majorelements in the system, and provides the main interface to the system operator.Its functions include the following:

■ Charge Recording — The ECP collects billing information from each CDNand stores it on a mass storage media.

■ Data Collection — The ECP collects many scheduled measurements fromthe CNI ring and nodes, DCSs, cell sites, CDN, and its own software to aidin system administration and maintenance. For a more detailed view, seeSection 401-610-135.

■ System initializations and downloads

■ System integrity

■ Recent Change and Verify (RC/V)

■ System maintenance

■ Voice channel administration

■ CNI ring central control.




IMS Ring

The IMS token ring provides the interface between the various wirelesscomponents, such as the ECP, AP, DCSs, cell sites, and other networkedFlexent®/AUTOPLEX® systems. The IMS token ring is duplex and is composedof:

■ Two Ring Peripheral Controller Nodes (RPCNs)

■ IMS User Nodes (IUNs)

Figure 4-3 on page 4-10 shows the basic components of the IMS ringarchitecture. Each of these components is described in the following sections.

RPCN

Two RPCNs are used for connecting the ECP to the IMS. All messages that aresent from the ECP to any IUN or from any IUN to the ECP pass through theRPCN. The RPCNs are equipped with hardware that allows direct high-speedinterface to the 3B21D computer.

IUN

Each IMS User Node (IUN) functions as an Integrated Ring Node (IRN). An IRN isused to:

■ Read messages from the ring.

■ Put messages on the ring.

4-10 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 4-3. IMS Ring Architecture

There are two types of IUNs in the system:

■ Ring Attached Processors (RAPs)

■ Link Nodes (LNs)

Ring Attached Processor (RAP)

The Ring Attached Processor, sometimes referred to as the Ring ApplicationProcessors, includes the:

■ Call Processing/Database Node (CDN)

■ Administrative Call Processing and Database Node (ACDN)

■ Direct Link Node (DLN).

CDN IIIs

SS7Es

IMS Ring

ACDN*

EINEs

RPCN

DLN60

CSNEs

ECP AP

STPs

Cell Sites

Indicates duplicated pairs.

* Any CDN may become the ACDN.

Issue 15 July 2002 4-11



Call Processing/Data Base Node (CDN)

The CDN is responsible for the call processing functions. A copy of the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX®Application Data Base is maintained by the CDN to support the callprocessing functions.

By duplicating the application data base in all CDNs, each CDN can handle alltypes of subscriber calls and can communicate with any cell site or DCS in thesystem. This redundancy of call processing and data base functions allows thesystem to distribute the call load to all available CDNs.

The CDN-III and CDN-IIIE are equipped with 544 MB of fixed memory and anenhanced processor. They are designed to meet the needs of service providersoperating in large market segments.

Administrative Call Processing and DatabaseNode (ACDN)

The ACDN is responsible for

■ assigning calls to CDNs, so that the load is equalized between CDNs.

■ maintaining the Global Call Status List to provide mapping between thedirectory number of a mobile unit involved in a call and the CDN handlingthe call

Any CDN can become the ACDN. Therefore, if the current ACDN fails, anotherCDN becomes the ACDN.

The ACDN also performs all the call processing functions of a CDN.

Direct Link Node (DLN)

Two DLNs are required in the IMS architecture. The DLNs provide centralmessage-routing functions for all IMS messages.

The DLN-60 version of the DLN is the most currently available hardware.

One DLN is assigned as the “HOME” DLN, and the other is standby DLN. The“HOME” DLN is the one which is known by the SS7 nodes and other AUTOPLEXsystem nodes and handles all messages to and from this MSC. The standby DLNis in “hot” standby mode. Although it does not process any message traffic, it isready to take over the “HOME” DLN role when a DLN switch is needed. Loss of astandby DLN has no performance degradation on the message routing. Loss of a“HOME” DLN triggers the DLN switch.

4-12 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Link Nodes (LN)

There are three types of Link Nodes (LN). They are listed as follows:

■ Enhanced Cell Site Node (CSNE)

■ Signaling System 7 Node (SS7N)

■ Ethernet Interface Node (EIN)

Enhanced Cell Site Node (CSNE)

An Enhanced Cell Site Node switches messages from the IMS/CNI to one ormore cell site data links. In addition, it can switch messages from a cell site datalink to other cell site data links on the same CSNE or to the ring. A CSNE canconnect a maximum of eight cell site data links to the IMS, so two CSNEs locatedon opposite halves of the IMS/CNI can support eight cell sites. The Flexent™/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks can support up to 96 cell site nodes.

Enhanced Signaling System 7 Node (SS7E)

An ANSI Enhanced Signaling System 7 Node (SS7E) allows SS7 communicationthrough an external Signaling Transfer Point (STP). An ANSI SS7 type node iscapable of serving one SS7 A- or F-link at 56,000 bps.

NOTE:An enhanced Integrated Ring Node (IRN) circuit pack is necessary to support theSCCP Segmentation and Reassembly feature. The SCCP Segmentation andReassembly feature enables an application at an originating Signaling End Point(SEP) to segment SCCP Class 0 and Class 1 service SCCP message user data(that exceeds previous limits) and route these larger segments through theexisting network.

At least two SS7Es are required to use SS7 in a networked system. SS7Es arerequired to connect the 5ESS DCS to the IMS/CNI.

ITU-T SS7 Capabilities

ITU-T software for the SS7E will provide the SS7E with the capability to act as aninterface between the existing internal domestic platform and the internationalnetwork.

Two versions of ITU-T software are currently available:

■ 24-bit

■ 14-bit

Issue 15 July 2002 4-13



Each ITU-T software type equipped SS7E is capable of serving one SS7 A- or F-link at 64,000 bps.

EINE

The Ethernet Interface Node Enhanced (EINE) is an IMS user node that providesaccess through the Ethernet from the ring to the Flexent Application Processor(AP) via an Ethernet data link.

NOTE:An EINE is required for use with the FMS.

An enhanced IRN circuit pack serves as the Node Processor (NP) and providesthe Direct Memory Access (DMA) channel for transferring the call event data tothe Ethernet bus. The EIN Link Interface (ELI) supports the Ethernet access to theAP.

Associated with the ELI, the Media Access Controller for Ethernet (MACE) chiphandles the administration of the Ethernet link on the ELI.

IMS Ring Node Maximums

The IMS Ring can physically support up to 1024 nodes, but because of softwarelimitations the System supports only up to 294. The maximum number of eachtype is shown in Table 4-1.

Table 4-1. IMS/CNI Ring Node Maximums

Node Type Maximum Configuration

CDN-III/CDN-IIIE 24 (It is necessary to provide all CDN-IIIs orCDN-IIIEs to go above 12 CDNs.)

DLN-60*

* Two DLNs and two RPCNs are required in all configurations.

always 2 (1 pair)

CSNE 96 (48 pairs)

EIN/EINE 42 (21 pairs)

SS7E 128

RPCN* always 2 (1 pair)

4-14 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

IMS Cabinet Layout Configuration

Figure 4-4 on page 4-14 shows the arrangement of nodes within the initiallyprovided universal IMS/CNI cabinet. The basic cabinet and subsequent growthcabinets have a maximum capacity of 30 nodes

See the System Capacity Monitoring and Engineering (SCME) Guidelines (401-610-009) or SD2R653-01, Issue 2 for more information on IMS cabinet layoutconfiguration.

Growth in IMS Cabinets

Growth cabinet shelves must be equipped in pairs; that is, if a shelf is ordered forposition 0, and/or 1, and/or 2, then a shelf must also be ordered for position 4,and/or 5, and/or 6.

Figure 4-4. IMS Basic Cabinet Configuration

LN10

LN11

CDN12

LN13

LN05

LN06

DLN07

LN08

RPCN00

LN01

CDN02

LN03

FAN SHELF

LN10

LN11

CDN12

LN13

LN05

LN06

DLN07

LN08

RPCN00

LN01

CDN02

LN03

LN14

LN09

LN04

LN14

LN09

LN04

FUSE ALARM PANEL

Issue 15 July 2002 4-15



OMP-FX

The Operations and Management Platform for Flexent (OMP-FX) is the enhancedsuccessor to previous generations of the OMP. It is designed to help cellular andPCS service providers address operational changes in their wireless networks.

The OMP-FX is a dedicated processor that provides the operations,administration, maintenance, and provisioning (OAM&P) interface to the MSC. Itis UNIX-based and utilizes the Sun Microsystems Netra™1 hardware platform.The OMP-FX is NEBS-compliant and offers higher system reliability, increaseddata capacity and higher performance than previous generations.

Because it is more efficient than previous generations, use of the OMP-FX canresult in improved service quality, system measurements and better customerservice.

Supported Features

The OMP-FX supports the following:

■ ECP Maintenance and Administration Access

■ Virtual TTY (VTTY) Sessions

■ ECP Terminal Sessions

■ ECP Control and Display Terminal (CDT) Access

■ ECP Recent Change and Verify (RC/V)

■ ECP ROP Monitoring

■ ECP OMP-FX Clock Synchronization

■ 5ESS Switch Maintenance and Administration Access

■ Remote 5ESS Switch Maintenance and Administration Access

■ Multi 5ESS Switch Maintenance and Administration Access

■ Login Security

■ Watch for Security or Permission Problems

■ Expanded ECP ROP Control

■ Faster Data Access

■ ECP Functions Duplicated on the OMP

■ Newer Functions Developed (when possible) only for the OMP

1 Netra is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.

4-16 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

■ Flexent AP Access

■ Element Management System (EMS) Access

■ Enhanced Electronic Software Distribution (EESD)

■ Alarms Monitor Feature

■ Cooperative Innovation Software Framework

■ On-Site ECP Database Retrofit

■ ECP Performance Tools

■ Authorized Roaming Lists (ARL)

■ AMA Teleprocessing over DCI (HCAMA)

■ File Transfers Between OMP-FX and ECP

■ Hourly Service Measurement Tools

■ 5ESS Switch Traffic Data Tools

■ Service Measurements On Demand (SMOD)

■ Recent Change and Verify (RC/V) Tools

■ RC/V Security Logging

■ RC/V Forms Security

■ RFSadmin User Administration

■ Enhanced Kill Call Feature

■ Disk Mirroring

■ OMP Capacity and Performance Alarmer

For specifics concerning these features, refer to 401-662-102, Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® Wireless Networks OMP-FX Operation, Administration, andMaintenance Guide.

Issue 15 July 2002 4-17



ECP-to-OMP-FX Interface

The physical interface, Dual-Serial Channel Computer Interface (DCI) link,between the ECP and OMP-FX consists of a pair of Dual Serial Channel (DSCH)cables, with a maximum cable length of 100 feet.

With the exception of the physical ROP, Maintenance CRT and possible CDTserial connections, the DCI handles all communications between the OMP-FXand the ECP including the following:

■ Messages between the OMP-FX and Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wirelessnetworks ring nodes

■ File Transfer

■ VTTY-based RC/V, UNIX® shell, craft shell and CDT access

■ Internal communications between the OMP-FX RC/V apxrcv and theECP’s database access processes

■ Interprocess Message Communication (IPC) including servicemeasurements

4-18 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Hardware Description

The major hardware components of a typical OMP-FX system are shown inFigure 4-5 on page 4-19 and include:

■ Sun Microsystems Netra t 1120™

— 440MHz CPU, 500 MB RAM

— Two 18.2 GB Internal Disk Drives

— One Internal 32X CD-ROM drive

— One Internal 12 GB, 4mm Digital Audio Tape (DAT) drive

— One Telco alarm card

— One10/100Base-T Ethernet interface

— One 10/100Base-T Ethernet/SCSI combination card

— Two RS-232 serial interface ports

— One PCI-DCI interface card

■ Network Terminal Server (NTS)

■ 10/100BASE-T Hub for TCP/IP network

■ Tektronix™ X Terminal for the multi-window user

■ ASCII Console

■ Optional text terminals that are ANSI X3.64 compatible (PROCOMM PLUSfor DOS may be used for vt100 terminal emulation on PCs.)

■ Modems

■ Network printer

Reusable Equipment

When upgrading from a simplex OMP to an OMP-FX, transition cost andcomplexities are reduced because many of the simplex OMP peripherals can bereused, including:

■ Miscellaneous Equipment Cabinet

■ System Console (terminal and keyboard)

■ Ethernet LAN Hubs and most cabling

■ X-terminals

■ Modems

Issue 15 July 2002 4-19



.

Figure 4-5. Standard OMP-FX System Architecture

■ Splitters

■ Printers

Dual Cabinet Configuration

The initial version of the OMP-FX consisted of two cabinets:

■ Equipment Cabinet (Figure 4-6 on page 4-20)

■ Miscellaneous Cabinet (Figure 4-6 on page 4-20)

Equipment Cabinet Components and Power Requirements

The OMP-FX Equipment Cabinet consists of the equipment listed in Table 4-2 onpage 4-20.

5ESS SwitchDCS

DEFINITYSwitch DCS ECP

Netra-t 1120 Server

OMP-FX

Dial-up accessmodems

Text Terminals Graphical User Interface (GUI) Workstations

MCRT

System Console

DCI Link

ECPPhysicalROP

AP LAN 1

(X Window System Terminals, PCs)

User LAN 0

EESDmodem

RS-232splitter

RS-232splitter

hme0 hme1

CorporateWAN

throughfirewall

RS-232 splitter

TT

YB

Network Terminal Serverand Patch Panels

5ESS SwitchDCS

Datakit orAcculink ECP

Netra t 1120 Server

OMP-FX

Dial-up accessmodems

Text Terminals

MCRT

System Console

DCI Link

ECPPhysicalROP

AP LAN 1

User LAN 0

RS-232splitter

RS-232splitter

hme0 hme1

RS-232 splitter

TT

YB

Network Terminal Serverand Patch Panels

Code Switch

Watchdog

Flexent AP FrameFlexent AP Frame

4-20 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 4-6. OMP-FX Equipment Cabinet and Miscellaneous Cabinet (Front View)

The Netra t 1120 OMP-FX server has an integral 350 Watt, DC-powered supplyunit which is powered by a nominal -48 VDC, as measured from the central officepower inputs to the frame and distributed by a standard 5ESS switch ModularFilter and Fuse Unit (MFFU). The OMP-FX is also fuse protected by 15 amp fusesthat are fed from 20-amp breakers.

D

W

H

dw

h

2

3

10

9

8

7

5

6

14

11

MISCELLANEOUS CABINETOMP-FX EQUIPMENT CABINET

Table 4-2. OMP-FX Equipment Cabinet Description

ITEM DESCRIPTION

1 23-inch telco or 24-inch 5ESS switch cabinet

2 Sun Netra t 1120 CPU platform

3 5ESS DCS Modular Filter and Fusing Unit (MFFU)

Issue 15 July 2002 4-21



Miscellaneous Cabinet Components and Power Requirements

The OMP-FX Miscellaneous Cabinet consists of the equipment listed in Table 4-3on page 4-21.

The miscellaneous cabinet uses protected AC power (110 VAC) input andprovides a minimum of 10 standard 110 VAC outlets, sourced from a minimum of15 amp breaker/fuse.

Single Cabinet Application

For new installations, the single cabinet version of the OMP-FX (Figure 4-7 onpage 4-22) is available.

The Single Cabinet consists of the equipment listed in Table 4-4 on page 4-23.

The inverter (item 10) is new to the OMP-FX product line. It provides up to 1kVA of60 HZ 120 VAC power to the AC-powered units in the single OMP-FX cabinet.

The inverter can provide four external alarms, including one Minor, two Major, andone Utility AC failure alarm (if provided). The inverter also provides a two-line, 20-character LCD display, which can display ten different input/out powermeasurements.

Table 4-3. OMP-FX Miscellaneous Cabinet Description

ITEM DESCRIPTION

4 Miscellaneous cabinet

5 Network Terminal Server (NTS): (Sun Annex1, Bay NetworksAnnex3, Annex 4000 or Xyplex)

6 Patch Panels, four 18-port for all NTSs

7 System Console/keyboard

8 Monitor

9 Local Area Network (LAN) Hubs

10 Modems

11 Black Box splitters

4-22 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 4-7. OMP-FX Single Cabinet Configuration

ACCESS SERVER 720 /ETHERNET

RUNCONCARD

A B C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


RUNCONCARD

A B C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


RUNCONCARD

A B C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


RUNCONCARD

A B C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

XYPLEX

XYPLEX

6

5

4

3

2

1

2

4

7

8

9

10

11

3

1

56

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

Issue 15 July 2002 4-23



Table 4-4. OMP-FX Single Cabinet Description

Item Description

1 5ESS DCS Cabinet

2 Modular Filter Fuse Unit (MFFU)

3 Xyplex NTS

4 As many as 8 28.8-kbps Modems

5 1 optional 56-kbps Modem (can be used for R16EESD feature)

6 8 port LAN hub (rear of shelf)

7 System Console Monitor/keyboard

8 DC-powered Sun Netra t 1120 server

9 R16 - Optional Netra st D130 External Disk Array,containing 2 18.2 GB SCSI disk drives (DC-powered)

10 Black Box RS-232 serial splitters

11 -48 VDC/120 VAC 1kVA Inverter

4-24 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Detailed Information

For details about the following information, as regards to the OMP-FX, refer to401-662-102, Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® Wireless Networks OMP-FX Operation,Administration, and Maintenance Guide.

■ OMP-FX Overview

■ Using the OMP-FX (Getting Started with the OMP-FX)

■ OMP-FX Administration

■ Adding Optional Equipment to the OMP-FX

■ OMP-FX Security Guidelines

■ OMP-FX Data Link Maintenance

■ ECP Administration Through the OMP-FX

■ 5ESS Switch Administration Through the OMP-FX

■ DEFINITY® Switch DCS Administration Through OMP-FX

■ Very Compact Digital Switch (VCDX) Administration through OMP-FX

■ Application Processor Administration Through the OMP-FX

■ Adding System Elements to the OMP-FX

■ Troubleshooting the OMP-FX System

■ OMP-FX System Recovery

■ OMP-FX Cables, Connectors and Pinouts

For details concerning web browser server administration for OMP web-basedfeatures that are part of the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks, refer to theFlexent®/AUTOPLEX® Wireless Networks OMP OA&M Guide, 401-710-102.

Issue 15 July 2002 4-25



EMS

The Element Management System (EMS) serves as the primary interface(Figure 4-8 on page 4-25) for performing OA&M on Flexent network components.It is used to monitor and perform maintenance operations on ApplicationsProcessor (AP) network components and the radio control applications that run onthe APs.

The EMS GUI presents information in pages. Some pages show a graphicalrepresentation of physical hardware.

To execute the EMS process a web browser is used to access the EMS homepage.

Figure 4-8. EMS Interface

Remote access to the EMS for PC users is provided by the OMP-FX through dial-up modems.

For X-terminal users, the OMP-FX provides a menu item on the OMP-FX menusto gain access to the EMS GUI client and allows for access to an EMS commandline interface.

ECP Complex DCI

ECP

EMS

OMP-FX

AP

ETHERNET CONNECTION(SINGLE AP)

Legend:AP = Application ProcessorDCI = Dual Serial Channel Computer InterfaceECP = Executive Cellular ProcessorEMS = Element Management System (a GUI interface)OMP-FX = Operations and Management Platform for FlexentSS7 = Signaling System 7

4-26 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Minimum Client Terminal Platform

The OMP web applications run on the following minimum client terminal platformswith the following conditions:

■ Microsoft Windows NT 4.0, Pentium 200 MHz, 64 MB RAM, 20 MB clientfree hard disk space, web browser on client, 3 systems concurrentlydisplayed on client, 1 Mbit/s client-server bandwidth.

■ Sun Solaris® 2.5.1, Sun Ultra 5, 128 MB RAM, 120 MB client free hard diskspace, web browser on client, 20 systems concurrently displayed on client,1 Mbit/s client-server bandwidth.

■ Sun Solaris® 2.5.1, Sun Ultra 5, 128 MB RAM, web browser on OMP, 20systems concurrently displayed on client, 1 Mbit/s client-serverbands\width.

■ Tektronix NC421 X-terminal, 72 MB RAM, web browser on OMP, 3 systemsconcurrently displayed on client, 1 Mbit/s client-server bandwidth.


For details on how to use the EMS, refer to the Flexent® Element ManagementSystem (EMS) User’s Guide, 401-710-110.

Contents



5Mobility Manager ApplicationProcessor (MM-AP)

Introduction 5-1

■ Benefits 5-2■ Optional feature 5-2■ Location 5-2■ Hardware 5-3■ Connection 5-3■ Software 5-3■ Applications 5-3

MM-DBMS 5-4MM-ROP 5-4MM-SS7/MM-DLN 5-5MM-SP 5-5MM-HVLR 5-6MM-VCA 5-7

MM-RCS 5-7

Network Architecture 5-8

■ Executive Cellular Processor Complex (ECPC) 5-8■ 5ESS Digital Cellular Switch (DCS) 5-8■ Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster (MM-APC) 5-8■ Operations and Management Platform (OMP) 5-8■ AUTOPLEX® and Flexent® Cells 5-9■ Ethernet Interface Node Enhanced (EINE) 5-9

EINE Compared to the EIN 5-9

MM-AP Evolution 5-10

■ Flexent Mobility Server (FMS) 5-10■ Applications to Evolve 5-11

Availability 5-11



401-610-006

ContentsFor Further Information 5-11

500K BHCA Offer 5-12

■ Description 5-12■ Optional feature 5-12■ Benefits 5-12■ Hardware requirements 5-12■ Software requirements 5-12■ Availability 5-13■ For Further Information 5-13

700K BHCA Offer 5-14

■ Optional Feature 5-14■ Benefits 5-14■ Availability 5-14■ Requirements 5-14■ For Further Information 5-14

Mobility Manager Hardware 5-15

■ Installation needs 5-15■ Mobility Manager Application Processor (MM-AP) 5-15■ Mobility Manager Application Processor Frame (MM-APF) 5-15

Server types 5-16400S 5-16800S 5-16

■ Frame types 5-17■ LMT 5-18■ MM-APC 5-18■ MMAPCC 5-18■ Mobility Manager Connections to Other Network Elements 5-18

Connections to the ECP 5-19For Further Information 5-19Connections to the OMP 5-20

Mobility Manager Software Architecture 5-21

FMS Golden Image software 5-21Host Names for MM-AP 5-22

MM-AP Platform Software 5-22MM-AP Bundle 5-22Reliable Clustered Computing software package (fms_rcc) 5-22MM-AP platform software package (ngn_platform) 5-23

Issue 15 July 2002 5-iii

Contents


For further information 5-23Mobility Manager application software 5-23

Legacy Application Processor 5-24

■ APF 5-26■ MFFU 5-27■ Fan Units 5-27■ Demarcation Panel 5-27■ WatchDog/Maintenance Module 5-28■ Dual LAN Hubs 5-28■ Code Switch 5-28■ Local Maintenance Terminal 5-29

Console Access 5-29Maintenance Control 5-29

■ ECP Complex/EIN 5-29■ Radio Cluster Server (RCS) 5-29■ Software Architecture 5-30

AP Golden Image Software 5-31Flexent AP Platform Software 5-31

rcc Software Package 5-31AP Platform Software Package 5-32

Flexent Application Software 5-32■ Detailed Information 5-32■ APCC 5-33

Frame Types 5-33Growth Beyond 222 Cell Sites (Series II Cells) 5-34Growth Beyond 222 Cells (Flexent-Type Cells) 5-34

5-iv Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Contents



5Mobility Manager ApplicationProcessor (MM-AP)

Introduction

The Mobility Manager is the collection of hardware and software that providesbasic call processing functionality that was previously provided by the ExecutiveCellular Processor (ECP) and its ring nodes. The hardware portion of the MobilityManager is based on the Mobility Manager Application Processor (MM-AP).

The Mobility Manager Application Processor (MM-AP) is a second generationFlexent application processor, introduced in ECP Release 17.1, that uses a Sun™Microsystems--based platform called the Flexent Mobility Server (FMS). TheFlexent Mobility Server provides a more powerful, more reliable, and more flexibleplatform that is at the core of numerous Lucent Technologies wireless products.



401-610-006

Benefits

The Mobility Manager provides the following benefits:

■ The MM-AP is a faster platform than the ECP and ring nodes, so MobilityManager applications outperform their ECP-based counterparts.

■ In the process of migrating applications from the ECP and ring nodes to theMM-AP, enhancements have been made that improve performance orfunctionality of the applications.

For example, the Mobility Manager Database Management System (MM-DBMS) application introduces a commercial, standards-based database,which allows users to run a greater number of concurrent Recent Changeand Verify (RC/V) sessions from the Operations and Management Platform(OMP). The Mobility Manager Read-Only Printer (MM-ROP) applicationprovides increased flexibility in routing of ROP messages.

■ Future migration of applications off the ECP will lead to future capacityincreases and allow for the introduction of new capabilities.

Optional feature

The Mobility Manager is an optional feature. Customers must arrange purchase ofthe Mobility Manager with their Lucent Technologies account executive.Customers electing to install the Mobility Manager must first retrofit their ECP,OMP, and any Application Processors (APs) to ECP Release 17.0. Theninstallation of MM-APs (the hardware portion of the Mobility Manager) isperformed after the Release 17.0 generic retrofit.

Location

Currently, the Mobility Manager co-exists with the ECP and its ring nodes. Infuture releases, more and more of the functions of the ECP and its ring nodes willbe moved to the Mobility Manager.



Mobility Manager Application Processor (MM-AP)

Hardware

The Mobility Manager uses a general-purpose Sun-based commercial processorcalled the Mobility Manager Application Processor (MM-AP). To increasereliability, MM-APs are grouped into MM-AP clusters, also called MM-APCs, onMobility Manager Application Processor Frames (MM-APFs). All the hardwareneeded for the

All the hardware needed for the Mobility Manager is described in the first chapter,“System Description,” of the Flexent® Wireless Networks Mobility ManagerOverview, 401-710-200.

Connection

The Mobility Manager connects to the ECP and its Interprocess Message Switch(IMS) ring nodes through an Ethernet Interface Node Enhanced (EINE). TheMobility Manager connects to the OMP through a Dual Rail Ethernet connection.

Software

The MM-APC software architecture is a multi-layer architecture, with the upperlevels consisting of the applications, such as Mobility Manager Read-Only Printer(MM-ROP), that are under customer control.

Applications

For ECP Release 19.0, the following applications can be run on the MobilityManager:

■ MM-DBMS

■ MM-ROP

■ MM-SS7/MM-DLN

■ MM-SP

■ MM-HVLR

■ MM-VCA

■ MM-RCS*

NOTE:*MM-RCS, also called “Port RCS,” is an application on the MM that is not used inthe 500K or 700K BHCA upgrade packages. MM-RCS is listed here for the sakeof completeness.



401-610-006

MM-DBMS

The Database Management System (DBMS) provided on the MM-AP base frameservers will serve as a controlling DBMS for provisioning as well as a storagemanager for the local applications on the servers. The existing databases used inother applications, such as call processing, will continue to be available in thesame manner, form and location as previously; in other words, thisimplementation does not change the existing database architecture supporting theexisting processors in the Mobile Switching Center (MSC).

Two database systems run on the MM-AP base growth frame servers in an active-active fashion, that is, applications running on each server may access the data,which is synchronized between the server pair.

Only one of the DBMSs, called the primary, services updates at any given time.The other DBMS, called the secondary, is available to take over updateprocessing immediately, if the primary DBMS or its housed server fails. When thefailed DBMS or server recovers, the its associated DBMS on it is automaticallysynchronized to the newly appointed primary.

For further information regarding the DBMS provided on the MM-AP base growthframe servers, refer to Flexent® Mobility Manager Database Operation,Administration, and Maintenance, 401-710-203.

MM-ROP

ROP Evolution is the development of the Technician-Interface Output Process(TIOP) on the MM-AP base growth frame servers. The AP version of TIOP (AP-TIOP) will process the outputted requests from the network elements, relieving theECP of the burden of formatting and routing the resulting output messages.

A small number of output requests will continue to be processed by the ECP ROP,due to the nature of their formatting mechanism. They are:

■ CP Immediate Billing

■ AMA Long Call messages

■ AMA disk-write messages

For further information regarding ROP evolution on the MM-AP base growthframe servers, refer to Flexent® Mobility Manager Read-Only Printer Operation,Administration, and Maintenance, 401-710-202.




MM-SS7/MM-DLN

Because large markets with multiple MSC configurations require increased SS7capacity, it will eventually become necessary to migrate SS7 applications from theCNI/IMS ring to the Application Processor Cluster Complex (APCC). The first stepin the phased approach to enable the transition to increased SS7 capacity andlarger link bandwidth is to provide SS7 High Speed Links (HSL) via FMS 400Sservers on the AP platform.

In this application, up to eight FMS 400S servers will be configured in the systemas SS7-APs, each connecting one high-speed link. Each of these high speed SS7links provides 20 times the capacity of a low-speed SS7 link (56kbps). However,constraints in the system (due to STP hardware) currently only allow for half thiscapacity (10 times).

For further information regarding the limited availability application of SS7 viaHSL, contact your Lucent Account Representative. See also Flexent® MobilityManager High-Speed Links, Operation, Administration, and Maintenance, 401-710-208.

MM-SP

Status Display Pages supply character based screen drawings of various networkelements for fault management purposes. These screens are a direct result of theStatus Display Application interpreting status messages generated by networkelements.

The Status Display Application is the software that generates Status DisplayPages 2100-2184 and 2235 plus the Summary Status Area.

This feature migrates the real time sensitive portion of the Status Displayapplication (i.e., the capabilities of the SP-ECP) from the Executive CellularProcessor (ECP) to an active/standby arrangement on two ApplicationProcessors (APs).

For further information regarding the SP application, contact your Lucent AccountRepresentative. See also Flexent® Wireless Networks Mobility Manager StatusDisplay Process (MM-SP) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M),401-710-207.



401-610-006

MM-HVLR

The Home/Visitor Location Register (MM-HVLR) relocation feature relocates theHome Location Register (HLR) and Visitor Location Register (VLR) databasesfrom the Call Processing and Database Nodes (CDNs) to a set of MobilityManager Application Processors (MM-APs).

The MM-HVLR feature (relocating the HLR and VLR databases to the MM-AP)provides the following benefits:

■ provides the capability to expand the databases to support 800 thousandsubscribers

■ along with the other 700K features will support a BHCA of 700K BHCA.

Before the relocation of the HLR and VLR databases, the maximum number ofsubscribers that can be supported is fixed by the CDN hardware memory. Thissubscriber limit is currently 500 thousand (K) subscribers and the Busy Hour CallAttempts (BHCA) are 350K. 800 thousand subscribers with 700K BHCA is asubstantial increase in the number of subscribers that needs to be maintained foran integrated subscriber database and the memory capacity of a CDN is not largeenough to support this number of subscribers. In addition, the number of CDNsthat a present system supports along with the Central Processor Unit (CPU)occupancy of those CDNs is insufficient to support this call capacity. By relocatingthe HLR and VLR databases to a platform, the MM-AP, with a larger memoryspace (1 Gigabyte (GB)) and with more sophisticated memory management thesubscriber limit can be increased to 1 million subscribers.

The HLR and VLR databases, referred to as HVLR once migrated to the MM-AP,have a configuration that is comprised of 2 major areas:

■ Home/Visitor Location Register Integrity Monitor (HVLR-IM)

The software application that coordinates the initialization of HVLR-APs. It alsoverifies the HVLR sanity and reports any discrepancies through alarms andOutput Messages.

■ Home/Visitor Location Register (HVLR)

The HVLR database, which resides on the Application Processor, that contains asubscriber's profile information.

For further information regarding the HVLR application, contact your LucentAccount Representative. See also Flexent® Wireless Networks Mobility ManagerHome Location Register/Visitor Location Register (MM-HLR/VLR) Operations,Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M), 401-710-204




MM-VCA

The MM-VCA application runs on only the 800S Server pair of the MM-AP. The800S server is designed to provide the high reliability that OA&M applicationsrequire. Other Mobility Manager OA&M applications such as the Mobility ManagerDatabase Management System (MM-DBMS) and Mobility Manager Read-OnlyPrinter (MM-ROP) also run on the 800S Server. The MM-VCA application isdependent on the MM-DBMS in order to provide full processing capabilities,including call processing, OA&M activity, and audits. The MM-VCA applicationcontinues to provide call-processing services when the DBMS is not active, butOA&M activity and audits are limited.

For further information regarding the VCA application, contact your LucentAccount Representative. See also Flexent® Wireless Networks Mobility ManagerVoice Channel Administration (MM-VCA) Operations, Administration, andMaintenance (OA&M), 401-710-206.

MM-RCS

The Radio Cluster Server (RCS) application resides on the application processorand performs the call-processing and OA&M functions for Flexent cells, taking theplace of the Radio Cluster Controller (RCC) found in the Series II cell sites.

Pairs of APs host the RCS application for Flexent cells. Each AP pair can host upto 20 RCS pairs running in active/standby mode. Each active RCS can handle upto six Microcells or 1 Modular cell. (See Chapter 12, "RCS Maintenance Statesand Concepts,” in the Flexent® Wireless Networks Mobility Manager Overview,401-710-200 for definitions of RCS active and standby states.)

APs that support IS-634 base stations host the Message Management Application(MMA) rather than the RCS application. Although you cannot run both the RCSand MMA applications on the same AP pair within an application AP Frame, youcan “mix and match” RCS and MMA applications on different AP pairs within theAP Frame. This mixing and matching is not available on the MM-AP at this time.For more information about MSC support of IS-634 base stations and the MMAapplication, see the IS-634 Feature Guide, 401-710-080.

For further information regarding the VCA application, contact your LucentAccount Representative. See also Flexent® Wireless Networks Radio ClusterServer (RCS) and Mobility Manager Radio Cluster Server (MM-RCS) Operations,Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M), 401-710-102.



401-610-006

Network Architecture

The Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless network is a diverse network of processorsthat provide wireless switching services. This section shows how the MobilityManager fits into the current Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless network and brieflydefines each network element.


The Executive Cellular Processor Complex (ECPC) is a network of processorsthat provide the Mobile Switching Center (MSC) call processing function for thesystem.

5ESS Digital Cellular Switch (DCS)

The 5ESS Digital Cellular Switch (DCS) is a special configuration of the 5ESS®

Switch that provides features to support wireless subscribers. The 5ESS® DCSinterfaces with the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless network and with the PublicSwitched Telephone Network (PSTN). The 5ESS DCS provides the switchingfunction in the MSC, interconnecting mobile subscribers with land-based or othermobile subscribers.

Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster(MM-APC)

A Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster (MM-APC) is the set of all MM-APs that reside in an MM-APF.

Operations and Management Platform (OMP)

The Operations and Management Platform (OMP) is an adjunct processorconnected to the ECP via a redundant pair of high-speed data links. The OMP isnot actively involved in processing wireless calls. The OMP hosts a wide range ofOA&M applications, including the Element Management System (EMS) GUI,which displays the maintenance and alarm states for MM-APs and theirsubtending elements to support fault management.

NOTE:To view the EMS GUI pages, use your web browser on your PC or Sunworkstation.




AUTOPLEX® and Flexent® Cells

AUTOPLEX® and Flexent® cell sites provide equipment to interface wirelesssubscribers to the MSC. There are two cell site product families: AUTOPLEXSeries II and Flexent. Both cell types can be deployed in a number of physicalconfigurations to serve analog, Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA), and CodeDivision Multiple Access (CDMA) mobile subscribers.

Ethernet Interface Node Enhanced (EINE)

The Ethernet Interface Node Enhanced (EINE) provides a point-to-point Ethernetconnection between an MM-AP and the ECPC Interprocessor Message Switch/Common Network Interface (IMS/CNI) token ring. Each MM-AP has a dedicatedEINE. The EINE processes IMS/CNI messages to and from the ECPC.

EINE Compared to the EIN

The Ethernet Interface Node Enhanced is a new version of the Ethernet InterfaceNode (EIN). The EINE has twice the throughput or capacity of the EIN. TheMobility Manager requires the EINE. The first generation application processors(APs) can continue to use the EINs.

5-10 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

MM-AP Evolution

As the number of subscribers grows and as the number of attempted calls perhour grows, service providers need to improve call capacity of existing networks.In the traditional executive cellular processor (ECP) architecture (shown in Figure1-1 on page 1-5), the 3B21D computer and the Common Network Interface/Interprocessor Message Switch (CNI/IMS) ring limit the network capacity.*

Service providers need a way to increase call capacity that reduces the need todeploy additional ECP complexes as the service provider’s network grows.

The solution to this problem is to migrate the CNI/IMS ring to the Flexent MobilityServer (in stages). This migration will give the service provider higher, scalablecapacity per ECP as well as support an increased number of cells per ECP.

Flexent Mobility Server (FMS)

The Flexent Mobility Server (FMS) is a group of commercially purchasedcomputers that provide the following benefits over the traditional ECP ringconfiguration:

■ higher performance/capacity

■ smaller footprint

■ protection of investment with smooth migration

■ more common hardware within the service provider location

■ more common documentation and training

■ less spare parts inventory, because the same parts can support moreframes

Also, because the FMS computers (called “servers” in this document) arecommercial off-the-shelf products, the service provider will reap the benefits of thetechnology curve as these computers evolve.

Issue 15 July 2002 5-11



Applications to Evolve

The following applications, among others, have evolved or will evolve to the FMSduring the network evolution:

NOTE:The 3B21D computer is the computer inside the ECP that supplies the processingpower for the ECP. The CNI/IMS ring is the ring network shown as the circlearound the ECP and its attached processors.

■ ECP applications

■ CDN

■ HVLR

■ DLN/SS7 and High Speed Links

■ RCS

■ CSN

Availability

MSC evolution is only available for CDMA service providers, and only available inthe North American Region (NAR) until International High Speed Links areintroduced (in a future release).

For Further Information

The 500K BHCA and 700K BHCA upgrade packages are summarized in theremaining pages in this section. For further information, consult your LucentAccount Executive.

5-12 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

500K BHCA Offer

This section describes the 500K BHCA upgrade package.

Description

This offer consists of both hardware and software that together in the Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless network support up to 500K BHCA, an increase from theprevious 350K. This offer allows CDMA service providers to increase Busy HourCall Attempts (BHCA) in their networks by as much as 40%.

Optional feature

This upgrade package is considered an optional feature, which means that it mustbe purchased and installed separately from an ECP base release.

Benefits

The significantly higher BHCA provided by this feature means that providers donot have to add an MSC complex to handle more traffic. Revenue can beincreased without the overhead (new floor space, peripheral equipment,increased staffing) associated with a new MSC.

Hardware requirements

The 500K BHCA upgrade package consists of the following hardware:

■ FMS Base Frame with two Mobility Manager (MM)-AP 800S servers

■ 5ESS CM2 cabinet upgraded to a CM3 cabinet

Additional CDN-III hardware may also be required.*

Software requirements

The 500K BHCA upgrade package requires the following features:

■ MM-DBMS - described in the MM-DBMS OA&M (401-710-203)

■ MM-ROP - described in the MM-ROP OA&M (401-710-202)

Issue 15 July 2002 5-13



Availability

The 500K BHCA upgrade package is available in the North American andInternational regions.


For further information on this feature, contact your Lucent Account Executive.

NOTE:*CDN capacity is calculated on a per-office basis. Your Lucent Account team canhelp calculate CDN capacity. See System Capacity Monitoring and EngineeringGuidelines (SCME), 401-610-009, for detailed guidelines on choosing the numberof CDNs per call load.

5-14 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

700K BHCA Offer

The 700K BHCA offer consists of both hardware and software that together inthe Flexent/AUTOPLEX Wireless network support up to 700K BHCA, an increasefrom the previous 500K.

Optional Feature

This upgrade package is considered an optional feature, which means that it mustbe purchased and installed separately from an ECP base release.

Benefits

The significantly higher BHCA provided by this feature means that providers donot have to add an MSC complex to handle more traffic. Revenue can beincreased without the overhead (new floor space, peripheral equipment,increased staffing) associated with a new MSC.

Availability

The 700K BHCA upgrade package is available for CDMA customers in the NorthAmerican Region only.

Requirements

Detailed information about hardware requirements, software requirements, facilityrequirements and implementation planning for the 700K BHCA upgrade packageis given in Chapter 4, “Installation guidelines for 700K BHCA" of the Flexent®

Wireless Networks Mobility Manager Overview, 401-710-200.


For further information on this feature, contact your Lucent Account Executive.

Issue 15 July 2002 5-15



Mobility Manager Hardware

This section briefly describes the hardware components used in the MobilityManager. This section does not, however, discuss specific implementation needsfor MM.

Installation needs

The Mobility Manager resides on a second-generation application processor. Anapplication processor is a general-purpose commercial processor than can host awide range of applications in a Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless network. Anapplication processor provides an integrated high-availability hardware andsoftware platform that offers increased reliability, availability, and maintainabilityfor its subtending network elements.


The Mobility Manager application processor, introduced in ECP Release 17.0,uses a Sun platform called the Flexent Mobility Server (FMS). The FlexentMobility Server provides a more powerful, more reliable, and more flexibleplatform that is at the core of numerous Lucent Technologies wireless products.

The FMS-based Flexent application processor is called the Mobility ManagerApplication Processor (MM-AP). The MM-AP and its applications take overfunctions previously performed by the ECP and the ring nodes, resulting inimproved performance for both the ECP and the applications migrated to the MM-AP.

Mobility Manager Application Processor Frame(MM-APF)

A Mobility Manager Application Processor Frame (MM-APF) is the cabinet thathouses the MM-APs and several other hardware components in a Flexentwireless network. The components are rackmounted in the MM-APF. The MM-APF uses the Lucent Technologies 5ESS® Switch frame.

In the current release, the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless network supports amaximum of seven application processor frames. This can include all MM-APFsor a combination of MM-APFs and first generation Application Processor Frames(APFs). The maximum number of first-generation APFs is five.

5-16 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

! WARNING:An MM-APF is required in configurations that involve more than three APFs.To grow to more than three APFs, the daisy-chained APFs arereconfigured in a star LAN topology with the MM-APF at the center.

Server types

MM-APs are of two types:

■ 400S

■ 800S

400S

The 400S server includes 2 Compact Peripheral Control Interface (cPCI) slots, aCPU, a single SCSI boot drive, and a half-height alarm card. The 400S server isused for call-control types of applications. Slots 1 and 2 hold the boot drive andthe alarm card, slot 3 the CPU card, and slots 4 and 5, I/O cards. Slot 4 is used forthe MM-DLN (HSL) T1/E1 card and connection, with a Combo (Ethernet andSCSI) card in Slot 5. The boot drive is currently 36 GB. This is the server that willhost the IMS Node applications such as CDN, DLN, SS7 and others, as theymigrate to the MM-AP.

800S

The 800S server includes 6 cPCI slots, as well as dual boot drives and dual powersupplies, and is used for applications with high I/0 or high reliability requirements.Slot 1 holds the CPU, slot 8 a full-height alarm card, and slots 2 -7, I/O cards. Slot2 is reserved for a future I/O card. Slot 4 is used for the MM-DLN (HSL) T1/E1card and connection, with a Combo card in Slot 5. The 800S also includes a baywith a DVD drive. This is the server that hosts the MM-ROP and MM-DBMS.

Issue 15 July 2002 5-17



Figure 5-1. 400S and 800S MM-APs

Frame types

The two types of MM-AP servers define two types of MM-AP frames (MM-APFs):

■ base frame

■ growth frame

The base frame houses two 800S servers and up to four 400S servers.

The growth frame houses only 400S servers, of which it can hold up to eight.

5-18 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

LMT

Attached to the frame is an FMS Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT), a customer-supplied personal computer (PC) that provides MM-APCC system administratorsand service personnel direct console access, remote terminal access, and anRCC WatchDog Emergency Interface.

For further information see the Flexent® Mobility Server (FMS)/Flexent® WirelessRouter (FWR) Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) User Guide, 401-710-221.

MM-APC

A Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster (MM-APC) is the set of all MM-APs that reside in an MM-APF.

MMAPCC

A Mobility Manager Application Processor Cluster Complex (MMAPCC) iscomposed of multiple MM-APCs that share a dual-rail LAN with an OMP.

Mobility Manager Connections to Other NetworkElements

The Mobility Manager connects to the following other elements in a Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless network:

■ ECP complex

■ Operations and Management Platform (OMP)

The MM-APC architecture and its connections to these other Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless network elements are shown in Figure 5-2, “MM-APCconnections to other network elements” on the next page.

Issue 15 July 2002 5-19



Figure 5-2. MM-APC Connections to Other Network Elements

Connections to the ECP

Each MM-AP in an MM-APC connects to the Interprocess Message Switch (IMS)ring through an Ethernet Interface Node Enhanced (EINE).


For more information about the EINE, refer to Chapter 2, “Maintenance states andconcepts,” in the 401-710-201, Flexent® MMAPC OA&M. For more informationabout the role of the ECP in MMAPC alarm surveillance, refer to Chapter 6,“Monitoring the system,” in 401-710-201, Flexent® MM-APC OA&M.

5-20 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Connections to the OMP

The OMP provides access to the following network elements and software:

■ ECP

■ 5ESS® DCS

■ MM-APs

■ first-generation application processors

■ MM-AP packages and backups

■ Element Management System (EMS)

■ other applications

Issue 15 July 2002 5-21



Mobility Manager SoftwareArchitecture

This section briefly describes the multilayered software architecture of the MobilityManager AP. There are three layers in the architecture.

■ FMS Golden Image software (Layer 1)

■ Mobility Manager Application Processor (MM-AP) platform software (Layer2)

■ Mobility Manager application software (Layer 3)

Figure 5-3. MM-APC Software Architecture

FMS Golden Image software

The FMS Golden Image software is the software that is loaded on each MM-APthat is shipped from the factory. The Golden Image software includes the followingcomponents:

■ the Solaris 8TM operating system software

■ the operating system configuration and setup information, such as diskpartitioning and kernel parameters

■ device drivers, such as drivers for the Ethernet and serial interfaces

5-22 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Host Names for MM-AP

The FMS Golden Image software includes a small subset of MM-AP platformsoftware that is used by the factory to define the host name of the MM-AP. Thehost name of an MM-AP is also called its personality.

MM-APs that are shipped within an MM-APF are named flx01 through flx08. MM-APs that are shipped separately, outside of an MM-APF, are named flxspare. Atservice provider sites, the flxname and flxname sync commands are used torename a spare MM-AP to an apxy when the MM-AP is installed for service (thatis, during an MM-AP growth or MM-AP boot disk replacement procedure).

MM-AP Platform Software

The MM-AP platform software includes the following:

■ MM-AP bundle

■ Reliable Clustered Computing (fms_rcc) software package

■ MM-AP support (ngn_platform) software package

MM-AP Bundle

A bundle is a collection of software packages combined in a self-extracting file.Packages, each of which includes a set of related files, are installed by executingthe bundle file. This type of self-extracting installation is standard on WindowsPCs but is new to UNIX machines.

The MM-AP bundle is a collection of packages that are essential for anyapplication that runs on an MM-AP. For example, the MM-AP bundle includes

■ device drivers, such as drivers for the Ethernet and serial interfaces

■ utilities for setting up the .profile and shell environment for MMAP users

■ utilities for doing MM-AP software updates and generic retrofits

■ utility for MM-AP performance monitoring

Reliable Clustered Computing software package (fms_rcc)

The fms_rcc software package provides a high-availability software infrastructurethat works with the WatchDog to perform the following functions:

■ monitoring and controlling the reliability of applications that run on the MM-APs

■ maintaining state and resource information

■ directing fault recovery actions

Issue 15 July 2002 5-23



MM-AP platform software package (ngn_platform)

The MM-AP support software (that is, the ngn_platform software package)provides a software infrastructure that performs the following functions:

■ enabling technician commands to be processed

■ reporting status to the Element Management System (EMS)

For further information

For more information about the MM-AP platform software, refer to Chapter 5,“System Administration,” in 401-710-201, Flexent® MM-APC OA&M.

Mobility Manager application software

The following applications can reside on MM-APs:

■ MM-ROP

■ MM-DBMS

■ MM-VCA

■ MM-SP

■ MM-SS7/MM-DLN

■ MM-HVLR

■ MM-RCS

5-24 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Legacy Application Processor

The APs perform the call-processing and underlying OA&M functions for theassociated Base Station equipment in a Flexent network. (See Figure 5-4 onpage 5-25).

Pairs of APs host the Radio Cluster Server (RCS) application for FlexentMicrocells and Modular cells.

NOTE:APs that support IS-634 base stations host the Message Management Application(MMA) rather than the RCS application. Although you cannot run both the RCSand MMA applications on the same AP pair within an AP Frame, you can “mix andmatch” RCS and MMA applications on different AP pairs within an ApplicationProcessor Frame (APF).

Each AP in the cluster executes UNIX, Reliable Clustered Computing (RCC)software, Platform Virtual Machines (PVMs) and a set of application VirtualCluster Virtual Machines (VCCMs).

In the normal state, both APs of an AP pair are active and the load of the cellsconnected to that pair is shared between both APs. The primary signaling linksfrom all cells are divided between the two APs and the secondary signaling linksfrom all the cells are divided between the two APs.

Issue 15 July 2002 5-25



Figure 5-4. Simplified APC Configuration

A local “Watchdog” (rather than the ECP) monitors the integrity of all APs andinitiates AP system level recovery upon detection of a defective AP. The ECPmaintains limited control via the Ethernet Interface Node (EIN), treating the APlike any other node on the IMS/CNI ring.

5-26 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

APF

An Application Processor Frame (APF) (see Figure 5-5 on page 5-26) is thecabinet that houses the APs and several other hardware modules. Up to eightAPs can be configured in an APF.

Figure 5-5. Application Processor Frame

The current system maximum number for APFs is five and the current maximumnumber for APs is 40 or 20 pairs (assuming an MM-AP star networkconfiguration).

APFs within an APCC are numbered APF1, APF 2, APF 3 APF 4 and APF 5.

AP1 AP3 AP5 AP7

AP2 AP4 AP6 AP8

Demarcation Panelat rear of Frame

Hub A

WatchDog/MaintenanceModule

Upper Fan Unit

LMT Shelf

MFFU

Hub B

Code Switch

Lower Fan Unit

Issue 15 July 2002 5-27



MFFU

The Modular Filter/Fuse Unit (MFFU) provides fusing and power distribution (-48VDC) to the following modules in the APF:

■ APs

■ WatchDog/Maintenance Module

■ Code Switch

■ Hubs

■ Fan Units

Fan Units

The Fan Units are hardware modules that cool the components in the APF tomaintain the optimal temperature for system performance.

The APF houses two Fan Units: one in the middle shelf of the APF and another inthe bottom shelf.

The Fan Unit that resides in the middle shelf contains three fans, which cool theupper rack of equipment. The Fan Unit that resides in the bottom shelf alsocontains three fans, which cool the lower rack of equipment.

Demarcation Panel

The Demarcation Panel provides the inter-connectivity between externalFlexent™/ AUTOPLEX® wireless network elements and APF elements. Forexample, DS1 cables from the 5ESS DCS are routed (via DSX) to theDemarcation Panel and then, through internal wiring within the APF, connect toDS1 ports on the APs. The Demarcation Panel is located in the rear of the APF,below the MFFU. The demarcation panel design greatly eases installation of theproduct due to centralized connectivity.

5-28 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

WatchDog/Maintenance Module

The WatchDog/Maintenance Module is a processor that monitors, recovers, andmaintains the APs. The WatchDog/Maintenance Module performs these functionsas follows:

■ The APs in an APF exchange heartbeat and state information with theWatchDog.

■ State changes are directed from the WatchDog to the APs over an RS-232path.

In addition to monitoring APs, the WatchDog/Maintenance Module controls AP,Code Switch, and Local Area Network (LAN) Hub power. These power controlscan be accessed from the APC Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) EmergencyInterface (EI).

Dual LAN Hubs

The APC has two LAN Hubs: Hub A and Hub B. The LAN Hubs provide 10/100BaseT Ethernet connections. These Ethernet connections provide:

■ Redundant LAN connections for each AP in the APF.

■ Connectivity between the APF and the Operations and ManagementPlatform (OMP).

Each AP has a connection into Hub A and Hub B in the APF. The hubs in Frame 1are cross-connected, which allows paired APs to communicate if one of an AP’sLAN ports has failed but the other LAN port has not failed.

Code Switch

The APF Code Switch is a multiport intelligent serial port switch that provides acommunications path from AP modules to external devices such as modems, theAPC LMT, and the OMP.

By executing software commands from the APC Console Program (QmodemProapplication) of the LMT, the connection matrix within the Code Switch can bechanged to connect to a specific AP in an APF. The Code Switch secures loginaccess to an AP from the APC LMT through its password-protection capabilities.

Issue 15 July 2002 5-29



Local Maintenance Terminal

The APC Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) is a personal computer (PC) thatprovides APC system administrators and service personnel direct AP consoleaccess and maintenance controls.

Console Access

The QmodemPro application of the LMT allows users to log in directly to any ofthe console ports on an AP and execute Hewlett-Packard HP-UX operatingsystem commands and AP platform commands that may be required to performan APC OA&M procedure.

Maintenance Control

The Emergency Interface (EI) of the LMT is a graphical user interface (GUI) thatdisplays the states of the AP servers and allows users to change AP states andcontrol the power of the APs, Code Switch, and LAN Hubs in the APF.

ECP Complex/EIN

Each AP is linked to the ECP Complex/Interprocess Message Switch (IMS) ringthrough a point-to-point Ethernet connection between the AP in the APF and anEthernet Interface Node (EIN) or Enhanced Ethernet Interface Node (EINE) in thering node cabinet. The EIN/EINE processes IMS messages to and from the ECP.

Each AP has a dedicated EIN/EINE.

Radio Cluster Server (RCS)

The RCS applications (see Figure 5-6 on page 5-30) that exist on the AP provideCall Processing and OA&M functions for Flexent-specific cells.

NOTE:For IS-634 Base Stations, APs host the MMA application rather than the RCSapplication. For more information about MSC support of IS-634 base stations andthe MMA application, see the IS-634 Feature Guide (401-710-080).

The RCS is a Virtual Cluster, consisting of two Virtual Cluster Entities (the pvceand avce) that are located on different APs. Each VCE has a Resource Group(RG), and a Virtual Cluster Virtual Machine (VCVM).

5-30 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

RCS applications that run on the APs are mated across the APs in anACTIVE/STANDBY relationship. An RCS is usually in the ACTIVE state on the APthat is hosting the primary RCS instance and STANDBY on the other.

For information concerning Base Station capacities per RCS, refer to SystemCapacity Monitoring and Engineering (SCME) Guidelines, 401-610-009.

.

Figure 5-6. RCSs on the AP

Software Architecture

The APC software architecture consists of the following layers:

■ AP Golden Image software

■ Flexent AP platform software

■ Flexent application software

ECMR

RCS 1 RCS 2 RCS 8

CCM

LAPD DS1 Interface

AP 2

ECMR

RCS 1 RCS 2 RCS 8

CCM

LAPD DS1 Interface

AP 1

5ESS

Base Station Equipment

Issue 15 July 2002 5-31



AP Golden Image Software

The AP Golden Image software is the software that is loaded on each AP that isshipped from the factory. The Golden Image software includes the followingcomponents:

■ The HP-UX operating system software.

■ The AP operating system configuration and setup information, such as diskpartitioning and kernel parameters.

■ Device drivers, such as drivers for the Ethernet and DS1 interfaces.

The AP Golden Image software includes a small subset of AP platform softwarethat is used by the factory to define the host name of the AP. The host name of anAP is also called its personality.

APs that are shipped within an APF are named ap01 through ap08.

NOTE:When additional Application Processor Frames (APFs) are added to anApplication Processor Cluster Complex (APCC), the APs are renamed to reflecttheir positions in the second and third APFs. If the APs reside in the second APF,the APs are renamed from ap01 through ap08 to ap11 through ap18. If the APsreside in the third APF, the APs are renamed ap21 through ap28.

APs that are shipped separately, outside of an APF, are named apspare. Atservice provider sites, the apname script is used to rename a spare AP to a newname when the AP is installed for service (that is, during an AP growth or APreplacement procedure).

Flexent AP Platform Software

The Flexent AP platform software includes the following two packages:

■ Reliable Clustered Computing (rcc) software package

■ AP support (platform) software package

rcc Software Package

The rcc software package provides a high-availability software infrastructure thatworks with the WatchDog/Maintenance Module to perform the following functions:

■ Monitoring and controlling the reliability of applications that run on the APs

■ Maintaining state and resource information

■ Directing fault recovery actions

5-32 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

AP Platform Software Package

The AP support software (that is, the platform software package) provides asoftware infrastructure that performs the following functions:

■ Enabling technician commands to be processed

■ Reporting status to the Element Management System (EMS)

Flexent Application Software

The applications that can reside on APs include the Radio Cluster Server (RCS)application for Base Station equipment and the MMA application for IS-634 basestations.

The RCS application is the software that performs the call-processing and OA&Mfunctions for Base Station equipment.

For more information about the MMA application, see IS-634 Feature Guide, 401-710-080.


For details concerning the following information, as regards to the APCC, refer to401-710-101, Flexent® Application Processor Cluster (APC) Operations,Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M):

■ APC Architecture

■ AP Platform Maintenance States and Concepts

■ APC OA&M Overview

■ Using APC OA&M Interfaces

■ General Administration

■ Installing Software

■ Troubleshooting the APC System

■ Replacing APF Components

■ Growing/Degrowing the APC System

■ Using the APC LMT

Issue 15 July 2002 5-33



APCC

An Application Processor Cluster Complex (APCC) is composed of multipleApplication Processor Cluster (APCs) sharing a dual–rail LAN with an OMP-FX.

The APC provides a scalable platform that can be grown incrementally as servicedemands increase and as FlexentTM/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks evolve.

The APC is essentially:

■ A collection of Application Processors (APs) that employ an integrated highavailability hardware and software framework. (Also see Chapter 6,“Application Processor” for additional details.)

■ A Flexent Mobility Server (FMS)-platform (an arrangement of commercialcomputers running the UNIX® operating system) that can be configured fordifferent levels of capacity, physical storage and I/O capabilities to meet theneeds of present and future wireless applications. (Also see Chapter 7,“Flexent Mobility Server” for additional details.)

The APs are housed in the Application Processor Frame (APF) and perform thecall-processing and underlying OA&M functions for the associated Base Stationequipment in a Flexent network.

The commercial computers are housed in the FMS Frame 2105 and serve(currently) as the Mobility Manager-Application Processor (MM-AP) to allow theAPCC to support a maximum of six frames, five of which constitute APFs.

Frame Types

The two types of FMS servers and two types of access define four types of FMSframes (FMSFs):

■ 2100 frame (front access)

■ 2105 frame (rear access)

■ 2200 frame (front access)

■ 2205 frame (rear access)

The 2100/2105 frame houses two 800S servers and up to four 400S servers(minimum configuration is two 800S servers). The 2200/2205 frame houses only400S servers, of which it can hold up to eight (minimum configuration is two 400Sservers). The servers are numbered 1 through 6 (2100/2105 frame) or 1 through 8(2200/2205 frame) in vertical pairs, starting with the two left most slots of theupper and lower racks of the frame. The 2100/2105 frame also includes a diskexpansion system, which allows additional disk space to be added to the 800Sservers.

5-34 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Growth Beyond 222 Cell Sites (Series II Cells)

Growing beyond 222 cell sites requires the installation of additional EnhancedCell Site Nodes (CSNEs) for Series II cell sites. Additional cell site trunk groupsare required along with the supporting interface units in the 5ESS DCS.

When growing beyond 222 cell sites it will at some point become necessary todeploy a Flexent Mobility Server (FMS) frame. For detailed informationconcerning this growth, see System Capacity Monitoring and Engineering(SCME) Guidelines, 401-610-009.

Additionally, to achieve greater BHCA capacities, the number of Call Processing/Database Nodes (CDNs) must also be grown beyond 12 (up to 24).

Growth Beyond 222 Cells (Flexent-Type Cells)

Growing beyond 222 cell sites requires the installation of Ethernet InterfaceNodes (EINs) and Application Processors (APs) for Flexent cell sites. Additionalcell site trunk groups are required along with the supporting interface units in the5ESS DCS.

To grow beyond 222 cells the APCC needs to expand beyond three APFs. Thisrequires that the APFs (up to five) be interconnected in a star network with oneMM-AP base growth frame (FMS Frame 2105) as the center of the star. (SeeFigure 5-7 on page 5-35).

In a total Flexent cell application, with five APFs, the APCC would be able tosupport a theoretical maximum of 400 Radio Cluster Server (RCS) pairs.However, due to other limitations, the current maximum is 384.

To achieve greater BHCA capacities, the number of Call Processing/DatabaseNodes (CDNs) must also be grown beyond 12 (up to 24) and applications such asRead-Only Printer (ROP), Database (DB), SS7, and so on, must eventually bemigrated to the servers on the MM-AP base growth frame.

Issue 15 July 2002 5-35



Figure 5-7. Star Network Configuration

Hub A

Hub B

APF

Hub A

Hub B

Hub A

Hub B

APF

Hub A

Hub B

APF

Hub A

Hub B

APF

Hub A

Hub B

APF

MM-AP Base Growth Frame

5-36 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Contents



65ESS® Digital Cellular Switch(DCS)

Introduction 6-1

■ Benefits 6-1

5ESS DCS (U.S. Version) 6-3

■ Architecture 6-35ESS Digital Cellular Switch (DCS) 6-55ESS DCS VCDX 6-6

■ 5ESS DCS Hardware Components 6-6CNI Ring 6-7AM 6-8

Configuration of the Administrative Module 6-8CM 6-9

Configuration of the CM 6-9SM 6-10

CDMA Impact on the SM 6-10Efficient Spectrum Utilization 6-11

Protocol Handler for Voice 4 6-14Configuration of the SM 6-14SM Remote Options 6-15

5ESS DCS (International Version) 6-16

■ Architecture 6-16■ Hardware Components 6-17

SM2000 6-17Global Switching Module (GSM) 6-17Enhanced Variable Rate Coding 6-20



401-610-006

Contents



65ESS® Digital Cellular Switch (DCS)

Introduction

The switching function in the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks is providedby the Digital Cellular Switch (DCS). There are two versions of DCS available.Both use the 5ESS1 DCS, but one version is for use within the United States andCanada and the other, the international version, is used abroad.

This chapter presents a high-level overview of the benefits, architecture, andhardware for the 5ESS DCS - U.S. version and the 5ESS DCS- Internationalversion.

For more detailed information on the 5ESS DCS, see the 5ESS® ForAUTOPLEX® System 1000 Wireless Applications (235-200-100).

Benefits

The 5ESS DCS provides the switching fabric that manages the connectivitybetween the cell sites, ECP Complex (ECPC), Application Processor ClusterComplex (APCC), and the various networks (LEC, IEC, Private, Signaling,Wireless Intelligent Networks, and so on.)

The 5ESS DCS is globally deployed and a proven veteran in landline networks.Designed for heavy traffic, the 5ESS DCS’s high capacity, non-blocking switchingfabric is optimized for efficient call handling.

1 The 5ESS DCS was formerly known as the 5ESS® 2000 Digital Cellular Switch.



401-610-006

It offers superior reliability and every system needed for switching and control canbe fully duplicated and “hot-spared,” allowing backup components to enter serviceinstantly, if necessary.

The 5ESS Switch DCS provides the following benefits.

■ The 5ESS Switch DCS is a high capacity digital switch designed for avariety of landline and wireless switching applications.

■ It provides switching capabilities for both landline and wireless networksystems simultaneously. This allows service providers to use one switch toadminister, maintain, and update rather than two switches, and provides forreduced floor space and power requirements.

■ It has a modular architecture. It can be deployed from the smallest tolargest applications, with smooth easy growth (or even degrowth) betweendeployments of any size.This protects equipment investment by allowingcost efficient upgrades.

■ All equipment involved in switching and control is duplicated for continuousavailability and reliability.

■ It offers a variety of network interfaces.

■ There is no service interruption for software updates.

■ The 5ESS DCS offers an excellent platform for future Lucent TechnologiesIntelligent Network services.

■ The 5ESS DCS offers 700 KBHCA (700 thousand busy hour call attempts),higher call capacity at the MSC.

The 5ESS DCS Primary Control Console has a look and feel comparable to theECP interface, so Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks users becomeproficient in the 5ESS DCS with minimal training. Clear and comprehensivedocumentation further shortens the learning curve.

The 5ESS DCS automates nonessential, unattended maintenance activities suchas diagnostics and other routine functions, which are performed independentlyfrom the ECP. Periodic software uploads keep the switching fabric current with thelatest software enhancements and improvements. Robust trunk testing andmaintenance capabilities and supplementary trunk and line workstations furthersimplify diagnostics and maintenance.

Lucent Technologies family of intelligent switching products includes the 5ESSDCS platform. Separating service logic from switching functionality and Intelligentnetwork software enables service providers to develop and implement newservices—such as voice-activated dialing and single number reach—quickly andat a low cost, resulting in rapid deployment and revenue generation.




The distributed architecture of the 5ESS DCS allows graceful migration toAsynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) and SONET. Support of ATM and SONEToffer the combined benefits of greater bandwidth availability for voice and dataservices with enhanced network flexibility and reliability. This provides betterperformance and high speed over a larger service area.

5ESS DCS (U.S. Version)

The 5ESS DCS manages the connections for call processing by receiving ordersfrom the ECP Complex and provides the switching between various types ofnetwork and wireless trunks which terminate on the DCS.

The 5ESS DCS can function as both a digital cellular switch (DCS) for theFlexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks and also as a switch for traditionalapplications, such as Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN).

The 5ESS DCS works seamlessly with the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wirelessnetwork’s to provide features and functions (for example HLR/VLR, callprocessing, subscriber features, OA&M, cell interface, and so on.).

The following sections describe the architecture and hardware of the 5ESS DCS— U.S. version.

Architecture

The 5ESS DCS architecture is similar to the current Flexent®/AUTOPLEX®

wireless networks. The 5ESS DCS distributed architecture separates theswitching fabric from call processing. Figure 6-1 on page 6-4 shows the 5ESSDCS architecture.

For the 5ESS DCS, the ECPC and APCC provide wireless-specific software suchas HLR/VLR, subscriber management, paging/registration, and handoff control. AFlexent®/AUTOPLEX®/DCS control interface is used for controlling the celltrunks, inter-MSC trunks, and other necessary switch functions.

The 5ESS DCS connects to the existing Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networksvia SS7 nodes. Duplicated 56 kbps data links provide the communication pathsfrom the existing system to the 5ESS DCS.

The 5ESS DCS CNI ring, via STPs (signal transfer points) connects to the PublicSwitched Telephone Network (PSTN) and Packet Data Network (PDN). Thesehigh-speed data links are used for trunk signaling between the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks and the PSTN and PDN.



401-610-006

Figure 6-1. U.S. 5ESS DCS

The 5ESS DCS also has trunk facilities between the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX®

wireless networks and the PSTN and PDN, and trunk and data link facilitiesbetween itself and the cell sites.

The architecture of the 5ESS DCS emphasizes flexibility through the use ofdistributed processing and a modular growth plan. Coincidental with ECP Release17.0, new starts for the 5ESS DCS will be featuring a ringless 5ESS architecture,see Figure 6-2 on page 6-5.

The 5ESS DCS platform supports the following two sizes of the 5ESS DCS:

■ 5ESS DCS

■ 5ESS DCS Very Compact Digital Exchange (VCDX).

ECPC

2GPacket

CNIRing

DLN30

SS7N

SS7N

RadiusAAA

Server

SS7N

SS7N

ACDN

RPCN

SS7 Network

ECP RPCN

CSN CDNIII

ICN DLN60

EIN

ROP

SCPSHLRWIN

APCC OMP-FX WatchmarkProspect™Modular

CellMicrocell

Minicell

T1/E1Packet Pipes

PSTN

PDN

IFRPH

PHA

FRPH

PHV4w/EC

SM-2000

SII Cell

AM

CM2

PSU




Figure 6-2. U.S. 5ESS DCS (Ringless)

5ESS Digital Cellular Switch (DCS)

The 5ESS DCS (see Figure 6-3 on page 6-6) offers highly reliable switchingcapabilities because of its duplicated architecture. It accommodates both landlineand wireless networks (in global markets where this is allowed) of varying sizesbecause it is designed for modular growth.

The 5ESS DCS is composed of three modular components: AdministrativeModule (AM), Communications Module (CM), and Switching Modules (SM).

The 5ESS DCS offers 700 KBHCA (700 thousand busy house call attempts). Thisis an umbrella feature that demonstrates the higher call capacity at a system level.This feature reduces the COGS for the MSC as the number of BHCA grows. Itreduces the need to deploy additional ECP Complexes as the customer's networkgrows.

AM

RadiusAAA

Server

PSTN

PDN

APCC OMP-FX WatchmarkProspect™

ECPCSS7N

SS7N

ACDN

RPCN ECP RPCN

CSN CDNIII

ICN DLN60

EIN

ROP

SS7 Network SCPSHLRWIN

2GPacketIWF

CM3

IFRPH

PHA

FRPH

PHV5

SM-2000

PSU

SS7

SS7

HostMSC DRM



401-610-006

Figure 6-3. 5ESS DCS Components

5ESS DCS VCDX

The cost-effective VCDX configuration offers the same unvaried quality andreliability as the full-size 5ESS DCS, but is designed to meet the needs ofcustomers in small markets.

The VCDX consists of a single 5ESS DCS Switching Module (SM), controlled by asophisticated UNIX software-based workstation which provides administrativeand maintenance capabilities. See Figure 6-4 on page 6-7.

Since the 5ESS DCS VCDX shares the same common distributed architecture asthe 5ESS DCS, it can easily be evolved into a 5ESS DCS as needed.

5ESS DCS Hardware Components

The 5ESS DCS is divided into four functional parts, as follows:

■ Common Network Interface (CNI) ring cabinets

■ Administrative Module (AM)

■ Communications Module (CM)

■ Switching Module (SM).

3B21D

NCTAM CM

SMorSM-2000

AM Administrative ModuleCM Communications ModuleSM Switching Module




.

Figure 6-4. 5ESS DCS VCDX

Hardware for the 5ESS DCS is arranged in a modular configuration to simplify theaddition of new features and hardware units.

CNI Ring

The 5ESS DCS CNI ring connects the ECP Complex IMS/CNI ring to the 5ESSDCS. The CNI ring is a smaller version of the ECPC IMS/CNI ring, and consists ofone cabinet that contains the following duplicated nodes:

■ SS7 nodes — used to connect the 5ESS DCS to the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks IMS ring. For the 5ESS DCS ISUPfeature, additional SS7 nodes connect to the PSTN. This connection willenable the CNI ring to transmit trunk signaling information to the PSTNover high-speed (56 kbps) data links.

■ Data Link Nodes (DLNs) — used to process messages between the CNIand the 5ESS Switch DCS.

■ Ring Peripheral Controller Nodes (RPCNs) — connect the CNI ring to theAM.

Adjacent to the CNI ring cabinet is the DFA (digital facilities access) cabinet. It isused to house data sets that control the data links connected to the STPs.

SM orSM-2000

EIB

Ethernet

WorkstationCM/CMP, AM

AM Administrative ModuleCM Communications ModuleCMP Communications Module

ProcessorEIB Ethernet Interface BusSM Switching Module

6 ft.

23.6 in.29.9 in.



401-610-006

AM

The AM provides switch maintenance, administration, traffic measurement, andnetwork management. The AM (Figure 6-5 on page 6-8) includes a 3B21Dprocessor, which is a highly reliable, fault-tolerant, duplex computer.

Figure 6-5. 5ESS DCS Administrative Module

The AM is the unit that has overall control of all operations of the 5ESS DCS. Thiscontrol mainly concerns trunk switching under control of the Call Processing/Database Nodes (CDNs), resource allocation, data storage, backup, and input/output functions in addition to the execution of the system software.

The AM is a minicomputer to which a wide range of utility equipment can beadded. The AM consists of the following three functional units:

■ Control Unit (CU) — a 32-bit processor used for the execution of thesoftware that controls the system. Another function of the control unit is thestorage of data and software that is directly needed.

■ Disk File Controller (DFC) — an independent processor used for thecontrol of the disk units. The disk units perform the backup memoryfunction. Data and software that is not directly needed is stored on the diskunits.

■ Input/Output Processor (IOP) — an independent processor used for controlof the other utility equipment. This equipment performs input/outputfunctions as well as alarm signaling and tape storage functions.

Configuration of the Administrative Module

The AM consists of two required cabinets, as follows:

■ Processor cabinet — contains the duplexed Control Units, Disk FileControllers, and Input/Output Processors.

Input/OutputProcessor

Administrative Module

3B21D

Data Links for

Centralized

Operations and OS

Craft Interface

• Terminals

• Printers

• Tape

AdministrativeProcessor

Disk




■ Growth cabinet — contains the nine-track tape unit used to load thesoftware into the AM. It could also contain a second nine-track tape unit. Asecond Growth cabinet can be added as needed.

See the System Capacity Monitoring and Engineering Guidelines Manual, 401-610-009 for more configuration information.

CM

The CM provides the fiber optic interconnections to the Switching Modules (SMs/SM2000). In addition, the CM switches network data, voice, and controlmessages, and distributes timing and synchronization.

The CM consists of the following units:

■ Message Switch — handles distribution of messages between the AM andSMs.

■ Time Multiplexed Switch — provides the setup and connection of pathsbetween the SMs and between the message switch and the SMs.

■ Quad Link Packet Switch (QLPS) — provides the setup and connection ofpaths between SM2000s and between SM2000s and SMs.

■ Communication Module Processor (CMP) — performs call routing, networktime slot hunting, trunk hunting, global resource allocation, and a significantpart of the recent change function.

Configuration of the CM

The CM is comprised of one to six contiguous pairs of cabinets. Each pair ofcabinets supports 32 SMs (a maximum of 192 SMs can be supported). Thenumber of time slots required impacts the number of SMs needed. The standardconfiguration for Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks applications is one pairof cabinets. Both SMs and SM2000s can be connected to the same pair of CMcabinets.

The CM2, or single-fabric CM, is a smaller version of the CM that physicallysupports 96 SMs, including Remote Switching Modules (RSMs).

The CM3 provides all of the functionality of an existing CM2 and condenses theCommunications Module functions into a single-frame configuration for themaximum (twenty-three SM-2000s) office size.


6-10 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

SM

The SM provides switching functionality and voice connectivity to the PSTN andthe cell sites. The SMs perform the nonblocking trunk switching functions as wellas the circuit maintenance functions. Among the functions provided for callprocessing are tone generation, digit collection, and trunk supervision. An SM canterminate analog lines, analog trunks, and digital trunks. Within the switcharchitecture, SMs perform the time division switching functions.

The main functions of an SM are as follows:

■ To connect trunks to trunks which are under control of the ECP.

■ To perform the time division switching of time slots.

■ To perform maintenance and self-diagnostic tests, either autonomously viaerror checking circuits, or under the direction of the AM.

CDMA Impact on the SM

The 5ESS DCS’s packet switching architecture provides seamless support forCDMA. Switching modules, within the 5ESS DCS, can be augmented with CDMAvoice processors and necessary equipment to support large soft-handoffuniverses. Also support for Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD) for datacommunication is enhanced.

The following equipment is required to support the CDMA feature. See Figure 6-6on page 6-11 for a graphic representation of the required CDMA equipment.

■ Packet Switching Unit (PSU2) — handles CDMA traffic to and from theCDMA mobile unit through the cell site. The 5ESS Switching Module (SM)provides an interface to a single PSU2.

■ Protocol Handler for Voice (PHV) — used to transmit packets to andreceive packets from the CDMA mobile unit through the cell site, or up tothree cell sites, when in soft handoff. The 5ESS DCS can support either an8 kbps or 13 kbps variable rate vocoder.

■ Protocol Handler 4 (PH4) — supports the Frame Relay Protocol Handler(FRPH) function that provides the T1 interface between the packet pipeand the packet bus.

■ Protocol Handler for Asynchronous Transfer Mode (PHA) — providesAsynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) communication between switchingmodules. ATM communication between switching modules aids in thecompletion of CDMA soft handoffs.

Issue 15 July 2002 6-11



Figure 6-6. 5ESS DCS CDMA Components

Efficient Spectrum Utilization

This section briefly considers the design of the TDMA and CDMA systems asimplemented in the Series II platform to achieve efficient spectrum utilization. Thegeneralized digital communications system model in Figure 6-7 on page 6-12serves as an aid in the discussion. The figure also shows how the basic elementsof the model map to the TDMA and CDMA systems.

NOTE:For AMPS, the communications system model does not apply since AMPS is ananalog—not a digital—transmission system. In essence, the AMPS radio receivesa 64 kilobit per second (kbps) pulse-code modulation (PCM) signal from the DCS,converts the signal to analog voice, and then uses the analog voice to frequencymodulate a radio-frequency (RF) carrier.

256 ATMLINKS

ADMINISTRATIVE MODULE (AM)

(OPTIONAL)

COMMUNICATIONS MODULE (CM)

TO OTHER SMPSUs

SWITCHING MODULE (SM)

PSTN

DLTU

DLTU

TSIU DSU

100 MB BUS

SMPROCESSOR

PHV

PACKET SWITCHING UNIT (PSU2)

ATMINTERCONNECT

SERIES IICELL SITE

TSIU = TIme Slot Interchange UnitDSU = Digital Services Unit

PHV = Protocol Handler for VoicePHA = Protocol Handler for ATM

PH4 = Frame Relay Protocol Handler

PH4 PHA

PSTN = Public Switched Telephone Network

DLTU = Digital Line Trunk UnitATM = Asynchronous Transfer Mode

6-12 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 6-7. A Generalized Digital Communication System and How It Maps to theTDMA and CDMA Systems

NOTE: THE NET AND GROSS BIT RATES GIVEN HERE PERTAIN TO A SINGLE TDMA OR CDMA CONVERSATION.

TRANSMITTER SITE

INPUT DATA SOURCE

SOURCECHARACTERISTICS

CHANNELCHARACTERISTICS

SYSTEMCONTROL

CHANNELENCODINGALGORITHM

SOURCEENCODINGALGORITHM

OUTPUT DATA ESTIMATE

RECEIVER SITE

CHANNELENCODER

SOURCEENCODER

COMPRESSEDDATA

TDMA TRANSMIT64-KBPS

PCM

CDMA TRANSMIT64-KBPS

PCM

NOISE(NATURAL & MANMADE)

+INTERFERENCE

+PROPAGATION

PERTURBATIONS

SOURCEDECODER

CHANNELDECODER

CHANNEL

VOICE

TDMA MOBILE

D/A*

30-KHzCHANNEL

VOICE

CDMA MOBILE

D/A*

1.23-MHzCHANNEL

(7.95 KBPSNET)

(16.2 KBPSGROSS)

(13 KBPSNET)

(19.2 KBPSGROSS)

13-KBPS VOCODER(AT 5ESS

SWITCH DCS)

CDMA RADIO(AT CELL SITE)

(13 KBPS/SNET)

(14.4 KBPSGROSS)

COMPRESSED DATARECONSTITUTED

TDMA RADIO(AT CELL SITE)

* DIGITAL TO ANALOG

CDMA TRANSMIT64-KBPS

PCM

VOICE

CDMA MOBILE

D/A*

1.23-MHzCHANNEL

(8 KBPSNET)

(19.2 KBPSGROSS)

8-KBPS VOCODER(AT 5ESS

SWITCH DCS)

CDMA RADIO(AT CELL SITE)

(8 KBPSNET)

(9.6 KBPSGROSS)

8/13-K VOCODERRELOCATION AT5ESS OPTIONAL

(8/13 KBPSNET)

(19.2 KBPSGROSS)

(WITH VOCODER RELOCATION)

Issue 15 July 2002 6-13



Two very important elements in the design of any digital communications systemare explained below:

■ Source encoding. The purpose of source encoding is to minimize orcompress the amount of information to be transmitted over a givenchannel. A reduction in data rate to the channel encoder allows thecommunications system to introduce more powerful encoding techniquesto counter propagation and interference effects.

■ Channel encoding. The compressed data from the source encoder isapplied to a channel encoder whose function it is to encode and addredundancy to the signal, but now in a form specifically suited toovercoming the detrimental effects of the transmission channel.

Channel encoding consists of all the processes involved in conditioning theoutput of the source encoder prior to its transmission over the channel.Those processes include coding for forward error detection and correction,bit interleaving, and modulation.

At the receiver site, the process is reversed—channel decoding followed bysource decoding—to yield the original data.

For TDMA, the source encoding/decoding and channel encoding/decodingfunctions are typically performed by the TDMA radio at the Series II Cell Site.Vocoder relocation to the 5ESS is an available feature that offers reduction inequipment and facilities serving the cell sites.

In contrast, for CDMA, the functions are distributed between the DCS and theCDMA radio at the Series II Cell Site. The source encoding/decoding (voiceprocessing) is performed by a voice encoder (vocoder) at the switch.

Placing the source encoding/decoding function at the switch has severaladvantages including lower facilities cost—fewer T1 lines between the cell siteand the MSC—and vocoder bypass for mobile-to-mobile calls. Vocoder bypass(future) will allow voice data to pass unchanged through the network, therebybypassing the vocoders for mobile-to-mobile calls to improve call quality.

To support CDMA, the MSC must have a 5ESS DCS as one of its switchingelements, equipped with a packet switching unit (PSU-2) cabinet containing twotypes of plug-in boards: CDMA protocol handlers for voice (PHVs) and CDMAframe relay protocol handlers (FRPHs). The 8-kbps vocoders are located on PHV-1s, and the 13-kbps vocoders are located on PHV-2s. The enhanced 8-kbpsvocoder, available with ECP Release 11.0 (CDMA Release 6.0), is located onPHV-3s.

6-14 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Protocol Handler for Voice 4

The PHV-4 board (currently available) has more processing power than PHV-3and is strongly recommended when TDMA vocoder relocation to the 5ESS DCS.Even with echo canceling activated, PHV-4 handles up to 32 simultaneous calls.Like PHV-3 it supports downloading of vocoder algorithms using RAM-basedDigital Signal Processors. It can be software initialized with any one of thefollowing speech-handler algorithms to adapt to changes in demand by mobileusers:

■ 8K QCELP (Qualcomm Code Excited Linear Prediction)

■ 13K QCELP

■ EVRC [Enhanced Variable Rate Coding (enhanced 8Kbps voice codingalgorithm)]

The PHV-4 must be configured for one of these algorithms: mixed algorithms onthe same board are not supported. PHV-4s are installed in the PSU2 shelf of the5ESS DCSand can be mixed in the shelf will all other PHVs.

Configuration of the SM

For the U.S. wireless application, four versions of switching modules areavailable.

■ Single cabinet SM — supports a Global Digital Service Unit (GDSU) and aDigital Line Trunk Unit-Model 2 (DLTU-2). The GDSU provides 3-portconference circuits (for handoffs) and a transmission test facility. TheDLTU-2 provides DS1 termination in the SM, fully equipped, the DLTU-2can terminate 20 DS1 facilities (480 trunks).

■ Paired SM — supports two functional SMs within one cabinet. Housing twoDLTU-2s allows for terminating 40 DS1 facilities (960 trunks).

■ Dual-cabinet SM with Line Trunk Peripheral (LPT) Cabinet — contains aGDSU and a DLTU-2. The LPT may contain Line Units (LU), TrunkUnits(TU), and Module Metallic Service Units(MMSU). The LU canterminate up to 640 lines; TU can terminate up to 64 analog trunks, usingone time slot set; and the MMSU provides testing functions for the linesand trunks.

■ SM2000 — functionally identical to an SM but provides additional timeslots, processing power, and memory capacity. The switching fabric of theSM2000 is supported by a faster Switching Module Processor (SMP). TheSM2000 uses an SMP40 or SMP60 to achieve a 3600 trunk capabilityusing 70% less than the floor space required for the equivalent amount oftrunks in the classic SM.

Issue 15 July 2002 6-15



SM Remote Options

To meet growth needs, SMs can be added to an in-service office. Remotegeographical areas can also be supported. Three remote switching vehicles aresupported within the 5ESS DCS architecture:

■ Remote Switching Module (RSM)

■ Optical Remote Module (ORM)

■ Extended Switch Module 2000 (EXE-2000).

Remote Switching Modules (RSMs) can be located up to 600 miles away from theMSC within a coverage area. A remote SM coverage area can have a rural orsuburban population density. RSMs and ORMs make it possible to economicallyserve multiple small markets with a single Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wirelessnetworks Mobile Switching Center.


6-16 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

5ESS DCS (International Version)

The International 5ESS DCS may also provide the switching entity in theFlexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks for international applications. The 5ESSDCS provides the switching fabric, system tones and announcements, and alltrunk connections between the Cell Site, PSTN, and other DCSs/MSCs in awireless system.

The 5ESS DCS can also serve as a Cellular Gateway Switch (CGS) for delivery ofcalls from the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) to a wireless networkby using its Signaling Transfer Point (STP) functionality.

The 5ESS DCS supports both Advanced Mobile Phone System (AMPS) as wellas the Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) and Japan DigitalCellular (JDC), providing the flexibility to handle a full range of applications.

The 5ESS DCS supports a large variety of PSTN interfaces (R1, R2, TUP, andISUP). In addition, both T1 (24-channel) and E1 (30-channel) facilities aresupported.

The following sections describe the architecture and hardware elements for a5ESS DCS for the international market.

Architecture

The 5ESS DCS supports both Advanced Mobile Phone System (AMPS) as wellas the Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) and Japan DigitalCellular (JDC), providing the flexibility to handle a full range of applications.

The 5ESS DCS supports a large variety of PSTN interfaces (R1, R2, TUP, andISUP). In addition, both T1 (24-channel) and E1 (30-channel) facilities aresupported.

illustrates the International 5ESS DCS architecture, interconnections, and thesignaling types used to communicate. The ECP Complex (ECPC) data links(North America CCS7) terminate on the Global Switching Module (GSM) in theDCS. The GSM then routes the messages throughout the switch as appropriate.A separate GSM may be required if the International TelecommunicationUnion-Telecommunication Standardization (ITU-T) Signaling System No. 7(CCITT 7) interface is required to the PSTN.

SMs are used to terminate the cell site, PSTN, mobile-to-mobile loop-around,inter-DCS, and inter-vendor trunks. The 5ESS DCS manages the connections forcall processing and OA&M purposes as directed by messages received from theECPC. All communication with the cell sites is performed by the ECPC throughthe BX.25 nailed-up data links and is transparent to the 5ESS DCS.

Issue 15 July 2002 6-17



A 5ESS DCS can be equipped to support PCM transmission facilities that arecompatible with either 2048 kbps (30-channel) or 1544 kbps (24-channel). The5ESS DCS can be configured to switch calls between 24-channel and 30-channelPCM facilities. However, channel-types must be segregated on an SM basis. AnSM is either a 24-channel or a 30-channel SM.

Hardware Components

The domestic 5ESS DCS and International 5ESS DCS share many of the samehardware components. The following section describes the Global SwitchingModule (GSM) component of the International 5ESS DCS and lists anycomponent implementation differences for the international switch versus thedomestic switch. Refer to “5ESS DCS Hardware Components” on page 6-6 forcomponent descriptions.

SM2000

The SM2000 is required for an International 5ESS DSC to support CDMAtechnology.

Global Switching Module (GSM)

The Common Channel Signaling (CCS) protocol is implemented in a special SMcalled the Global SM. The CCS signaling links and trunks can terminate in eitherthe Global SM or other SMs. An SM that is not a Global SM but terminates CCStrunks (voice circuits) is called a Non-Global SM.

6-18 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 6-8. International 5ESS DCS

5ESSSwitch DCS

(International)

SM SM

CM

AM

OMP

ECP

CDN

PSTN

ECP Complex

X.25

X.25

SS7

2A 2A Signal Transfer PointsISUPISDN Subscriber User Part501CC 501 Common ControllerMModuleAM Administrative ModuleOMPOperations and Management PlatformCDN Call Processing/Data Base NodeOSPSOperator Services Position SystemCM Communications ModulePSTNPublic Switched Telephone NetworkCNI Common Network InterfaceR1R1 DTMF SignalingDCS Digital Cellular SwitchSMSwitching ModuleDTMF Dual Tone MultifrequencySS7Signaling System 7ECP Executive Cellular ProcessorTMSTime Multiplexed SwitchISDN Integrated Services Digital NetworkX.25Communications Protocol

GSM

PSU

PSTN Trunks(R1, R2, ISUP, 2A, OSPS)

PSTN Trunks(R1, R2)

Control/SignalingVoice Paths

CNIRING

CellSites Cell

SiteCellSite

CellSite

Issue 15 July 2002 6-19



On a 5ESS DCS that supports the CCS protocol, the conversion of in-bandsignaling trunks (such as R2 trunks) to CCS trunks does not require any hardwareupgrades for trunk termination.

The 5ESS DCS supports CCITT Signaling System No. 6 (C6), CCITT SignalingSystem No. 7 (C7), and ANSI SS7.

The Global Switching Module (GSM) has an important role in the international5ESS DCS architecture for two reasons.

■ All layers of a protocol are supported in the Global SM. The Global SM canoperate by itself (without Non-Global SMs) with reduced call processingpower.

■ All signaling links logically terminate on the Global SM, which makes theGlobal SM the “gateway” to the external CCS network.

In other words, all Message Signal Units (MSUs) formulated by the Non-GlobalSMs have to be delivered (through the internal network) to the Global SM fortransmission. All MSUs destined to the office are processed first in the Global SMbefore they are distributed to the Non-Global SMs (also through the internalnetwork) for further processing.

The GSMs use the Packet Switching Unit (PSU2) to support the C6 and C7Common Channel Signaling. The PSU2 provides a centralized, high bandwidthinterface to support packetized signaling messages as part of the implementationof CCITT7. By having the PSU2 perform all the signaling message handling in theSM, efficient signaling, maintenance, and administrative interfaces aremaintained, and the distributive processing architecture of the switch is enhanced.The nonmessage handling related functionalities that take place in the SM suchas growth, loss of signaling links (SLs), signaling route management, signalingtraffic management, and so forth, are performed by the SM processor (SMP).

The function of a PSU2 is to act as the interface between the peripheral units (forexample, the digital line trunk unit) and the SMP for signaling message handling.The PSU2 executes the part of the message transport protocol necessary to routethe signaling messages internally within the PSU2. The PSU2 can also route thesignaling messages externally to either the SMP or to another PSU2 in anotherSM. Since the PSU2 contains circuits using microprocessors to perform theprotocol processing, the SMP is relieved of that task.

For more detailed information on the 5ESS DCS, see the 5ESS® ForAUTOPLEX® System 1000 Wireless Applications (235-200-100).

6-20 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Enhanced Variable Rate Coding

The Enhanced Variable Rate Coding (EVRC) feature provides an enhanced 8Kvoice coding algorithm. Through the RC/V, the user can define the types of voicecoding algorithms supported by the ECP. The user can also specify theassignment of vocoding algorithms, analog backup option, and preferred pagingvocoding algorithm.

For mobile originations or page responses, the service provider designates theassigned service options by specifying two choices of algorithms. If the first choicealgorithm vocoder is busy, the second choice of algorithm is used. If bothalgorithm choices are busy, or if no choice is designated, the service provider canchoose to redirect the CDMA call request to analog. For a paging response, theservice provider can designate (on an ECP basis) the preferred vocodingalgorithm. This speeds up the average call set up.

Contents



7Cell Site Types

Introduction 7-1

Cell Functions 7-1

Hardware Components 7-2

Cell Product Family 7-2

Series II Cell 7-4

■ Radio Channel Frame (RCF) 7-5Radio Control Channel (RCC) 7-5Radio Channel Units (RCUs) 7-7Radio Test Unit (RTU) 7-8

■ Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) 7-9■ Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) 7-10■ Hardware Options 7-12■ Additional Information 7-13■ Alarms 7-15■ Software 7-15

Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS) 7-15Operations Subsystems 7-16Series II Cell Duplication 7-17Series II Cell Test Equipment 7-17Series II Cell Power Options 7-17

Series II TDMA 7-19

■ RCF 7-19Converting to TDMA 7-19TDM Bus 7-20DRU 7-20Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) 7-23



401-610-006

ContentsSetup Radios 7-23Beacon Channel 7-23Locate Radios 7-23

■ TDMA Hardware Options 7-24■ Additional Information 7-24

Series II CDMA 7-25

■ CDMA Channel Units (CCUs) 7-25Channel Elements (CEs) 7-26Analog Conversion Unit (ACU) 7-27Baseband Combiner and Radio (BCR) 7-27Bus Interface Unit (BIU) 7-27Synchronized Clock and Tone (SCT) Board 7-27Digital Facilities Interface (DFI) 7-27CDMA Radio Test Unit 7-28

CRTU Multiple Carrier Support for Overhead Channels 7-28CDMA Radio Test Unit Fault Isolation - Pilot

Signal Strength 7-28Reference Frequency and Timing Generator (RFTG) 7-29

Series IIe Cell Site 7-31

Series IIm and Series IImm Cell Sites 7-33

■ Product Offering 7-37■ Series IIm T1/E1 Minicell 7-38

Series IIm Primary Cabinet 7-38Series IIm Growth Cabinet 7-38

■ Series IImm T1/E1 Microcell 7-39Series IImm Primary Cabinet 7-39Series IImm Single Sector Growth Cabinet 7-39

■ Series IIm and IImm Functional Overview 7-40MSC Interface 7-40RF Distribution 7-40

Series IIm Transmit Path 7-40Series IImm Transmit Path 7-40Series IIm and Series IImm Filters 7-42Series IIm and Series IImm Receive Path 7-42

Series IIm Minicell or Series IImm Microcell withCDMA Minicell Adjunct 7-42

Series II Cellular CDMA Minicell 7-44

Issue 15 July 2002 7-iii

Contents


■ Cellular CDMA Minicell Components 7-45■ Cellular Minicell AIF Cabinet 7-47■ CDMA/PCS Minicell Rack-Mounted Growth Cabinets 7-49■ CDMA Double Density Growth Frame 7-50

PCS CDMA Minicell 7-54

■ CDMA/PCS Special Omni Minicell 7-54

850 CDMA Compact Minicell 7-55

TDMA PCS Minicell 7-56

Flexent® TDMA MultiRange Base Station 7-57

■ Hardware and Functionality 7-57■ General Characteristics 7-57

Flexent® OneBTS for TDMA networks 7-58

■ Hardware and Functionality 7-58■ General Characteristics 7-58

Microcells 7-59

■ External Structure 7-59■ External Physical Characteristics 7-59

Specifications 7-60■ Environmental Diversity 7-61■ Environmental Operating Range 7-61

Optional Cooling Fan 7-61Optional Heating Pads 7-61

■ Connection and Control 7-62■ Functions 7-63■ Antennas 7-63■ Configuration Options 7-63

Daisy-Chain Configurations 7-63Applications 7-64

■ Power Provisions 7-64AC Power 7-64DC Power 7-65Battery Backup 7-65

■ Common Ancillary Equipment 7-65Power Distribution Cabinet 7-66AC Service Panel 7-66Antenna Options 7-67Craft Access Housing 7-68

■ User Interface 7-68

7-iv Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

ContentsRMT-Based Interface 7-68ECP-Based Interface 7-69

■ CDMA Technology 7-70Functional Overview 7-70

Circuit Packs 7-70Communication Buses 7-71

Channel Elements 7-71End-to-End Communication Codes 7-71

Long Code 7-71Pilot Channel PN Code 7-72Walsh Code 7-72

Channel Types 7-73Pilot Channel 7-73Sync Channel 7-73Paging Channels 7-74Access Channel 7-74Traffic Channels 7-74

■ TDMA Technology 7-75Functional Overview 7-75

Circuit Packs 7-75Communication Buses 7-75CHI Bus 7-77Peripheral Bus 7-77External Access 7-77

CDMA Modular base station Sites 7-78

■ External Structure 7-78■ External Physical Characteristics 7-78

Specifications 7-79■ Connection and Control 7-79■ Environmental Considerations 7-81■ Functions 7-81■ Antennas 7-81■ Configuration Options 7-82■ Power Provisions 7-82

AC Power 7-82DC Power 7-82

■ Common Ancillary Equipment 7-82Antenna Options 7-83

Issue 15 July 2002 7-v

Contents


Craft Access Housing 7-83■ User Interface 7-84

RMT-Based Interface 7-84ECP-Based Interface 7-84

■ CDMA Technology 7-85Functional Overview 7-86

Circuit Packs 7-86Communication Buses 7-86

Channel Elements 7-87Encoding 7-87

Long Code 7-88Pilot Channel PN Code 7-88Walsh Code 7-88

Channels 7-88Pilot Channel 7-88Sync Channel 7-89Paging Channels 7-89Access Channel 7-89Traffic Channels 7-90

Flexent® CDMA Distributed Base Station 7-90

Series II Cell Site Antennas 7-91

■ Omnidirectional Antenna 7-91■ Directional Antenna 7-93■ GPS Antenna 7-93■ Antenna Mast 7-93■ Series II Filters 7-95■ Series II RF Transmission 7-95■ Antenna Options 7-96

Related Documents 7-97

7-vi Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Contents



7Cell Site Types

Introduction

This chapter describes the types of cells used with the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX®

wireless networks. A description of the cell functions, hardware and operationalinformation is provided in this chapter for each type of cell.

Cell Functions

The Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks cells link cellular subscribers intothe Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) and to other cellular subscribersusing radios and control equipment. In addition to performing functions needed fortrunk termination and radio communication, the cells also perform:

■ RF transmission and reception

■ Call setup, call supervision, and call termination functions

■ Signal quality monitoring from mobile units

■ Mobile unit control functions during a call (for example, handoffs,subscriber unit power output adjustment, etc.)

■ Voice-processing functions

■ Fault detection, diagnosis, and recovery

■ Routine maintenance testing

■ Equipment control and reconfiguration functions.



401-610-006

The cell provides a very reliable service through duplication of critical subsystemsand specially designed hardware. For example, the Series II cell processor isconfigured as a fully duplicated unit with one half in standby mode. The updatebus allows both memories to be kept up to date. Memory errors are corrected byspecially designed circuits.

Hardware Components

The main hardware components of a cell are as follows:

■ Antennas — receive and transmit

■ Voice radios — used for voice during calls

■ Setup radios — used to set up the calls

■ Locate radios — measure uplink signal strength for handoff processing

■ Test radios — used to test other radios

■ Voice trunks — connect voice radio to DCS

■ Cell site controller — central processor

■ Data links — connect cell to CSN for control messages

■ Power supplies — power for components and transmission.

Cell Product Family

Lucent Technologies offers a family of cell configurations/products. The LucentTechnologies cell product family includes:

■ Cell types that can provide coverage for large or small metropolitanapplications

— Series II Cell

— Series IIe Cell

■ Cell types that can provide coverage for small rural and suburbanapplications:

— Series IIm T1/E1 Minicell

— Series IImm T1/E1 Microcell

— Series II Cellular CDMA Minicell

— PCS CDMA Minicell

— 850 CDMA Compact Minicell



Cell Site Types

— TDMA PCS Minicell

— Flexent® TDMA 850MHz MultiRange Base Station

— TDMA OneBTS t850 Base Station

— IS-634 Base Stations and Cells

■ Cell types that can provide coverage for small concentrated applications:

— Flexent® CDMA Microcell

— Flexent® TDMA Microcell

— Flexent® CDMA and PCS CDMA Modular base station

— Flexent® CDMA Distributed Base Station

The Series II cell products are available for Personal Communications Services(PCS) applications to be used in the 2GHz frequency range. See TDMA PCSProduct Overview, 401-200-010 for information about TDMA PCS cell sites. SeePCS CDMA Product Overview, 401-703-000 for information about PCS CDMAcell sites.

Table 7-1 on page 7-3 shows the cell product maximum voice channels andoutput power for Series II Cell Site Configurations.

All Series II type cells support standards for FDMA (AMPS), TDMA, and CDPDstandard for digital data transmission. Additional hardware is required for CDMAsupport. For more information, see“Series II CDMA” on page 7-25.

Table 7-1. Series II Cell Site Voice Channel and Output Power Maximums

Cell Site Type Maximum VoiceChannels

MaximumOutput Power

Analog Digital

Series II 192 288 100/240W(156W usable atantenna)

Series IIe 176 258 100/240W

Series IIm T1/E1 Minicell 7 12 30W

Series IImm T1/E1 Microcell 19 21 20W (10W atantenna)

Series II Cellular CDMA Minicell N/A 40 to 75*

* This number is dependent on the mix of high and low mobility, the type of vocoder, and the percentof channels reserved for handoffs.

8W



401-610-006

Series II Cell

The Series II Cell supports:

■ Analog technology, Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) or AMPS

■ Digital technology:

— Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)

— Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)

■ Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD) wireless data.

The Series II cell is a complete system that includes radios, amplifiers, andassociated equipment for setting up and completing cellular calls. Since thenumber of voice channels needed per cell is dependent upon the cell’s trafficrequirements, the equipment is made modular. Additional units may be installed orremoved to match changing busy-hour traffic levels. This modular design ensuresthat your investment can grow as a function of the demand for service.

Operating functions of the Series II that can be remotely controlled include radiofrequency assignments, testing, output power levels, radio-to-trunk connections,Supervisory Audio Tone (SAT), and Digital Voice Color Code (DVCC). SAT, usedwith FDMA (AMPS), and DVCC, used with TDMA, both monitor the integrity of theradio connections between the cell site and the mobile unit.

As shown in Figure 7-1 on page 7-5, Series II Cell site equipment consists of (leftto right) the following frame types:

■ Radio Channel Frame (RCF)

■ Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF)

■ Antenna Interface Frame (AIF).

The cell site also includes a +24 V power plant with battery backup and Antennaequipment. The minimum battery backup provides a short period of protection forcircuits involved with cell site memory only. Minimum battery backup will preventthe need of having to reload software after a short power outage. AC power mayalso be supplied with an AC reserve system (diesel alternator).



Cell Site Types

Figure 7-1. Series II Cell Site Architecture

Radio Channel Frame (RCF)

The radio frame set consists of a primary Radio Channel Frame (RCF) and up totwo growth RCFs connected by one or two time-division multiplexed (TDM) busesand controlled by the primary RCF. The primary RCF is unique in that it containsthe cell site controller—the Radio Control Complex (RCC)—on the uppermostshelf (shelf 0) in addition to five radio shelves below (shelves 1 through 5). Eachgrowth RCF contains six radio shelves. See Figure 7-2 on page 7-6.

Radio Control Channel (RCC)

The RCC consists of two identical controllers (redundant controllers). Normally,one controller is active (on-line) and one is standby (off-line). Each processorcontains memory, Network Control Interfaces (NCIs) to control the TDM buses, aCommunications Processor Interface (CPI), an alarm interface, and a system buswhich connects all circuit packs. An update bus interconnects the two processorswithin the RCC. The RCC provides intelligent control of the cell site equipmentand performs call processing in conjunction with the ECP Complex. See Figure 7-3 on page 7-7.

RF

RADIO FRAME SET

RFRF

DS1INPUTS

DATALINKSANDVOICETRUNKS

RADIOCHANNELFRAME 0

(OPTIONAL)

LINEARAMPLIFIERFRAME 0

RADIOCHANNELFRAME 1

RADIOCHANNELFRAME 2

LINEARAMPLIFIERFRAME 1

(INCLUDESRADIOCONTROLCOMPLEX)

(OPTIONAL) (OPTIONAL)

ANTENNAINTERFACEFRAME 0

ANTENNAINTERFACEFRAME 1

(OPTIONAL)

RX0

RX1

TX

PRIMARY GROWTH GROWTH

(RCF0) (RCF1) (RCF2) (LAF0) (LAF1) (AIF0) (AIF1)

(HIGH-POWERANTENNAS)



401-610-006

Figure 7-2. Radio Frame Set (RFS) Configuration

The RCC also provides the interface to pass cell site alarms to the MSC. Thesealarms include hardware alarms/power alarms, fire and intrusion alarms, andenvironmental alarms. Alarms are monitored by the alarm interface circuitslocated in the RCC shelf of the primary RCF. They include the following:

■ 12 internal frame alarms

■ 18 user-assigned alarms

■ 12 frame alarms from each growth frame

■ 6 circuit alarms from the AIF

■ Status alarms from each LAC in the LAFs.

The user-assigned and AIF alarms are connected to the primary RCF by oneconnector. The status of the alarms originating in the LACs is scanned periodicallyand alarm data is transmitted to the primary RCF by a dedicated connector.

RCC0 RCC1SHELF 0

SHELF 1

FANS

SHELF 3

SHELF 4

SHELF 5

SHELF 2

PRIMARY—RCF0 GROWTH—RCF1 GROWTH—RCF2

RADIO TEST SHELF

RADIO SHELF

RADIO SHELF

RADIO SHELF

RADIO SHELF

RADIO SHELF

RADIO SHELF

RADIO SHELF

RADIO SHELF

RADIO SHELF

RADIO SHELF

RADIO SHELF

RADIO SHELF

RADIO SHELF

RADIO SHELF

RADIO SHELF

RADIO SHELF



Cell Site Types

Radio Channel Units (RCUs)

The primary RCF may contain a combination of setup, locate, and voice channelradios. Setup and locate radios are simply FDMA radios (RCUs) configured toperform setup and locate channel functions. (The RCC can configure an RCU toperform one of three functions: setup—to establish calls with mobile units,locate—to assist with handoffs when the established call can be better served byan adjacent sector or cell, or voice—to carry the over-the-air conversations.)

Figure 7-3. Radio Control Complex (RCC) Architecture

LINEAR AMPLIFIER

TDM BUS 0

MTSOTO

RADIO CONTROL COMPLEX (RCC)SYSTEM BUS

CIRCUITAND TONE

CLOCK

INTERFACEFACILITYDIGITAL

PROCESSORDUPLEX

AIFLAFRCF

RX

TODS-1

2

TX

12 RCU

12 RCU

12 RCU

1 RTU8 RCU

RCC

PANELINTERCONNECTION

TX1RX

0RX

TRANSMIT FILTER

RECEIVE FILTERRECEIVE FILTER

CALIBRATIONTEST

REF FREQPOWER/ALARM

INTERFACEALARM

INTERFACEPROCESSOR

COMM

INTERFACECONTROLNETWORK

MEMORY

MTSO

12 RCU



401-610-006

Setup and locate radios are restricted to shelf 1 and/or shelf 2 of the primary RCF,whereas voice radios may be installed in any of the five radio shelves of theprimary RCF or any of the six radio shelves of a growth RCF. Normally, at startup,two setup radios (one active and one standby) and two locate radios (both active)are used.

Twenty-one channels, referred to as setup or control channels, are set aside toaccomplish the setup function. That is, 21 channels in each of the cellularfrequency spectrums (block A and block B) are not used as voice channels.

Setup radios perform the receive and transmit functions required to set up anFDMA or TDMA call, but not a CDMA call. CDMA uses its own control channels toset up a CDMA call. (See “Series II TDMA” on page 7-18 and “Series II CDMA” onpage 7-25 for more information.)

NOTE:If a cell site has the TDMA digital control channel (DCCH) feature, the DCCH—notthe setup radio—is used to set up TDMA calls. See the “Series II TDMA” onpage 7-18.

Locate radios, which receive but do not transmit, assist only in the handoff of anFDMA call. As explanation, a handoff decision for an FDMA call is based on cellsite measurements of signal strengths received from the mobile unit. In contrast,the handoff decision for a TDMA or CDMA call is based on mobile measurementsof signal strengths received from radios at neighboring sites. This latter type ofhandoff is referred to as mobile-assisted handoff.

Any combination of FDMA radios (RCUs) and TDMA radios (DRUs) can reside inthe primary RCF or in a growth RCF. RCUs can sit side-by-side with DRUs on thesame shelf. The DRU occupies two adjoining RCU slots in the shelf, and providesa 3-to-1 voice channel capacity advantage over the RCU.

The Series II Cell Site houses up to 200 RCUs (includes setup, locate, and voice)or 96 DRUs. A cell site configured solely with DRUs provides 288 digital channels.

Radio Test Unit (RTU)

There are two test radios, the radio test unit (RTU) and TDMA radio test unit(TRTU), that can be used respectively to test the RF paths associated with FDMAand TDMA equipment. When installed, these test radios reside in shelf 3 of theprimary RCF. (See “Setup Radios” on page 7-23 for more information on theTRTU.)

The primary RCF also contains the Radio Test Unit (RTU). The RTU has theability to test all RCUs, all RCU RF switches, transmit and receive antennas, anditself.



Cell Site Types

Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF)

There are one or two linear amplifier frames (LAFs) at a cell site. An LAF containsup to four linear amplifier circuits (LACs), two on the front of the LAF and two onthe back. There is a maximum of seven LACs per cell site. The output of eachLAC is delivered through the antenna interface frame to a single transmit antenna.(See Figure 7-4 on page 7-9.)

Figure 7-4. Linear Amplifier Frame Input/Output Connections

The LAC is responsible for the low-power combining and linear amplification ofmultiple transmitting RF channels (carriers). For FDMA or TDMA transmission, RFchannel spacing as close as three channels can be assigned to the same LAC.The LAC amplifies all RF channels simultaneously, thus eliminating the need forseparate amplifiers for each RF channel.

The LAC can accept RF input in any combination of FDMA, TDMA, and CDMAformats. For example, the LAC may receive a mixture of FDMA and TDMA signalsfrom the primary RCF, a mixture of FDMA and TDMA signals from the first growthRCF, and CDMA-only signals from the second growth RCF.

The LAC has either 10 or 20 pie-shaped linear amplifier modules (LAMs)operating in parallel. The number of linear amplifier modules in the LACdetermines only its maximum RF output power, not the number of combined RFchannels.

LAC=

RCF2RCF1RCF0

AIF0

RCF2RCF1RCF0

RCF2RCF1RCF0

RCF2RCF1RCF0

RCC

AIF0

AIF0

AIF0

PRIMARY—LAF0

ALARMS

AIF1

RCF2RCF1RCF0

RCF2RCF1RCF0

RCF2RCF1RCF0

AIF1

AIF1

GROWTH—LAF1

ALARMS

LAC 0 OUT

LAC 2 OUT

LAC 1 OUT

LAC 3 OUT

LAC 6 OUT

LAC 5 OUT

LAC 4 OUT

LAM=

LOW-POWERRF INPUT

HIGH-POWERRF OUTPUT

LOW-POWERRF INPUT

HIGH-POWERRF OUTPUT

LEGEND:

7-10 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

When only 10 modules are installed, the total average RF output power is 100watts (measured at the LAC output). When all 20 modules are installed, the totalaverage RF output power is increased to 240 watts. (See Table 7-2 onpage 7-10.)

Antenna Interface Frame (AIF)

There are one or two antenna interface frames (AIFs) at a cell site. One AIFsupports up to four faces or sectors. Two AIFs working together canaccommodate up to seven antenna faces, permitting implementation of omni,3-sector, 6-sector, or other special antenna configurations. Except for the multiple-LAC feature described below, each antenna face or sector is served by oneantenna set, which consists of one transmit antenna and two receive antennas(diversity). (See Figure 7-5 on page 7-11.)

The multiple-LAC feature allows more than one LAC and transmit antenna to beassociated with a sector. Seven LACs are the maximum number permitted. Thisfeature enables omni-, three-sector, and six-sector cells to support an increasednumber of voice radios for greater capacity and/or increased power per radio forgreater coverage.

Both the primary and growth AIFs have the interface and signal filtering circuitryrequired to complete the following RF paths:

■ RF transmit paths from the LACs to the transmit antennas

■ RF receive paths from the receive antennas to the diversity 0 anddiversity 1 receiver sections (identical receivers) of the RCF radios.

The signal filtering is accomplished through transmit and receive filter panels. Upto four transmit filter panels and eight receive filter panels (diversity) can beinstalled in the AIF. The transmit filter panel provides bandpass filtering of the RFsignals transmitted from the cell site. It consists of a transmit bandpass filter and adual-port directional coupler.

Table 7-2. LAC Average RF Output Power Per RF Channel Input

Number ofRF Channels (Carriers)

Average Power*Per RF Channel (Carrier)

12 20.00 Watts

24 10.00 Watts

48 5.00 Watts

100 2.40 Watts

* Assumes that the total average RF output power is 240 watts (20 LAMs installed).

Issue 15 July 2002 7-11


Cell Site Types

Figure 7-5. Antenna Interface Frame Input/Output Connections

The receive filter panel provides the bandpass filtering of the RF received signalsfrom the mobile unit. It consists of a dual-port directional coupler, a single-portdirectional coupler, a receive bandpass filter, and a low-noise amplifier.

The primary AIF contains test equipment required for radio diagnostics: thereceiver calibration generator and the radio switch panel. The receiver calibrationgenerator is used to inject a known signal level into the RF receive paths for thepurpose of path-loss calibration. Access to the RF receive paths is establishedthrough the single-port directional couplers of the receive filter panels.

The radio switch panel provides the switching required to set up transmit orreceive test paths for the test signals generated by the RTU or TRTU resident inthe primary RCF. Access to the RF paths is established through the radio switchpanel and the dual-port directional couplers of the transmit and receive filterpanels.

The primary AIF also contains the reference frequency generator, which suppliesa highly accurate 15 MHz reference frequency to all of the RCF radios. The radiosderive their operating RF channel (carrier) frequencies from this source.

REF FREQ GEN

RCVR CAL GEN

RADIO SWITCH PANEL

RCFLAC 3RCF

RCFLAC 2RCF

RCFLAC 1RCF

RCFLAC 0RCF

RCC

PRIMARY—AIF0

ALARMS

GROWTH—AIF1

RTU/

RCF

TRTU

15 MHz

RX 0 RX 1TX

RX 0 RX 1TX

RX 0 RX 1TX

RX 0 RX 1TX

RCFLAC 6RCF

RCFLAC 5RCF

RCFLAC 4RCF

RX 0 RX 1TX

RX 0 RX 1TX

RX 0 RX 1TX

FIFALARMS

7-12 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

The reference frequency generator contains redundant referencegenerators—either two rubidium oscillators or a rubidium oscillator and adisciplined crystal oscillator. For the rubidium-crystal oscillator combination, therubidium oscillator is the primary source, and the crystal oscillator is thesecondary source.

NOTE:Both reference generators, the low-noise amplifiers of the receive filter panels,and the receiver calibration generator are monitored for fault indications by theRCC. In addition, the user-defined alarms are passed along on the alarm bus tothe RCC.

For CDMA, the reference frequency generator must be upgraded to provide the15-MHz reference frequency and CDMA synchronization signals. The upgradedversion, referred to as the reference frequency and timing generator, makes useof an internal Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver to synchronize CDMAtransmission and reception. (The GPS is a United States Department of Defensesponsored global satellite system used to provide accurate time and positionlocation.) The redundant reference generators, themselves, are disciplined byGPS timing.

The GPS antenna, which is approximately 1foot high, can be placed anywherenear the cell site that is appropriate for the best reception of the required numberof GPS satellites. The GPS antenna is usually mounted on the outside of abuilding, not on a tower.

Hardware Options

The basic Series II cell site configuration consists of one RCF (up to 56 radiochannels), one LAF, one AIF, transmit/receive antennas, and a +24 volt powerplant. There are many possible options and combinations of cell site hardwareand new hardware/software options are being developed to enhance yourFlexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks To determine which hardware/softwareoptions are currently available please contact your Lucent Technologies AccountExecutive.

Available options include:

■ Redundancy option. This option allows backup protection for certain keyunits in the cell site. In case of failure in the on-line unit, the redundant unitis automatically switched on-line and allows the cell site functions tocontinue uninterrupted.

Issue 15 July 2002 7-13


Cell Site Types

■ Full power plant backup. This option provides backup power for all cell sitefunctions for a minimum of 1 hour. Longer periods of battery holdover maybe possible depending on channel occupancy, equipment used, and thenumber of battery strings used.

! CAUTION:It would be advisable, in most cellular systems, for at least a few cell sitesto be equipped with backup power. This would provide at least someservice during a major power failure.

■ Directional transmission. This option provides an economical means of cellsplitting by effectively dividing a single cell into three or six separatesectors.

■ Antenna pressurization. This option provides air dielectric antenna cablesand pressurization equipment. Dry air is supplied to cables and antennasto avoid the collection of moisture, which degrades antenna performanceand increases the need for maintenance. The alternative to this option is touse foam-dielectric cable. However, with the foam-dielectric cable,moisture may collect inside the antennas, and periodic maintenance mayhave to be scheduled.

■ Data transmission interface cabinets. This option provides DTI cabinetscontaining up to two Acculink® Access Controllers and up to four channelservice units. This option is used for direct digital (DS1) interface with a T1carrier.

■ Modular base station sites. This option provides prefabricated andpreintegrated cell sites in transportable buildings. See Figure 7-6 onpage 7-14.

Additional Information

See Series II Cell Site Description, Operation, and Maintenance, 401-660-102 fora detailed description of Series II cell sites.

Also see “Series II Cellular CDMA Minicell” on page 7-44 for information onalarms, software, equipment duplication, test equipment and power options.

7-14 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 7-6. Transportable Cell Site Building

Issue 15 July 2002 7-15


Cell Site Types

Alarms

In a fully equipped cell site, the alarm function brings various power plant andradio equipment alarms to the attention of the Radio Control Complex and reportsother critical conditions. Typical alarm conditions may include:

■ Tower light failure

■ Lightning arrester failure

■ Low or high humidity

■ Low or high temperature

■ Intrusion alarm

■ Fire alarm

■ Fire alarm fault

■ AC power failure

■ Air-conditioner blower or compressor failure

■ Power plant alarm — major or minor

■ Inverter output fault

■ Coaxial cable air fault

■ Antenna system alarms.

Additionally,12 user alarms may be added to the system. These alarms are usedfor customer applications, bringing the total number of user alarms for customerapplications to 30.

Software

Cell site software controls the cell site hardware. This software consists of aspecial operating system and seven operations subsystems.

Operating System for Distributed Switching(OSDS)

Cell site software is controlled by the OSDS. It schedules system programs forexecution, provides timing, and communicates among operations programs withincell sites. The OSDS provides the cell site controller with memory management,interprogram communication, and program organization that maximizes cell siteefficiency.

7-16 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Operations Subsystems

Seven operations subsystems operate and maintain a cell site:

1. Call Processing

2. Maintenance

3. Integrity

4. Peripheral Control

5. Diagnostics

6. Data Base

7. Message Communication.

The call processing software performs four functions: call sequencing, locating,overhead word administration, and data collection. Call sequencing is performedby the Call Control Process (CCP). Each voice radio has one CCP. Most locationmeasurements and signal strength tests are done by CCP. When other cell sitesare involved in the call, a message is sent to them by OSDS, and the cell sitesreturn the requested information directly. An overhead word message is sent onthe forward setup channel periodically to help subscriber units process calls. Datacollected is passed on to the MSC for billing purposes.

There are three segments of the maintenance subsystem: error analysis,functional tests, and the maintenance request administrator. Error analysis andfunctional tests combine to analyze and diagnose hardware faults. Themaintenance request administrator uses redundant circuits to rebuild a workingsystem.

The cell site integrity subsystem is divided into overload control, integrity monitor,audits, and initialization. Overload control ensures that low-priority software is runoccasionally, even during high-traffic conditions. The integrity monitor ensuresthat the operating program executes normally. Any time the cell site software hasan apparent flaw, the initialization section of the integrity subsystem analyzes theproblem and corrects it. Cell site audits detect invalid hardware and softwareconditions and correct them.

The peripheral control subsystem controls communication with the cell site’speripheral units. It is responsible for:

■ Low-level signal processing

■ Input/output request service

■ Message routing

■ Peripheral unit ordering.

The diagnostic subsystem analyzes cell site hardware, including:

Issue 15 July 2002 7-17


Cell Site Types

■ Setup radios

■ Voice radios

■ Locating radios

■ Common radio equipment

■ Reference frequency generator.

There are three types of data in a cell site data base subsystem: equipmentconfiguration data, adjacent cell site data, and maintenance guides. Theequipment configuration data lists the types and amount of hardware at the cellsite. The adjacent cell site data includes the information used to operate thehandoff procedure. The maintenance guide data gives the thresholds for variousmaintenance actions.

The message communication subsystem controls communication between thecell site and the cell site data link.

Special secure programs must be used to update the data bases. The mastercopy of the data bases is held at the MSC. When it is modified, the appropriatecell site data base is also modified.

Series II Cell Duplication

The Series II cell has the following functional units duplicated:

■ Cell site data link

■ RCC

■ Setup RCU

■ Locate RCU

■ Reference frequency generator.

Series II Cell Test Equipment

The following test equipment is standard on Series II cell sites:

■ RTU

■ Receiver calibration generator

■ TRTU (for Series II TDMA only)

■ RCB (for Series II TDMA only).

Series II Cell Power Options

Power options for +24 V include:

7-18 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

■ Minimum battery backup (5 minutes of memory protection only)

■ Full battery backup (for 1 hour or more of protection for cell site functions)

■ Three-phase or single-phase rectifiers

■ AC reserve (diesel alternator) power backup.

Issue 15 July 2002 7-19


Cell Site Types

Series II TDMA

TDMA Series II cell site architecture consists of the same types of equipmentframes found in a basic Series II cell site (see “Series II Cell” on page 7-4 for moreinformation on these frames):

■ Radio Channel Frame (RCF)



RCF

The primary RCF contains the Radio Control Complex (RCC) and the shelves forindividual TDMA radios. The RCC controls the operation of the cell siteequipment. The LAF provides RF signal combining and amplification equipment,while the AIF houses the cell site’s reference frequency generator, receivercalibration generator, and the RF filter networks that transport the RF signal toand from the antennas.

An RFS consists of one, two, or three RCFs, all controlled by one RCC. There willbe one or two LAFs and one or two AIFs per cell site. Note that each of the threeRCFs may contain DRUs.

The Digital Radio Unit (DRU) is the radio unit used with Series II TDMA. One DRUoccupies two analog RCU slots and provides three voice channels. A DRU cansupport a Digital Control Channel (DCCH) and two voice channels. The DCCH isused for transmitting control information and short data messages between theMSC and mobile units and provides a cellular service access platform that offersincreased functionality and can support enhanced capabilities. A total of 99 DRUs(including voice and locate DRUs) can be used in a full configuration Series II cellsite (three RCFs).

Converting to TDMA

Implementation of TDMA can be accomplished within the existing analoghardware frames. DRUs can reside next to the analog 30-kHz RCUs in the SeriesII cell site RCFs or can replace the existing RCUs. DRUs share RCF shelves,LACs, antenna interfacing equipment in the AIFs, and voice facilities with RCUs.The DRUs are controlled by the same RCC and can be supported on the sameECP.

Additionally, one TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU) and one RTU CommunicationBoard (RCB) are required for each digitally equipped cell site, and an RTU switchneeds to be installed in order to equip a TRTU. This switch does the switching ofRF test signals between the RTU and TRTU.

7-20 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

TDM Bus

Up to two 8-bit TDM buses (TDM bus-0 and TDM bus-1) connect the radioshelves in the primary and growth RCFs. Release 5.0 Series II cell sites canaccommodate a maximum of 99 DRUs (including voice and locate), with up to 52DRUs on TDM bus-0 and 48 DRUs on TDM bus-1. In summary, TDM bus-0serves up to 9 radio shelves (5 radio shelves in the primary RCF and 4 upperradio shelves in the first growth RCF). TDM bus-1 services up to 8 radio shelves(2 bottom radio shelves in the first growth frame and the 6 radio shelves in thesecond growth frame).

The TDM buses provide the paths for control and data transfer within the RFS.The RFS can accommodate up to 99 DRUs (including voice and locate), 1 RTU, 1T-RTU, 14 DS-1 boards, CAT boards, and the number of RF switch modules,transmit combiners, receive dividers, and power supply boards required for theRF configuration used. All external interfaces (that is, voice trunks from the DCSand cell data links from the IMS ring) to the Series II cell site are connected to theTDM buses via integrated DSX-1 interfaces. Data links from the MSC areconnected to TDM bus-0. Both TDMA and FDMA technologies use the same TDMbus structure. The TDM bus is capable of handling any allowable combination ofdigital and analog radios plugged side by side in the RCFs. See Figure 7-7 onpage 7-21.

DRU

Series II TDMA consists of Digital Radio Units (DRUs) to achieve a threefoldincrease in available voice channels, thus allowing more signals within a singleRF channel. The DRUs can also support DCCHs.

The DRU (as shown in Figure 7-8 on page 7-22) is composed of two modules: theSignal Processing Module which contains three circuit boards and the TransceiverCircuit Module (TCM) which contains one circuit board. The DRU plugs into thesame connector as that of an RCU though it is twice as wide. The Series IImodular architecture lets you “mix and match” digital and analog units. Each radiochannel shelf contains 12 available slots, allowing you to configure a shelf in radiocombinations varying from 6 DRUs (2 slots/DRU) to 12 RCUs (1 slot/RCU).

Issue 15 July 2002 7-21


Cell Site Types

Figure 7-7. Digital and Analog Radio TDM Bus Interfaces

NOTE:Radio shelves that are configured in combinations of up to 3 DRUs and 6RCUs can be accommodated by the 415AA DC/DC power supply.Combinations of 4 DRUs and 4 RCUs, 5 DRUs and 2 RCUs, and 6 DRUsrequire a 415 AC DC/DC power unit.

The Radio Test Unit (RTU) shelf contains eight available slots, which allows thecombination from 4 DRUs to 8 RCUs in that shelf. The combination can beexpressed as follows:

For radio channel shelf: (2 x Number of DRUs) + (Number of RCUs) = 12 slots

For RTU shelf: (2 x Number of DRUs) + (Number of RCUs) = 8 slots

RF INPUT/OUTPUT DIGITALRADIOUNIT

RADIOCHANNEL

UNIT

TDMBUS

DUPLEXTIME SLOT 1(2 TDM TIME SLOTS)

TWO-WAY VOICE CHANNEL

(256 TOTALTIME SLOTS)

RF INPUT/OUTPUT




DUPLEXTIME SLOT 2

DUPLEXTIME SLOT 3

DUPLEXTIME SLOT 4

7-22 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 7-8. Series II TDMA Digital Radio Unit (DRU)

The DRU’s dimensions are nominally 8 inches high by 3 inches wide by 14 inchesdeep. Each DRU provides a 3-to-1 capacity advantage. The DRU is housed in theRCF and provides the software needed to support TDMA. The faceplate providesa channel display and LED status indicators. The unit is entirely digital and selfcontained, so there is no other equipment necessary to support call processing.

An important feature that increases system flexibility and protects investment inTDMA is the ability to download the DRU’s software/firmware from the MSC orother remote location. This feature can be used to accommodate future revisionsin the IS-54 standard and reduce potential service-affecting impact.

Issue 15 July 2002 7-23


Cell Site Types

Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU)

The Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) is a single-slot digital radio, providing allthe functionality of the existing DRU plus the ability to support additionalcapabilities and features. The EDRU enables service providers to take advantageof the new and increasingly sophisticated features being created for TDMA,features which improve call quality and open the door to new types of revenue-generating services.

The EDRU is IS-136 compatible and supports DCCH and upbanding for PCS.

The EDRU is half the size of the current DRU, and it consists of fewercomponents that occupy a single slot in a traditional Series II radio shelf. TheEDRU contains a Signal Processing Module (SPM) that consists of only a singlePrinted Wiring Board to interface with the Transceiver Circuit Module (TCM). TheEDRU plugs into one slot in a traditional Series II radio frame or two slots in aSeries IIm or IImm, saving shelf space over the current DRU and lowering the costof parts and labor.

Setup Radios

Radio Channel Units (RCUs) are used for the setup function. Omnidirectionalsetup remains an option to the service provider. However if omnidirectional setupis implemented in a cell site with directional voice sectors, then beacon channelsshould be provided to ensure that the mobile-assisted handoff capability ispossible for dual-mode TDMA mobile units.

Beacon Channel

The beacon channel is a voice radio (analog or digital). A beacon channel isprovided by a designated voice radio which transmits its carrier at a constantpower level. Each antenna sector must be allocated a beacon channel. Beaconchannels are provided at the request of the service provider and are required onlywhen the cell site has directional voice with omni setup, or when the cell site isequipped entirely with analog RCUs and the neighboring cell site is equipped withdigital channels.

Locate Radios

The locate radios are normally analog. However, the service provider has theoption of providing digital locate radios. When the digital locate feature is active,mobile-assisted handoff is still the mandatory means for handing off TDMA calls.The digital locate radio serves as a backup.

7-24 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

TDMA Hardware Options

Due to the many configurations and applications of TDMA, there are individuallimits for the maximum number of each type of radio unit. The configurations areconstrained by whichever limit is first met.

The new hardware options are being developed to enhance your Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks. Please contact your Lucent TechnologiesAccount Executive to determine the available current hardware options.

Additional Information

See “Series II Cellular CDMA Minicell” on page 7-44 for information on alarms,software, equipment duplication, test equipment and power options.

See Series II Cell Site Description, Operation, and Maintenance, 401-660-102 formore information on TDMA cell sites.

Issue 15 July 2002 7-25


Cell Site Types

Series II CDMA

The Series II cell site is the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks module thatprovides the basic interface between the Mobile Switching Center (MSC) and anend user’s mobile unit. For a Series II cell site to support CDMA, additionalhardware is required.

Any component failure that can bring down more than half of the CDMA capacityhas optional standby hardware to replace it. This redundancy ensures that even ifthere is a critical component failure, calls can still be processed.

Also used to support CDMA is the CDMA Minicell. This product is based on thesame cell products. See “Series II Cellular CDMA Minicell” on page 7-44 for moreinformation.

CDMA Channel Units (CCUs)

The CDMA Channel Unit (CCU) is the circuit board that contains ChannelElements (CEs). In the initial releases of CDMA, a CCU is configured with twoCEs. The CCU can support either an 8 kbps vocoder or a 13 kbps vocoder.

Figure 7-9. Basic Configuration of a CDMA Series II Cell Site Radio Shelf

Groups of CCUs are logically connected to form a cluster, which is controlled by asingle CCC. In the CDMA G-RCF, up to seven CCU’s can be placed with each ofthe two CCCs on a shelf (see Figure 7-9 on page 7-25). In a minicell, each shelfcontains a single CCC with four CCUs.

Po

BCR

BIU

ACUw

er

Po

BCR

ACU

BIU

SCTorDFU

wer

CCU

CCU

CCU

CCU

CCU

CCU

CCU

CCC

CCC

CCU

CCU

CCU

CCU

CCU

CCU

CCU

2 CCCs

7 CCUs7 CCUs

7-26 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

NOTE:While the CCU is capable of supporting both types of vocoders (8 kbps and 13kbps), the 5ESS DCS, where the vocoder resides, can support either the 8 kbpsor 13 kbps vocoder, but not both.

Channel Elements (CEs)

A Channel Element (CE) contains the necessary circuitry to perform forward link(cell site to mobile) and reverse link (mobile to cell site) CDMA spread-spectrumprocessing. The Series II cell site is capable of supporting up to a maximum of768 CDMA channel elements. Based on current spectral limitations, the maximumusable channel elements is approximately 288.

Each CE can be assigned to perform one or more of the following functions:

■ Pilot channel — identifies the cell a mobile is talking to and identifies cellsfor handoffs.

■ Sync channel — provides initial time synchronization for mobiles. It workswith the pilot channel.

■ Paging channel — is a forward link channel that transmits controlinformation to the mobile unit. Before a mobile receives a call, it firstreceives a page from the cell site on an assigned page channel.

■ Access channel — is the reverse link channel by which mobiles transmitcontrol information to the cell site. The mobile uses this channel whenplacing a call.

■ Traffic (user) channel — transmits speech and/or data from the mobile tothe cell site in an uplink direction, or from the cell site to the mobile in adownlink direction.

■ Orthogonal Channel Noise Source — simulates CDMA traffic at a specifiedlevel so that actual CDMA system capacity can be measured in the fieldwith actual background noise and other RF radiation.

Several functions can be combined into a single CE. This combination defines aCE’s “personality.” The CE personality is downloaded from the CCC to the CEbased on a particular cell’s configuration. The Lucent Technologies CDMAarchitecture allows a minimum of CEs to be allocated and still provide all thefunctions needed for CDMA processing. A single CE can be loaded with the Pilot,Sync, and Access personality. A second CE is used for the Paging channel, andthe rest of the CEs may be dedicated as Traffic channels.

Issue 15 July 2002 7-27


Cell Site Types

Analog Conversion Unit (ACU)

The Analog Conversion Unit (ACU) digitally combines signals from the CCUs,performs D/A (Digital to Analog) conversions, and limits signals with low-passfilters. Each ACU has six analog outputs, which represent the In-phase andQuadrature-phase (I and Q) signals to each of three cell sectors. See Figure 7-9on page 7-25.

Baseband Combiner and Radio (BCR)

The Baseband Combiner and Radio (BCR) combines the I and Q signals fromeach of the ACUs and (on the forward link) converts the signal to RF with an RFup-converter. In the reverse path, it receives RF signals and down-converts tobaseband. See Figure 7-9 on page 7-25.

Bus Interface Unit (BIU)

The Bus Interface Unit (BIU) is the interface between the BCR, the ACU, and theTime Division Multiplexed (TDM) bus. It provides power conversion and alarmcontrol functions. See Figure 7-9 on page 7-25.

NOTE:The combination of BCR/BIU/ACU is also referred to as the BBA Trio or CDMARadio Set.

Synchronized Clock and Tone (SCT) Board

The SCT provides the accurate timing needed by CDMA. The SCT provides clockand tone capabilities, CDMA board synchronization, and a 19.6608 MHzreference clock. The SCT’s synchronization signals are derived from theReference Frequency and Timing Generator (RFTG). An SCT board pair isrequired for each RCF that contains CDMA equipment. See Figure 7-9 onpage 7-25.

Digital Facilities Interface (DFI)

The DFI board consists of one DS-1 interface equivalent to one DS1 board. TheDFI interfaces the DS-1 links with the TDM bus that supports the CDMA cluster. Inaddition to the DS1 functions, the DFI supports transfer of packet pipe data. Oneor more packet pipes can be assigned to each DFI to communicate between thecell and the MSC.

7-28 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

CDMA Radio Test Unit

The CDMA Radio Test Unit (CRTU) is a cell-level test system that performs faultlocalization at the cell. The CRTU provides you with a mechanism for testing bothCDMA Special Purpose Channels (Overhead, Pilot/Sync/Access and Paging) andCDMA traffic channels that are used by CDMA cell sites.

The CRTU is composed of two components: the CRTU Interface Board (CRTUi)and the CRTU Mobile (CRTUm). The CRTUi is a plug-in board installed in theprimary RCF through which the RCC communicates with an IS-95A compliantmobile unit in the CRTUm. The CRTUm is located externally.

CRTU Multiple Carrier Support for Overhead Channels

The CRTU Multiple Carrier Support for Overhead Channels Test (MSCOCT)feature verifies the operation of overhead channels for all equipped carriers in acell. The MCSOCT feature works with the CRTU Performance Monitoring feature.

MCSOCT has the following capabilities:

■ Testing all carriers when an overhead channel test is invoked

■ Generating test results at the ROP or console as part of the overheadchannel test

■ Formatting test results to resemble TP/CE test results

■ Validating and investigating test failures on a forced handoff to a secondarycarrier. If this failure is detected, the MCSOCT checks customer mobiles onthe same sector and same failed character. If mobiles are present, it isassumed that the overhead channel is good, and some incidental failureoccurred.

CDMA Radio Test Unit Fault Isolation - Pilot Signal Strength

The CDMA RTU Fault Isolation - Pilot Signal Strength feature generates a reportshowing the power levels (in dBm) of the CDMA pilot channels in a cell site. It alsomonitors the pilot signal strength and reports when the value is out of tolerance.This provides the technician with more information to detect and isolate hardwarefaults.

This feature adds a new CDMS functional test called the Pilot Level FunctionalTest (PL FT). The technician can specify a tolerance level and frequency of PL FTchecking via RC/V screens.

Figure 7-10 illustrates the primary message flow among the processes in the PLFT.

In Figure 7-10 on page 7-30, a scenario occurs in which a technician requests aPL FT.

Issue 15 July 2002 7-29


Cell Site Types

TI sends a message to the RMS requesting a PL FT, and RMS indicates to thetechnician that a PL FT was started. RMS sends a PL FT request to MRA for thespecified sector. MRA creates a process to perform the PL FT then sends therequest to the MRA queue. When the request reaches the queue, the processstarts to run. If a failure occurs, the PL FT sends a message to HEH to handle thefailure. MRA then reports the results to the RMS, which passes the results to theTI.

Reference Frequency and Timing Generator(RFTG)

The RFTG1 is used to provide the CDMA/analog radio reference frequency, aswell as the CDMA synchronization signals. The RFTG makes use of a GlobalPositioning System (GPS) receiver to synchronize the CDMA signals. The RFTGhas two integrated oscillators that are disciplined by GPS timing. The dualoscillator architecture guarantees timing integrity within the CDMA system shouldany subsystem component fail, including the GPS receiver. See Chapter 7, “CellSite Types” for information on the location of the GPS antenna.

1 The RFTG replaces the Radio Frequency Generator (RFG) and is feature transparent foranalog systems.

7-30 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 7-10. PL FT Message Flow

RMSSP

MRASP

HEHSP

RMSTP

MRATP

HEHTP

CP

TI

ECP

CRTUi

MI

TI Technician InterfaceRMS Routine Maintenance SchedulerMRA Maintenance Request AdministratorHEHHardware Error HandlerCPCall ProcessingMI Mobile InterfaceRCC Radio Control ComplexSP System ProcessTP Terminal Process

MessageIndirect MessageOScreate

Issue 15 July 2002 7-31


Cell Site Types

Series IIe Cell Site

The Lucent Technologies’ Series IIe Cell is ideal for smaller metropolitan andstart-up markets. Based on the modular architecture of the Series II cell, theSeries IIe is able to provide the same features and reliability.

Distributed intelligence makes it easy to add subscribers and migrate to newdigital access technologies. Expanding the system with plug-in radios and growthframes allows you to economically add voice channels. Therefore, you won’toutgrow your Series IIe as your number of subscribers increases.

Series IIe Cell Site architecture allows easy migration from an analog to a digitalnetwork. The system accommodates Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)radios for end-to-end digital service, and will also permit you to add Code DivisionMultiple Access (CDMA) capability.

By interfacing directly with incoming digital trunks, the Series IIe eliminatesexternal digital-to-analog channel banks. You reduce equipment costs, simplifymaintenance, and save space.

Powerful Digital Signal Processors (DSPs) condense multiple functions onto asingle integrated circuit. This streamlined, compact design has fewer parts, sosystem reliability is enhanced.

The Series IIe Cell Site provides the following benefits:

■ Modular, flexible system expansion. Plug-in radio modules enable you toadd new features as technology changes or customer service needsincrease. TDMA radios can be installed in the same frame as analog radiosto achieve digital capability on an existing analog network.

■ New capabilities. Because the Series IIe is based on the Series II Cell Site,it offers the same features and capabilities. You can add small cells toimprove coverage in hot spots and dead spots. Digital TDMA radios,flexible filter arrangements, directions setup (up to six sectors), simulcastsetup, and other optional features further improve performance andoptimize system configuration.

■ Patented linear amplification technology. Amplifying all channelssimulateously eliminates the need for separate channel amplifiers andprecisely turned cavity combiners that restrict radio channels to a particularfrequency. Channel frequencies can be assigned remotely. In addition, youcan combine and amplify up to 108 channels, as long as the maximumoutput power of the linear amplifier is not exceeded.

■ Remote operation. Operating functions of the Series IIe that can beremotely controlled include radio frequencies and functions, output powerlevels, radio-to-trunk connections, Supervisory Audio Tone (SAT), and

7-32 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Digital Voice Color Code (DVCC). SAT, used with FDMA, and DVCC, usedwith TDMA, both monitor the integrity of the radio connections between thecell site and the mobile unit.

■ Saves space. Compact design accommodates facilities with spacelimitation or enable you to collocate Series IIe in the same building thathouses other equipment.

The Series IIe Cell Site consists of a primary Radio Channel Fame, with the abilityto add a up to two growth frames, a Linear Amplifier Frame, and an AntennaInterface Frame. Figure 7-11 on page 7-32 shows the Series IIe hardwareconfiguration.

Figure 7-11. Series IIe Hardware Configuration

AT&T AT&TAT&T AT&TAT&T AT&T AT&T AT&TAT&T AT&TAT&TAT&TAT&TAT&T

FITS

FAIL

5V+

-

OFF

V IN

FAIL FAILFAIL

ACT

FAIL

ACT

FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL

5V+

-

OFF

V INFITS

FAIL

012CONV 0

+5V

066030

0/AF1

022 042

0/NC12

036 060054048

0/CP1 0/NC10

094082072 114108102

1/NC100/CPU 1/MEM1/CPU0/MEM 1/CP1 1/NC11

138120 128 132

1/NC12

144

1/AF1

154

+5V

170

CONV1162

CAT/DS-1

AT&T

12V-

R

OFF

V IN

+12V

-

+12V

AT&T

5V+

-

OFF

V IN

AT&TAT&T

FAIL

ACT

AT&T

CHANNEL NO.

FAIL

STBY

TX

AT&T

CHANNEL NO.

FAIL

STBY

TX

AT&T

CHANNEL NO.

FAIL

STBY

TX

AT&T

CHANNEL NO.

FAIL

STBY

TX

AT&T

CHANNEL NO.

FAIL

STBY

TX

AT&T

CHANNEL NO.

FAIL

STBY

TX

AT&T

CHANNEL NO.

FAIL

STBY

TX

AT&T

CHANNEL NO.

FAIL

STBY

TX

CHANNEL NO.

FAIL

STBY

TX

AT&T

CHANNEL NO.

FAIL

STBY

TX

1

CONV 0RCU

2

DS1

143

RCU

4

RCU

5

RCU

6

RCU

7

RCU

8

RCU

9

RCU

10

RCU

11

RCU

12

RCU

13

RCU

15

+5CONV

/COMB

0 16 17 SWITCH

12V-

R

OFF

V IN

+12V

-

+12V

5V+

-

OFF

V IN

AT&TAT&T

FAIL

ACT

1

CONV 0RCU

2

DS1

143

RCU

4

RCU

5

RCU

6

RCU

7

RCU

8

RCU

9

RCU

10

RCU

11

RCU

12

RCU

13

RCU

15

+5CONV

/COMB

0 16 17 SWITCH

12V-

R

OFF

V IN

+12V

-

+12V

AT&T

CHANNEL NO.

FAIL

STBY

TX

5V+

-

OFF

V IN

AT&T

FAIL

ACT

1

CONV 0RCU

2

DS1

143

RCU

4

RCU

5

RCU

6

RCU

7

RCU

8

RCU

9

RCU

10

RCU

11

RCU

12

RCU

13

RCU

15

+5CONV

/COMB

0 16 17 SWITCH

AT&TNetwork Systems AUTOPLEX AT&T

Network Systems AUTOPLEX AT&TNetwork Systems AUTOPLEX

PrimaryRadio Frame

Linear Amplifier Frame

Antenna Interface Frame

Transmit Filter PanelReceive Filter Panel

Receive Filter Panel

Radio Test Unit Switch

RCC Shelf 0

RCU Shelf 2

Fan Panel

LAC

Reference FrequencyGenerator (1 Oscillator)

RCU Shelf 110 RCUs

RTU Shelf 31 RTU, 1 DS1

Issue 15 July 2002 7-33


Cell Site Types

Series IIm and Series IImm Cell Sites

The Series IIm is a high-power, low-channel capacity, T1/E12 minicell base stationtargeted to rural environments where wide area coverage is desired but low trafficis expected. Table 7-3 on page 7-33 shows the standard configuration andmaximum capacity for the Series IIe cell sites.

2 E1 compatibility is for international application.

Table 7-3. Series IIe Standard Configuration Maximum Capacity

Category StandardConfigurationPackage

Maximum Capacity ofStandardCofiguration Packagewith Primary RadioFrame Only

MaximumCapacity withTwo GrowthFrames

Antenna Configuration Omni Omni Omni

3-Sector 3-Sector

6-Sector

Primary Radio Frame 1 1 1

Growth Radio Frames 0 0 2

Analog Radio ChannelUnits

10* 32 176

TDMA Digital RadioUnits

0 14 (42 voice channels) 82 (246 voicechannels)

Linear Amplifier Frame 1 1 2

240 Watt LinearAmplifier Ckt

1 4 7

Antenna Interface Frame 1 1 2

Transmit Filter Assembly 1 4 7

Receive Filter Assembly 2 8 14

7-34 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

* Analog Radio Channel Units provide Voice, Setup, and Locate functions. The suggestedConfiguration is one setup, one locate, and eight voice channels for the base configuration.

This product is perfect for providing coverage to fulfill license requirements inrural or suburban areas as well as for RF hole filling. See Figure 7-12 onpage 7-35.

The Series IImm is a low-power, high-channel capacity, T1/E1 microcell basestation designed to be used in traditional microcell applications such as RF holefilling, network underlays, in-building applications, and capacity relief. SeriesIImm provides coverage for urban and public in-building areas with high-densitytraffic. Many service providers also use the Series IImm to enhance thecapacity of Series II cell site in high-traffic regions. See Figure 7-13 onpage 7-36.

Issue 15 July 2002 7-35


Cell Site Types

Figure 7-12. Series IIm T1/E1 Minicell Hardware Configuration

The Series IIm and IImm products offer flexible deployment, connecting to theLucent Technologies Mobile Switching Center (MSC) via copper-based T1/E1facility. Microwave connectivity is available as an option. These small basestations runs on AC or DC power and can be configured for either indoor oroutdoor usage, allowing them to be located in areas with space or land-userestrictions.

AC T1

I C L As

CB-PANEL

PROT DSX CSU

RE

CT

I C L As

CSU

RE

CT

RE

CT

RE

CT

RE

CT

28.00

RC

U 1

RC

U 2

RC

U 3

RC

U 4

RC

U 5

RC

U 6

RC

U 7

RC

U 8

RC

U 9

PC

U 1

2

RT

UP

CU

5D

IVD

IV

PC

U 5

DF

UD

FU

DF

UA

F1

LAP

DC

P1

MC

1M

EM

CP

U

CP

U

ME

MM

C1

CP

1LA

PD

AF

1

DF

UD

FU

DF

UC

AT

CA

TP

CU

5

HEAT EXCHANGER

AC T1

I C L As

CB-PANEL

PROT DSX CSU

RE

CT

I C L As

CSU

RE

CT

RE

CT

RE

CT

RE

CT

28.00

RC

U 1

RC

U 2

RC

U 3

RC

U 4

RC

U 5

RC

U 6

RC

U 7

RC

U 8

RC

U 9

PC

U 1

2

RT

UP

CU

5D

IVD

IV

PC

U 5

DF

UD

FU

DF

UA

F1

LAP

DC

P1

MC

1M

EM

CP

U

CP

U

ME

MM

C1

CP

1LA

PD

AF

1

DF

UD

FU

DF

UC

AT

CA

TP

CU

5

FAN

I C L As

PROT DSX CSU

I C L As

CSU

26.00

RC

U 1

RC

U 2

RC

U 3

RC

U 4

RC

U 5

RC

U 6

RC

U 7

RC

U 8

RC

U 9

PC

U 1

2

RT

UP

CU

5D

IVD

IV

PC

U 5

DFU

DFU

DFU AF1

LAP

DC

P1

MC

1M

EM

CP

U

CP

U

ME

MM

C1

CP

1LA

PD

AF1

DFU

DFU

DFU

CA

TC

AT

PC

U 5

FANS

FANS

CB - PANEL

AC-POWERED FOR OUTDOORUNCONTROLLED ENVIRONMENT

AC-POWERED FOR INDOORCONTROLLED ENVIRONMENT

DC-POWERED FOR INDOORCONTROLLED ENVIRONMENT

90.0

0

78.0

0

65.0

0

7-36 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 7-13. Series IImm T1/E1 Microcell Hardware Configurations

Both products are self-contained systems, with no equipment engineeringrequired. They can be equipped with either a standard analog, single-slot analog,or Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) radios.

Other features include an integrated 24V power plant with a 10-minute batterybackup, a redundant controller, and simplex filter arrangements.

The Series IIm and Series IImm incorporate the proven architecture and flexiblefeatures of Lucent Technologies’ Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks SeriesII into a small self-contained base station. The Series IIm Minicell and Series IImmMicrocell provide the following advantages to service providers:

■ Supports all channel access methods. Currently supports analog (FDMA)and digital (TDMA now, and will support CDMA next) and Cellular DigitalPacket Data (CDPD). Support of CDPD allows wireless subscribers totransmit data over the cellular network.

26.00

60.0

0

FILTERS

TPA

CB

RCC

RCU

FAN

C S U

28.00

90.0

0

RCC

RCU

RECT

C S U

CB

AC

T1

TPA

HEAT EXCHANGER 28.00

78.0

0

FAN

RCC

RCU

RECT

C S U

CB

FILTERS

AC

T1

TPA

FILTERS

DC-POWERED FOR INDOORCONTROLLED ENVIRONMENT

AC-POWERED FOR INDOORCONTROLLED ENVIRONMENT

AC-POWERED FOR OUTDOORUNCONTROLLED ENVIRONMENT

Issue 15 July 2002 7-37


Cell Site Types

■ Grows as you grow. The Series IIm and Series IImm can expand to threecabinets for applications requiring multiple sectors. This enables the SeriesIIm Minicell to handle a broader area and more subscribers, preventingobsolescence as traffic increases and enables the Series IImm Microcell toadd voice channels and subscribers, preventing obsolescence as trafficincreases. Growth cabinets are located next to the primary cabinet. Duplexfilter arrangements are also available.

■ Enables rapid migration to new technologies. Direct connection to the MSCvia T1/E1 trunk facilities enables service providers to offer subscriberscurrent and future Intelligent Network applications through the5ESS®-2000 Switch DCS.

■ Provides full Series II functionality. The Series IIm Minicell and Series IImmoffer complete feature transparency with Series II, including totalintegration and use of features offered through the Lucent TechnologiesExecutive Cellular Processor (ECP) and 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS. Alsoincluded is an integrated Operations, Administration, and Maintenance(OA&M) through the MSC’s Operations and Management Platform (OMP).

■ Helps you meet FCC requirements. In the U.S., FCC regulations requireservice providers to provide full coverage of their territories within 5 yearsof receiving a license. The Series IIm Minicell is a cost-effective alternativefor rural areas where traffic is insufficient to justify investment in a largecapacity Series II cell site.

■ Works with existing Series II systems. Seamless integration with existingSeries II Cell Sites protects hardware investment and simplifies installation.

Product Offering

The Series IIm and IImm cell sites include a primary cabinet and growth cabinets.The cabinets are available in both indoor and outdoor configurations (seeFigure 7-12 on page 7-35 and Figure 7-13 on page 7-36). The configurationsinclude:

■ AC-powered for outdoor uncontrolled environment

— older models have a top-mounted heat exchanger

— newer models have the heat exchanger on the cabinet rear door(not shown in Figure 7-12 on page 7-35 and Figure 7-13 onpage 7-36).

■ AC-powered for indoor controlled environment

■ DC-powered for indoor controlled environment (+24V power plant notincluded).

7-38 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

The Series IIm and IImm products support analog, Cellular Digit Packet Data(CDPD), Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA), and Code Division MultipleAccess (CDMA). In addition, they support both omnidirectional and sectorizedoperations. Also, both products are capable of supporting either omnidirectional ordirectional setup when configured as a sectorized voice channel cell site.

See the Series IIm T1/E1 Microcell Description, Operations and Maintenancemanual (401-660-102) and the Series IImm T1/E1 Minicell Description,Operations, and Maintenance manual (401-660-102) for detailed information onthe Small Cell Products.

Series IIm T1/E1 Minicell

Figure 7-12 on page 7-35 shows the Series IIm T1/E1 Minicell hardwareconfiguration.

Series IIm Primary Cabinet

The Series IIm primary cabinet contains the cell site equipment necessary toserve a single sector, including voice, locate and setup radios.

The Series IIm radio shelf currently holds up to nine Radio Channel Units (RCUs)or Single Board Radio Channel Units (SBRCUs), or four Digital Radio Units(DRUs) plus two SBRCUs used for setup and locate.

Radio Test Units (RTUs) are located on the radio shelf, with analog and/or digitaltest radios equipped as necessary. Other radio test equipment includes a fullyredundant Reference Frequency Generator (RFG), and RTU Switch Panel.

The primary cabinet has a 10-minute battery backup (AC configuration only).Additional equipment specific for the Series IIm primary cabinet includesamplifiers, an auto-tuned high-power combiner (manually tunable combineroptional for indoor applications only) and transmit and receive filter or duplexerpanels.

Series IIm Growth Cabinet

The Series IIm growth cabinet contains the same elements as the primarycabinet, with the exception of the Controller, Channel Service Unit (CSU), RFGand Radio Test Unit Switch Panel (RSP) shelves.

The growth cabinet provides capacity growth options, which include increasingthe channel capacity for the omnidirectional cell configuration and/or upgradingthe omnidirectional cell configuration to a maximum of three sector configuration.

Issue 15 July 2002 7-39


Cell Site Types

Adding a second omni growth cabinet increases radio capacity. The analog radiocapacity can increase to a maximum of 15 to 23 voice channels and the TDMAcapacity increases from 24 to 36 voice channels.

Currently, the maximum number of growth cabinets allowed for Series IIm is twofor sectorized operation and one for omnidirectional.

Series IImm T1/E1 Microcell

Figure 7-13 on page 7-36 shows the Series IImm T1/E1 Microcell hardwareconfiguration.

Series IImm Primary Cabinet

The Series IImm primary cabinet contain all the cell site equipment necessary toserve a single sector, including voice, locate and setup radios. The Series IImmradio shelf currently holds up to 21 SBRCUs.

Radio Test Units (RTUs) are located on the radio shelf, with analog and/or digitaltest radios equipped as necessary. Other radio test equipment includes a fullyredundant Reference Frequency Generator, and RTU Switch Panel.

The primary cabinet has a 10-minute battery backup (AC configuration only).Additional equipment specific for the Series IIm primary cabinet includesamplifiers, an auto-tuned high-power combiner (manually tunable combineroptional for indoor applications only) and transmit and receive filter or duplexerpanels.

Additional equipment specific for the Series IImm primary cabinet includes anexternal transmit amplifier cabinet which provides up to 100 watts combinedoutput power.

Series IImm Single Sector Growth Cabinet

The Series IImm single sector growth cabinet contains the same elements as theprimary cabinet, with the exception of the Controller, Channel Service Unit (CSU),RFG and Radio Test Unit Switch Panel (RSP) shelves.

The growth cabinet provides capacity growth options, which include increasingthe channel capacity for the omnidirectional cell configuration and/or upgradingthe omnidirectional cell configuration to a maximum of three sector configuration.

The analog capacity increases from 39 to 57 analog voice channels using eithertwo single sector growth cabinets or a two-sector growth cabinet. The TDMAvoice channel capacity increases from 30 to 45.

7-40 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Currently, the maximum number of growth cabinets allowed for Series IImm is twosectored growth cabinets for sectorized configuration and one for omnidirectionalconfiguration. A maximum of two single sector growth cabinets are supported.

Series IIm and IImm Functional Overview

MSC Interface

The Series IIm and IImm primary cabinet is connected to the MSC via T1/E1 ormicrowave facilities. The number of facility interfaces is determined by the numberof voice circuits and data links that the cell supports. Voice traffic information istransmitted between the cell and the MSC over one time slot per voice channel.Control and status information is transmitted via one or two time slots configuredas data links.

The controller is equipped with two identical sides: side 0 and side 1. Only oneside is on-line at a time. The on-line side receives/sends control and datainformation from/to the MSC and from/to cell site units. The off-line side trackswhat the on-line side is doing so that it may come on-line as needed.

RF Distribution

Series IIm Transmit Path

The RF transmit path for the Series IIm is shown in Figure 7-14 on page 7-41.Each transmitting radio (voice or setup) is directly connected to an IndividualChannel Linear Amplifier (ICLA). The ICLA accepts either analog or digitalsignals. The output of the ICLA is connected to one of eight input ports of thehigh-power cavity combiner. The common combiner output port is connected to afilter panel. The output of the filter panel is connected to the antenna port thatdrives the transmitting antenna.

The RCUs, DRUs, and SBRCUs contain baseband signal processing circuits anda transceiver. Control outputs are provided from the radios to dynamically switchreceiver inputs. The RCUs and SBRCUs can be used for setup, locate, or voicechannel service; the DRUs can only be used for voice channel service or asDCCH radios.

Series IImm Transmit Path

The RF transmit path for Series IImm is shown in Figure 7-15 on page 7-41. Up to19 voice radios and one setup radio are combined at low power levels and thenapplied to the Transmit Power Amplifier (TPA).

Issue 15 July 2002 7-41


Cell Site Types

Figure 7-14. Series IIm RF Transmit Path

Figure 7-15. Series IImm RF Transmit Path

Radio ICLA

Filter Panel

1 THROUGH 8

CavityCombiner

FilterDirectional

Coupler

Radio ICLA

AntennaPort

= Customer furnished

TPA

(1) Radio

(20) Radio

1 - 20 Radios

LowPower

CombinerFilter

DirectionalCoupler

Filter Panel

AntennaPort

CustomerSupplied

7-42 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

The Series IImm utilizes one TPA per sector. The amplifier delivers approximately20 watts of average RF power at its output.

Series IIm and Series IImm Filters

Transmit and receive filters include both notch and bandpass functions designedfor Band A or B. Individual filters are provided for specific applications. Duplexfilter panels are available for both Bands A and B.

Series IIm and Series IImm Receive Path

The receive path for Series IIm and Series IImm cell sites is shown in Figure 7-16on page 7-42. The receive path noise figure is approximately 5 dB. In the SeriesIIm, the received RF signal is split and fed to nine radio slots. In Series IImm cellsites, 21 radio slots are fed.

Figure 7-16. Series IIm and Series IImm RF Receive Path

Directional couplers are part of the filter assembly and have the same couplingcoefficients for both incident and reflected signals as the standard Series IIproducts. Directional couplers are provided in both the transmit and receive pathsfor functional and diagnostics tests. Receive filters are required for each diversitypath.

Series IIm Minicell or Series IImm Microcell withCDMA Minicell Adjunct

The Series IIm Minicell or Series IImm Microcell with CDMA Minicell Adjunctfeature reuses existing hardware to provide CDMA capability to analog cells.

Radio

Radio

= Customer furnished

SplitterNetwork

RFPreamplifier

CouplerFilter

Note: Only Diversity 0 is shown. Diversity 1 is similar.

Issue 15 July 2002 7-43


Cell Site Types

The Series IIm CDMA Minicell Adjunct provides CDMA capability to the Series IImMinicell and increases the number of users that are supported in a cell. It isconfigured to match the existing Series IIm sectorization so that the CDMAadjunct can share the existing duplex filter banks and Series IIm antennas.

The adjunct consists of one CDMA Minigrowth frame, a CDMA DC power cabinet,and an optional battery backup. The minigrowth cabinet contains the CDMARadio Complex, transmit amplifiers, a CDMA test unit, alarm board, cascadefilters, and a transmit notch filter.

The Series IImm CDMA Minicell Adjunct provides CDMA capability to the SeriesIImm Minicell and increases the number of users supported in a cell. It isconfigured to match the existing Series IImm sectorization so that the CDMAadjunct can share (where possible) antennas in the receive and transmit paths.The adjunct consists of one CDMA Minigrowth frame, a CDMA DC power cabinet,and an optional battery backup. The minigrowth cabinet contains the CDMARadio Complex, transmit amplifiers, a CDMA test unit, alarm board, cascadefilters, and a transmit notch filter.

7-44 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Series II Cellular CDMA Minicell

The Series II Cellular CDMA Minicell is a CDMA-based small cell site, similar tothe Series II Small Cells described in “” on page 7-35.The Cellular CDMA Minicellprovides a low cost alternative to the Series II for cellular customers interested inCDMA. The Minicell can be used in high radius CDMA cells in overlay or outdoorapplications where CDMA coverage is needed. The Minicell can also be used asa Small Cell Adjunct, working with the Series IIm cell site.

The Cellular CDMA Minicell is comprised of two, small-footprint cabinets; TheMinicell Primary Cabinet, and the Antenna Interface Frame (AIF), and an optionalPower System. A CDMA Minicell Growth Cabinet may be added when additionalcapacity is needed. All CDMA Minicell products are externally powered andavailable in indoor and outdoor versions.

The Cellular CDMA Minicell is a CDMA-only based small cell site. The CDMAMinicell Primary cabinet contains a Series II cell controller, digital radio shelves,amplifying, and filtering equipment for each cell sector. Each CDMA Minicellprimary cabinet can support up to 96 channel elements when equipped with8CE/CCUs.

The Cellular CDMA Minicell Growth Cabinet works with the Cellular CDMAMinicell, and in the future will work with the Series IIm and Series IImm cells. Ituses the Radio Control Complex (RCC) and the filters and receive amplifiers fromthe primary cabinet to which it is attached. The Growth Cabinet supports threeCDMA carriers, one per sector with up to three sectors, or a single omni with up tothree CDMA carriers.

In addition, the CDMA Minicell Growth Cabinet could be used in conjunction withan existing Series II cell as a growth cabinet, using the Series II RCC and PrimaryFrame as the controller. The Minicell Growth Cabinet may share RF receive andtransmit resources (antennas, filters, and amplifiers) with the Series II byconnecting directly to the Linear Amplifier Combiner (LAC).

The Lucent Technologies’ Cellular CDMA Minicell provides the followingadvantages:

■ Optimized coverage. Cellular CDMA Minicells are small-footprint, weather-resistant, self-contained units that can be easily deployed. Pre-engineeredconfigurations—omnidirectional and three-sector—simplify installation,minimize maintenance, and reduce site acquisition and deployment costs.The Cellular CDMA Minicell is designed to support cellular networks withcells of 0.5 to 15 miles in radius.

■ Proven technology. Based on proven technology platforms continuallyrefined by Lucent Technologies Bell Laboratories, the Cellular CDMAMinicell provides efficient, cost-effective coverage with high reliability,minimal maintenance, and superior voice quality. The Cellular CDMA

Issue 15 July 2002 7-45


Cell Site Types

Minicell supports 13 kbps vocoder technology to further enhance voicequality. Cell sites can simultaneously support 8 kbps and 13 kbpsvocoders.

■ Grow as your network needs to grow. The Cellular CDMA Minicell is able toexpand by adding a growth cabinet to a primary cabinet. This allows for ahigher-capacity of subscribers and therefore preventing obsolescence inhardware. Flexible configuration options contribute to lower infrastructurecosts.

■ Works with existing wireless networks. Seamless integration of the CellularCDMA Minicell with existing Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networksprotects and enhances your revenue base.

■ Integrates seamlessly into U.S. networks for cost-effective overlaysystems. The Cellular CDMA Minicell leverages U.S. standards for networkinterconnect and intersystem roaming and handoff, providing immediateaccess to nationwide wireless service.

■ Remote Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M). RemoteOA&M reduce ongoing support costs.

■ Simultaneous support for multiple voice and data rates. Supports 9.6 kbpsand 14.4 kbps data rates from the same CDMA channel unit. This providesthe flexibility of supporting 8 kbps and 13 kbps vocoder rates, and supportfor interleaved over-the-air data at 9.6 and 14.4 kbps, and Group III Fax.

■ Capacity enhancing design. In a sectorized cell, any channel element canserve any sector at any time, thereby increasing the total capacity of thecell site.

Cellular CDMA Minicell Components

The Cellular CDMA Minicell consists of the following components:

■ Radio Control Complex (RCC) — same as the Series II RCC described in“Radio Control Channel (RCC)” on page 7-5.

■ CDMA Radio Complex (CRC) — contains up to three CCCs in a cross-connected pattern. Each CCC contains 4 CCUs with 2CEs/CCU.

■ Transmit Power Amplifier (TPA) and Amplifier Alarms — The CDMA TPAamplifies the transmit outputs of the CRC. The outputs are connected tothe transmit antenna path via the transmit filter in the AIF, or through theoptional Cascade and Notch Transmit filters in the Primary Frame (whenthese are used).

■ Reference Frequency Timing Generator (RFTG) — The RFTG obtainsclock signals from Global Positioning System (GPS) satellites. Theprecision of Minicell synchronization afforded by this timing assures thehighest level of call quality and soft handoff between cells.

7-46 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

■ Channel Services Unit (CSU) (optional) — The CSU supports one T1facility. For international markets, the cell may be configured with an E1facility. While three slots are provided, the cell can be configured with onlyone CSU. A fourth slot is designated for the CSU Shelf Interface Unit (SIU).

■ CDMA Radio Test Unit (CRTU) — same test system used in the Series IIcell (see “CDMA Radio Test Unit” on page 7-28).

■ B-Band Cascade and Notch Filters — The B-Band Cascade filters arerequired only in B-Band duplexed configurations. Notch filters are requiredwhere a Specialized Mobile Radio (SMR) signal is nearby. Both filters arehoused in the Primary Frame.

■ Performance Monitoring System — The WatchMark Prospect™ system isa network-level performance monitoring system that verifies CDMA audioand Cell-MSC communications.

■ DC Power System — +24 V DC power system. An existing Series II powersystem can be used for an indoor application of the Cellular CDMAMinicell, but a DC Power Cabinet is needed for an outdoor application

Most of the components are housed in the CDMA Minicell Primary Cabinet,except where noted. Refer to Figure 7-17 on page 7-47.

The Cellular CDMA Minicell is packaged in an environmentally hardenedenclosure so that it can be mounted on a roof top, at street level, or indoors. It isbest suited for rural and high-density urban settings that require a small capacitycell with the same functionality as the larger Series II cell sites. The reducedfootprint and outdoor option add flexibility to the network design.

Issue 15 July 2002 7-47


Cell Site Types

Figure 7-17. CDMA Cellular Minicell Primary Cabinet

Cellular Minicell AIF Cabinet

The AIF (Figure 7-18 on page 7-48) provides the interface and signal filtering.This circuitry is required to complete the Minicell receive (Rx) and transmit (Tx)RF paths from the receive and transmit antennas to the TPAs and BCRs in thePrimary Frame.

...

......

...

.....

...

.....

....

..... ..... .......... ..... .. ....

.

..

..... ..

.... CRC Clusters

RFTG 1

Alarms

CSU-2

CSU-3

CSU SIU

CSU-1

Notch/Cascade Filters

CRTU

RFTG 0

TPAs

RCC

7-48 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 7-18. Mini AIF

The AIF houses these following key components:

■ Radio Test Unit Switch Panel (RSP) — The function of the RSP is to switchtest signals from channel to channel and from carrier to carrier. It operatesin conjunction with the CRTU which is located in the Primary Frame.

■ Filters — Both receive and transmit filter panels are housed in the AIF.Receive and transmit filter panels are available for A Band and B Band andfor simplex and duplex configurations.

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

.

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

.

Receive Filter Panels

Transmit/ReceiveFilters and Duplexers

RTU Switch Panel

Issue 15 July 2002 7-49


Cell Site Types

CDMA/PCS Minicell Rack-Mounted GrowthCabinets

Each CDMA/PCS Minicell Rack-Mounted Growth Cabinet supports one or twocarriers for a CDMA/PCS Minicell. These rack-mounted growth cabinets areindoor cabinets with small footprints. They support either simplex or duplex filtersand operability with the standard single-carrier growth cabinet.

Cabinet 1 supports the second and third CDMA/PCS RF carrier as an alternativeto standard growth Cabinets 1 and 2. Cabinet 2 supports the third and fourthCDMA/PCS RF carrier as an alternative to standard growth Cabinets 2 and 3.Figure 7-19 on page 7-49 illustrates how to configure the CDMA Minicell cabinetsaccording to the required CDMA carriers, and also shows how each rack-mountedgrowth cabinet can be installed in either one or two CDMA carrier configurations.

Figure 7-19. Primary, Single Growth, and Rack-Mounted Cabinets Configuration

Configurations Carrier Growth Plan

Single carrier growthconfiguration

G5 G4 G3 G2 G1 P

G5 RG3 RG1 PP+RG1+RG3+G5

6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st

RG4 RG2 G1 P

A

B

G5 RG3 G2 G1 P

P+G1+RG2+RG4

C P+G1+G2+RG3+G5

RG4 G3 G2 G1 PD P+G1+G2+g3+RG4

G5 G4 RG2 G1 PE P+G1+RG2+G4+G5

RG4 G3 RG1 PF P+RG1+G3+RG4

G5 G4 G3 RG1 PG P+RG1+G3+G4+G5

7-50 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

The dashed vertical lines are included to indicate the CDMA carriers supported bythe Growth Cabinets (plain “G” boxes) and the corresponding carriers supported

by the rack-mounted growth cabinets (shaded “RG” boxes).

CDMA Double Density Growth Frame

The Double Density Growth Frame (DDGF) supports high-channel capacity, up tofour carriers with full power amplifier. This frame has four independent CDMARadio Complexes (CRC). Each CRC consists of three CDMA half shelvesarranged in a vertical stack. Each shelf has ten fixed positions (slots) for CDMAcircuit packs. The DDGF consists of 12 shelves with 10 slots per shelf, requiring10 circuit packs.

Figure 7-20 on page 7-51 illustrates the double density growth frame with theCellular CDMA Minicell Primary Frame and Figure 7-21 on page 7-52 illustratesthe double density growth frame on the SII primary frame.

Issue 15 July 2002 7-51


Cell Site Types

Figure 7-20. Double Density Growth Frame, Cellular CDMA Minicell Primary Frame

2

4

6

1

frame 0 frame 1

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

4

3 5

2

4

6

1

frame 0

8

10

12

2

frame 1

(1) CCM - DDGF

(2) CCM - CCM - DDGF

frame 2

20

22

24

26

28

30

4

5

7-52 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 7-21. Double Density Growth Frame with the SII Primary Frame

frame 0 frame 1

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

4

3 5

frame 0

8

10

12

frame 1

(3) S2 - DDGF

(4) S2 - C - DDGF

frame 2

20

22

24

26

28

30

4

5

S IIPRIMARY

2

S IIPRIMARY

frame 0

S IIPRIMARY

(5) S2 - S2 - DDGF

S IICDMA

GROWTH

2

frame 1

S IIGROWTH

frame 2

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

4

3 5

8

10

12

2

13

15

17

7

9

11

14

16

18

8

10

12

Issue 15 July 2002 7-53


Cell Site Types

The double density growth frame supports the following basic configurations (seeFigures Figure 7-20 on page 7-51 and Figure 7-21 on page 7-52 for illustrations ofthese configurations):

1. A Cellular CDMA MiniCell Primary with a double density growth frame

2. A Cellular CDMA MiniCell Primary with a Cellular CDMA MiniCell growth frame1 and a double density growth frame 2

3. A SII primary frame with a double density growth frame

4. A SII primary frame with a SII CDMA growth frame 1 and a double densitygrowth frame 2

5. A SII primary frame with a SII analog growth Frame 1 and a double densitygrowth frame 2.

In Figure 7-20 on page 7-51 the DDGF subcell numbering is marked inside theframes, and CCC/BBA numbering is shown outside the frames.

7-54 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

PCS CDMA Minicell

In addition to the Cellular CDMA Minicell, a PCS CDMA Minicell and PCS CDMAGrowth Cabinet is available for wideband voice and data services at the 1.8 GHzto 2.0 GHz range. See the PCS CDMA Minicell Description, Operations andMaintenance manual (401-703-301) for more information.

CDMA/PCS Special Omni Minicell

The Special Omni Minicell is a single-sector single-carrier configuration of thePCS CDMA Minicell. It utilizes a sectorized cabinet rather than the omnidirectionalcabinet of the PCS CDMA Minicell product line.

The Special Omni PCS CDMA minicell can be grown to a 2- or 3-sector single-carrier cell. This also differs from the traditional Omni PCS CDMA minicell whichcan be grown to a 2- or 3-carrier omni cell.

Instead of a sectorized antenna, it has an omni antenna, which is connected tothe RF path of the alpha sector. Shelves 2 and 3 of this cabinet may need to beequipped with Digital Facility Interface (DFI) boards, but they are not populatedwith CCC, BBA, or TCU/ECU boards. The elimination of these boards significantlyreduces the costs for service providers initially offering service in areas where theneed for capacity is limited.

As capacity needs increase in a given cell, the minicell primary frame can beequipped to support second and third sectors as needed. This feature applies toPCS customers only.

Issue 15 July 2002 7-55


Cell Site Types

850 CDMA Compact Minicell

The 850 CDMA Compact Minicell is a small, low-cost product that is powerfulenough to provide full-area coverage. This product combines the functions of theexisting 850 Minicell and the Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) into a single cabinet(Compact Minicell Primary Cabinet) with the same basic footprint as the CellularCDMA Minicell Primary Cabinet.

It provides a growth path for up to three carriers through the development of the850 CDMA Compact Minicell Growth Cabinet. This system operates in the A-bandand the B-band. Indoor and outdoor applications are supported.

See the 850 CDMA Compact Minicell Description, Operations and MaintenanceManual (401-614-030) for more information.

7-56 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

TDMA PCS Minicell

The TDMA PCS Minicell physical and hardware architecture are based on theSeries IIm Minicell design. Rather than populating its radio shelf with a mix ofanalog and digital radios, as typically found in the Series IIm cabinets, the TDMAPCS Minicell uses only enhanced digital radio units (EDRUs). The

The TDMA PCS Minicell is available in two forms: Block Specific Minicell (themost common) and the Block Agile Minicell. Within these forms, there are severalconfigurations. The Block Specific Minicell may be either a Type I, Type III, TypeIV, or Type V configuration. The Block Agile Minicell may be either a Type III, TypeIV, or Type V configuration.

■ A Type I configuration (sometimes called Compact) is a single cabinetcontaining both transmit and receive hardware for each of three sectors.Each sector has two dedicated radios and two (diversity) receive units.Note that it is available for Block Specific Minicells only.

■ A Type III configuration consists of both a primary and a growth cabinet.Alpha sector hardware is located in the primary cabinet, and beta andgamma sector hardware is located in the growth cabinet. Each sector canhave up to eight radios and has two (diversity) receive units.

■ The Type IV configuration consists of a primary and two growth cabinets.This configuration is rare.

■ The Type V configuration consists of a primary and three growth cabinets.

Another configuration employs a stand-alone primary cabinet with Omnitransmission/reception. This configuration can have up to eight radios and hastwo (diversity) receive units.

See the TDMA PCS Minicell Description, Operations and Maintenance manual(401-703-321) for more information.

Issue 15 July 2002 7-57


Cell Site Types

Flexent® TDMA MultiRange BaseStation

The Flexent TDMA MultiRange Base Station is based on the Flexent TDMAMicrocell and the Series II Modular Linear Amplifier Circuit (MLAC). TheMultiRange Base Station responds to the need to extend RF coverage of thecellular TDMA Microcell with a high power amplifier module. It marries portions ofthe cellular TDMA Microcell Series II LAF/AIF to radiate at higher power levels.The MultiRange Base Station interfaces to the Radio Cluster Server (RCS)located at the Mobile Switching Center (MSC) over one or more T1/E1 lines.

Hardware and Functionality

The MultiRange Base Station is composed of the following:

■ Radio Control Module (RCM)


■ Antenna Interface Frame (AIF)

The RCM supplies the Dual Radio Modules (DRMs) that perform all basebandsignal processing and RF conversion.

The LAF provides RF signal combining and amplification equipment.

The AIF houses the RF filters that transport The RF signal to and from theantennas. The AIF also houses the Peripheral Alarm Card (PAC) that converts theModular Linear Amplifier Circuit (MLAC) alarms to Flexent-type alarms.

General Characteristics

The general characteristics of the MultiRange Base Station are as follows:

■ Supports up to ten RF carriers per Radio Control Module (RCM)

■ Provides approximately 160-watt composite output power at the transmitantenna port.

■ T1/E1 interface

■ Indoor installation

■ Analog and TDMA support

■ Supports a number of antenna configurations

See the Flexent® TDMA 850MHz MultiRange Cell Operation, Administration andMaintenance manual (401-703-363) for more information.

7-58 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Flexent® OneBTS for TDMA networks

The OneBTS for TDMA networks allows for flexible installations where floor spaceis scarce. For Release 16.0, the product is available as a high-powered FlexentTDMA 850Mhz only cell.

Hardware and Functionality

The OneBTS for TDMA networks is composed of the following:

■ TRC Module (TRCM)



It interfaces to the Radio Cluster Server (RCS) located at the Mobile SwitchingCenter (MSC) over one or more T1/E1 lines.

The TRC supplies the Dual Radio Modules (DRMs), which perform all basebandsignal processing and RF conversion.

The LAF provides RF signal combining and amplification equipment.

The AIF houses the RF filters that transport the RF signal to and from theantennas. Additionally, the AIF also houses the Peripheral Alarm Card (PAC) thatconverts the Modular Linear Amplifier Circuit (MLAC) alarms to Flexent-typealarms.

General Characteristics

The general characteristics of tThe OneBTS for TDMA networks are as follows:

■ Supports up to ten RF carriers per TRC Module (TRCM)

■ Provides approximately 160-watt composite output power at the transmitantenna port (J4)

■ T1/E1 interface

■ Indoor installation

■ Analog and TDMA support

■ Supports a number of antenna configurations

See the TDMA OneBTS t-850 Base Station Cell Operation, Administration andMaintenance manual (401-703-382) for more information.

Issue 15 July 2002 7-59


Cell Site Types

Microcells

A Microcell is one of the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks specificnetwork elements responsible for providing an air interface between a mobileterminal, for example, cellular telephone, and the Mobile Switching Center (MSC).

Microcells are designed to support different topologies, frequencies, power,antenna and environmental configurations, and they are provided to supporteither CDMA or TDMA technology.

External Structure

Microcells have an external clamshell structure (see Figure 7-22 on page 7-60)that provides rigidity and inherent strength.

External Physical Characteristics

Microcells have been designed with the following external physicalcharacteristics:

■ All input/output connections are accommodated either through the top orthe bottom of the microcell structure.

■ The front of the microcell supports a solar shield.

■ Security against unauthorized access is ensured by two unique screws thatrequire a special tool for removal.

■ Weather-tightness is ensured by 3 latches.

7-60 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 7-22. Microcell

Specifications

The Physical specifications for the microcell are provided in Table 7-4 onpage 7-60.

Table 7-4. Physical SpecificationsCategory CDMA TDMA

Dimensions 36.56” high9.55” wide11” deep

36.16” high19.27” wide14” deep

Weight Fully assembled: 120 lbs+40 lbs with field components

Fully assembled: 200 lbs+40 lbs with field components

Volume <3.5 cu. ft. maximum

Issue 15 July 2002 7-61


Cell Site Types

Environmental Diversity

Microcells are compact and essentially light enough (in terms of weight) to bemounted in a variety of applications, such as follows:

■ Outdoors:

— On existing or specifically erected telephone poles

— On the sides of buildings

— On rooftops

■ Indoors:

— Directly attached to exposed interior walls

— Unobtrusively, in utility rooms, closets and the like

Environmental Operating Range

Microcells are designed to operate in temperature conditions that can varybetween -40o C to +52o C.

Additional cooling and heating measures may optionally be provided for extremeconditions under which the outdoor temperature will tend to rise or fall more thantwo degrees per hour.

Optional Cooling Fan

The microcell can be provided with a cooling fan that will allow it to operate in anextreme high temperature environment. The optional filter-free fan assemblyprovides low-maintenance conductive cooling by blowing air on the backside ofthe microcell frame.

Optional Heating Pads

The microcell can be equipped with optional heating pads that will allow it tooperate in an extreme low temperature environment. The optional heating padsmount on the door frame of the microcell.

7-62 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Connection and Control

Microcells are connected to the MSC, via DS1 facilities provided between theMicrocell and the MSC’s Digital Cellular Switch (DCS) (see Figure 7-23 onpage 7-62).

Figure 7-23. Simplified View of Microcell-to-MSC Relationship

Control information is passed between the MSC and the Microcell through theRadio Cluster Server (RCS) of an MSC’s Application Processor (AP) via DS0signaling channels (see Figure 7-23 on page 7-62).

The DS0 signaling channels are groomed from the DS1 facilities and routedthrough the DCS switch.

RCS

AP

RCS

AP

DCS

ECPOMP-FX

MicrocellDS0 Signaling Channels DS1s

traffic

Mobile SwitchingCenter (MSC)

Issue 15 July 2002 7-63


Cell Site Types

Functions

In the forward (transmit) direction, the microcell performs the following functions:

■ Channel coding

■ Modulation

■ Radio Frequency (RF) up conversion

■ RF amplification

■ Transmission of the traffic over-the-air to the Mobile Terminal (MT)according to the parameters sent down from the RCS.

In the reverse (receive) direction, the microcell performs the following functions:

■ receives traffic from the mobile terminal.

■ demodulates the traffic signal.

■ decodes the traffic signal

■ sends the traffic signal to the DCS.

Antennas

The Microcell provides radio functionality for a geographical area that can beserved either by an omni-directional antenna system or by a multi-sector antennasystem.

The Microcell will support up to four (if simplex transmit is used) antennas.

Configuration Options

Microcells can be configured

■ as single-sector carrier (stand-alone) Microcells.

■ in multiples that are connected in a daisy-chain configuration.

Daisy-Chain Configurations

In a daisy-chain configuration, Microcells can function either as individualstandalone cells or they can be grouped together, with each microcell providing auni-directional antenna system.

Stand alone cells in a daisy chain configuration could be situated for indoorapplications, where several cell sites are desirable to serve an office building.

7-64 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

By grouping Microcells together, for example, three, a three-sector cell site couldbe created with each microcell supporting one sector, via a 120-degree antennasystem.

Applications

Microcells that operate in a daisy-chain configuration can be classified for use inthe following applications:

■ Co-located. In such an application, the microcells are mounted on thesame pole to provide three-sector coverage. Here, separation is on theorder of 10 feet.

■ Locally. In such an application, the microcells are mounted on a rooftop(also providing three-sector coverage). Here, separation is on the order of100 feet.

■ Remotely. In such an application, the microcells are mounted to supportmultiple locations within a building. Here the separation is on the order of500 to 1,000 feet.

Power Provisions

The Microcell has the following two power inputs:

■ One for AC voltage that can supply power to the microcell via theMicrocell’s standard Power Converter Unit (PCU).

■ One for DC voltage that can provide either of the following:

— Power to the microcell via an optional DC Power DistributionCabinet (PDC) and battery.

— An optional battery backup for the AC voltage supplied via theMicrocell’s PCU.

When power is provided via the PDC and battery, the DC input is surge-protectedprior to entering the microcell. When the battery backup for the AC voltage isprovided, the DC input is not surge-protected.

AC Power

The Microcell can be run from an AC power source (110 or 220 V, 50/60 Hz, singlephase, 15-Amp maximum current). This AC current is also used at the microcellsite to provide backup AC power generation or Uninterrupted Power Supply(UPS).

When several Microcells are co-located, such as when three units are clusteredon a pole, the power feed to the microcell may be fed by a single feeder circuit upthe pole, then distributed from a junction box near the microcells.

Issue 15 July 2002 7-65


Cell Site Types

DC Power

A DC power plant for a microcell typically consists of an AC-to-DC converter(PDC) and a battery. To minimize voltage drops, the DC power source (+25 to +28Vdc) should be located as near to the microcell as possible.

When several microcells are co-located, such as when three units are clusteredon a pole, the power feed to the microcell may be fed by a single feeder circuit upthe pole, then distributed from a junction box near the microcells.

Note also that when the Microcell is supplied with DC current, a minimal amountof AC is still needed to drive the convenience AC receptacles.

Battery Backup

An optional battery for backup during minor AC power outages can be providedfor the microcell. This battery supplies current for up to 1 minute to cover brief ACoutages or voltage dips.

The optional battery backup is recharged and monitored by the PCU of theMicrocell.

Common Ancillary Equipment

Additional ancillary equipment (such as depicted in the typical example ofFigure 7-24 on page 7-66.) is available to support the microcell. In the exampledepicted, the microcell is supplied with DC current from a co-located DC powersystem.

7-66 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 7-24. Common Ancillary Equipment Example

Power Distribution Cabinet

The optional Power Distribution Cabinet (PDC) contains circuit breakers andsurge protectors. Sites without a PDC must provide their own surge protection inaddition to their own power distribution system.

The PDC is available in two different models to support single and multiple cellinstallations (see Figure 7-25 on page 7-67).

AC Service Panel

Any equipment that is connected to the electric utility AC lines must have a localAC service panel that provides a power meter and branch circuit breakers.Besides supporting the microcell (and possibly a DC power system) the servicepanel may need to have branch circuits for additional equipment, such as a toweraircraft warning light.

Tower LightAntennas

GPS Tx/Rx Rx

Microcell

GFI

Non-GFI

PrimaryAC

Feed

ACServicePanel(Meter,

Breakers)DC

PowerDistribution

Cabinet(AC to DC)

Battery

TX Test Port

DC

PeripheralBus

Frame Alarms

T1/E1VoiceMaint. PortUser Alarms

CraftAccess

AC

Issue 15 July 2002 7-67


Cell Site Types

Figure 7-25. PDC Cabinet Diagrams

Antenna Options

Microcells can be provided with one GPS antenna and any of the followingantenna configurations:

■ Two (one duplex Rx/Tx and one Rx) RF antennas. (The duplex RF antennaprovides combined transmit and receive.)

■ Three (one Tx and two Rx) RF antennas.

These antennas can be

■ mounted directly to the microcell

■ mounted remotely, and then cabled to the microcell

■ integrated within the front panel of the microcell

The Microcell can operate with either a short circuit or an open circuit at theantenna port without sustaining damage.

RMT Peripheral Busand Voice Ports Clock Ports

RF Test Port

ConvenienceOutlet

MicrocellHeater

Microcell

AC Generator(Optional)

MainDisconnect

87654321

OSP CPE

ACProtect

Single PDC (120/240 Volt, 3 Wire)

87654321

OSP CPE

ACProtect

OSP CPE

109

1817161514131211

2019

Multiple PDC

7-68 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Craft Access Housing

When the microcell is mounted on a pole or high on a wall, the craft access portsmay be routed to a secure “craft access housing” at the base of the installation.

Depending on the type of configuration, this housing may provide access to

■ T1/E1 lines

■ an RJ11 voice jack

■ an RJ45 Ethernet maintenance port

■ a terminal strip for user alarms

This housing may also contain any needed facilities interface equipment, such asNetwork Interface Units (NIUs), HDSL modems, Customer-Provided CSUs, andso on.

This equipment may also need to draw DC power from a DC power system. ThePCU of the Microcell does not supply power to external equipment.

User Interface

Support of the Microcell requires the technician to be able to

■ monitor microcell operation

■ interact with the Microcell to perform routine and corrective maintenancetasks

These abilities are provided through a microcell user interface. Two different typesof user interfaces are available to the technician:

■ Remote Maintenance Terminal (RMT) - A software package loaded on alaptop computer designed to support a specific set of scripted functions.The RMT is a Windows NT-based Graphical User Interface (GUI)specifically designed for use in the Flexent® product line.

■ ECP-based interface - Uses connections to the MSC to provide informationpertinent to the microcell. It connects directly to the MSC through a UNIX-based user interface. The ECP-based interface is compatible with theinterfaces to Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks.

RMT-Based Interface

The RMT-based interface is an optional, self-contained software package thatexecutes scripted operation and maintenance routines (macros). It is designed tointeract with the cell even in the absence of a connection to the MSC.

Issue 15 July 2002 7-69


Cell Site Types

The RMT provides two sets of functionalities:

■ Connections to the MSC through the Application Processor Cluster (APC)to control the microcell

■ MSC emulation to test microcell “health” without requiring actualconnection to the MSC

ECP-Based Interface

The ECP-based interface is made up of a number of different displays (craftshellor Technician Interface (TI), Read Only Printer (ROP) and Status Display Pages(SDPs).

The craftshell interface and the SDP are two different ways to seek and act uponinformation pertinent to microcell performance.

Although the interface behavior and display are not the same, the information thatis returned is identical in scope. Craftshell results are displayed in real time, whileSDP displays are updated at preset intervals.

Output to both interfaces is recorded on the ROP, which is a continuous listing ofall system activities.

The functions provided by the ECP interface are as follows:

■ SDP: This is primarily a Graphical User Interface. SDPs are specificallydesigned to provide a snapshot of the status of a microcell and of itssystem environment.

■ Craftshell: The craftshell interface, also referred to as the TechnicianInterface (TI) is exclusively a UNIX-based, line command interface. Thecraftshell is specifically designed for line command input and messageoutput. A dedicated window in the SDPs supports craftshell operation.

■ Read Only Printer (ROP): This is exclusively a running report of systemsactivities.

The functions of these interfaces are complementary. In particular, theinterpretation of a cell condition reported by an SDP will often require reference tothe ROP to identify the cause of that condition. For instance, the ROP will indicatewhat event (for example, manual command) resulted in a component to be shownon an SDP as being out-of-service.

7-70 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

CDMA Technology

The interior construction and components of a CDMA microcell are shown inFigure 7-26 on page 7-70.

Figure 7-26. CDMA Microcell Interior

Functional Overview

Functionally, the microcell can be described in terms of circuit packs connected bycommunication buses.

Circuit Packs

The Microcell is supported by the following five circuit packs:

■ CDMA Radio Complex (CRC)

■ CDMA Channel Units (CCU)

■ CDMA Baseband Radio (CBR)

■ Time Frequency Unit (TFU)

■ RF Amplifier (Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) on the Receive Path and TransmitAmplifier (Tx Amp) on the Transmit Path)

Issue 15 July 2002 7-71


Cell Site Types

These circuit packs provide the following functions:

■ Manage a signaling and control interface to the RCS application instancethat executes on an AP (MC).

■ Pass signaling and control to/from the RCS from/to other microcellsconnected to it in a daisy-chain.

■ Route packet pipe to appropriate processing modules in a microcell.

■ Collect and pass alarm and status information from the microcellcomponents to the RCS application.

■ Perform operations, administration, and maintenance control of themicrocell, under the control of an RCS instance.

■ Perform microcell initialization, coordinated by the RCS.

Communication Buses

The microcell’s components and processors communicate through two buses, asshown in Figure 7-27 on page 7-72. These buses perform the following functions:

■ The high bit-rate packet bus carries high data-rate information, such astraffic packets, between the CRC and CCU-20 components.

■ The lower bit-rate serial bus, which is also cakked the peripheral bus,supports OA&M communication with the other (non CCU-20) componentsof the cell site.

Channel Elements

The microcell supports up to 40 Channel Elements (CEs) provided by two CCUs(20 per CCU). The CEs provide the channel coding and decoding functions.

The channels consist of a mix of 38 traffic channels (18 per CCU) and twooverhead channels (one per CCU) associated with pilot/synchronization/accessand paging.

End-to-End Communication Codes

The CDMA transmission process uses several codes to ensure end-to-endcommunication.

Long Code

The Long Code is used to encrypt the content of the transmitted signal, and thusensures privacy.

7-72 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 7-27. CDMA Microcell Signal Flow

Pilot Channel PN Code

The mobile uses the Pilot Channel PN code to identify the antenna and the basestation with which the mobile is communicating.

Walsh Code

The Walsh code is used to uniquely define individual communication channels.

Walsh codes are “orthogonal” mathematical codes. As such, if two Walsh codesare correlated, the result is intelligible only if these two codes are the same. As aresult, a Walsh-encoded signal appears as random noise to a PCS CDMAcapable mobile terminal, unless that terminal uses the same code as the oneused to encode the incoming signal.

maintenanceport (Ethernet)

peripheral bus

Packetbus

T1/E1 CDMAdatalines

CRC CBRCCU-20

CCU-20

AMP Filter,Couplers

CTRM

Tx/Rx

Rx

GPS

OM

RF

RF

frame and useralarms

19.6608 MHz/EvenSecTic

15 MHz reference

CTRM control

TFU

digit

reference

RF

CRC: CDMA Radio ControllerCCU: CDMA Channel Unit (20 Channel Elements per board)CBR: CDMA Baseband RadioTFU: Time/Frequency UnitAmp: Transmit RF Power AmplifierCTRM: CDMA Test Radio Module

Issue 15 July 2002 7-73


Cell Site Types

Channel Types

CDMA transmissions require the following two types of channels:

■ Supervision channels (Pilot, Paging, Sync)

■ Traffic (Voice) channels

Each channel is assigned a specific Walsh code. The supervision channelsoperate at pre-set power, using 22% of the total transmit power available. Trafficchannels share the remaining 78% of the transmit power.

Pilot Channel

The pilot channel (Walsh code 0) is transmitted at all times by the microcell site oneach active carrier. The following actions take place:

■ The CDMA mobile constantly monitors the pilot channel and measures thesignal strength of the pilot signal.

■ Prior to origination, the mobile monitors the pilot channel and estimates thepower level to use for origination (open-loop power control).

■ The mobile unit also assists the microcell site in the handoff process bymeasuring and reporting the strengths of the received pilot signals.

Because the power of the pilot channel determines the initial power of themobile’s transmitting origination, page response, or autonomous registrationmessages, its relative power level is adjustable.

The maximum power of the pilot channel is 1.2W (or 108 dgu (Digital Gain Units)representing 15% of the 8W total power.

Sync Channel

The sync channel (Walsh code 32) is used by mobile units that operate within thecoverage area of the microcell site to acquire initial time synchronization. Thesync channel transmits at 1200 bps, and its function is assigned to the same CEas the pilot for the microcell site.

The nominal strength of the sync channel is 0.12 W (34DGUs) or 1.5% of totalpower.

7-74 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Paging Channels

Paging channels (Walsh codes 1 to 7) are used by the microcell site to transmitsystem overhead information and mobile-specific information (such as pages) tothe mobiles. The characteristics of the paging channels are as follows:

■ Walsh code 1 is assigned to the primary paging channel.

■ Paging channel are divided into 2048 80-ms timeslots.

■ They transmit data at either 9600 or 4800 kbps.

■ They are assigned to specific CEs at the microcell.

Mobiles may monitor either all slots (non-slotted mode operation) or only certainslots (slotted mode operation). The slotted mode is required for optional mobilefeatures such as sleep mode.

Because there may be one or as many as seven paging channels from microcellto microcell, an unused paging channel may be used randomly by the microcell tohandle voice traffic.

The strength of paging channels is 0.44 W (64DGUs), or 5.5% of a total 8Wsignal.

Access Channel

The access channel is used to receive various types of messages from themobiles, such as call origination requests, autonomous registrations, and pageresponses. Functionally, it is the reverse of the paging channel. Physically, it is onthe receive side of the CE used for the pilot and sync channels.

Traffic Channels

The rest of the CDMA Walsh codes (or 78%) will be used to carry voice traffic.

Issue 15 July 2002 7-75


Cell Site Types

TDMA Technology

Functional Overview

Functionally, the microcell can be described in terms of circuit packs connected bycommunication buses.

Circuit Packs

Most of the microcell functions are supported by the following two circuit packs:

■ The TDMA Radio Controller (TRC) provides the major microcell externalinterfaces and overall control. Its functions are as follows:

— It handles the physical interface between the MSC and microcellthrough T1 specific interface hardware. That hardware also supportsadditional functions providing higher layer termination for HDLCprotocols and the TDMA packet pipe.

— It controls microcell initialization, diagnostics, NVM download, alarmprocessing, and maintenance/test port support.

■ The Dual Radio Module (DRM) provides all of the processing necessary to:

— Communicate with the TDMA air interface to manage the TDMADigital Traffic Channel (DTC) and the Digital Control Channel(DCCH).

— Control the Digital Signal Processors (DSPs).

— Control RF hardware.

— Handle processing for locate channels and local OA&M functionssuch as boot-up self test, diagnostics, and maintenance.

A DRM has the capacity to process two RF carriers, each carrier having threetime slots. A microcell may have from one to five DRMs.

Communication Buses

The microcell uses two different communication buses:

■ The Concentration Highway (CHI) is a traffic bus that connects the TRCand the DRM(s). The CHI bus carries all voice, data, and digital controlchannel information between the TRC and DRMs. The CHI is also used tocarry packet pipes and control messages to their destination devices.

■ The peripheral bus is a serial connection used by the TRC to communicatewith the transmit amplifier.

Links between microcell components are shown in Figure 7-28 on page 7-76.

7-76 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 7-28. TDMA Microcell Signal Flow

DRM

DRM

DRM

DRM

DRM

DRM

TRCT1/E1

Maintenance& Voice

Alarms

Backplane

CHI Bus

Communications Control Alarms

MCLA

Spl

itter

s/C

ombi

ners LNAs

Alarms

Peripheral Bus

TOM(15-MHz)

Filter/Duplexer

Alarms

Alarmsto TRC Power

Supply

I/OModule

AC & Battery

ExternalEquipment

DC Voltages

to TRCT1/E1, etc.

Issue 15 July 2002 7-77


Cell Site Types

CHI Bus

The Concentration Highway (CHI) bus is a full-duplex, serial time divisionmultiplexed (TDM) bus designed for voice/data traffic in a communicationssystem, driven by a 4-MHz clock.

The CHI bus carries the following four signals:

■ Transmit

■ Receive

■ 8-kHz frame

■ 4.096-MHz bit clock

The frame and clock signals are common to all devices and are generated by theTRC. These signals are carried by four differential wire pairs on the backplaneboard. The correct slot used to transmit and receive is set in software in order toavoid transmission collisions with other CHI bus drivers in the network. Themicrocell CHI bus interfaces with the DRM processors. The CHI is organized into64 channels.

Connections. The CHI bus connects all of the DRMs and the TRC processors.Each DRM uses two time slots for traffic and seven time slots for control(signaling).

In the microcell, CHI slot assignments are selected by the DRM processors basedon reading the slot number field from the backplane.

Peripheral Bus

The bus runs under the Attached Resource Computer Network (ARCNET) TokenBus Standard at a rate of 1.25 Mbps.

The peripheral bus can support up to 32 devices.

The peripheral bus lines are buffered (RS-485) on entering/leaving a circuit pack,and are tri-stated to allow hot insertion without disruption of the bus.

External Access

In addition to the TRC and MCLA, the peripheral bus also extends to an externalmicrocell I/O connector through the IOM from a connector on the backplane.

The connector can be used for maintenance and testing.

Surge and ESD protection are provided by the IOM.

7-78 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

CDMA Modular base station Sites

A CDMA Modular base station is one of the network elements responsible forproviding an air interface between a mobile terminal, for example, cellulartelephone, and the Mobile Switching Center (MSC).

Modular base stations are designed to support different topologies, frequencies,power, antenna and environmental configurations.

External Structure

Modular base stations are contained in a cabinet structure as shown in Figure 7-29 on page 7-80.

External Physical Characteristics

Modular base stations have been designed with the following external physicalcharacteristics:

■ All input/output antenna connections are done through the top of the cell.

■ The front of the cell supports a heat exchanger.

■ Latches ensure weatherproof closing of the cell. The latch can be locked toprotect against unauthorized access.

Issue 15 July 2002 7-79


Cell Site Types

Specifications

The following table identifies the basic specifications for the Modular base station.

Connection and Control

Modular base stations are connected to the MSC, via DS1 facilities providedbetween the Modular base station and the MSC’s Digital Cellular Switch (DCS)(see Figure 7-30 on page 7-80).

Control information is passed between the MSC and the Modular base stationthrough the Radio Cluster Server (RCS) of an MSC’s Application Processor (AP),via DS0 signaling channels (see Figure 7-30 on page 7-80).

Table 7-5. CDMA Modular SpecificationsCategory Indoor Outdoor

Environmental Enclosure designed for indoor or outdoor use. Compliant withBellcore GR-63-CORE, NEBS and UL50.

Dimensions 72” high35” wide28” deep

72” high35” wide36” deep

Weight 1 Carrier 807 lbs2 Carrier 907 lbs3 Carrier 1007 lbsTransport weight in units under600 lbs.

1 Carrier 986 lbs2 Carrier 1086 lbs3 Carrier 1186 lbsTransport weight in units under600 lbs.

Power 24 V DC input. Optional external battery backup.

Temperature +5o C to +40o C -40o C to +46o C (extendedrange to 52o C)

Cabinet Access Full access to cabinet is at thefront. This allows it to beinstalled flush against a wall.

Front and rear access isprovided. All access panels areequipped with hasps.

7-80 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 7-29. CDMA Modular base station Exterior

Figure 7-30. Simplified View of Modular base station-to-MSC Relationship

The DS0 signaling channels are groomed from the DS1 facilities and routedthrough the DCS.

RCS

AP

RCS

AP

DCS

ECPOMP-FX

Modular baseDS0 Signaling Channels DS1s

traffic

Mobile SwitchingCenter (MSC)

Issue 15 July 2002 7-81


Cell Site Types

Environmental Considerations

The thermal management system for Modular base stations that are used inoutdoor applications includes the following:

■ Fan Controller

■ Amplifier Fan Tray Assembly

■ Digital Fan Tray Assembly

■ Heat Exchanger

■ Heaters for component warm-up during cold weather

Functions

In the forward (transmit) direction, the Modular base station performs the followingfunctions:

■ Channel coding

■ Modulation

■ Radio Frequency (RF) up conversion

■ RF amplification

■ Transmission of the traffic over-the-air to the Mobile Terminal (MT)according to the parameters sent down from the RCS.

In the reverse (receive) direction, the Modular base station performs the followingfunctions:

■ Receives traffic from the mobile terminal.

■ Demodulates the traffic signal.

■ Decodes the traffic signal

■ Sends the traffic signal to the DCS.

Antennas

The Modular base station Site supports up to four antennas if simplex transmit isused.

7-82 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Configuration Options

Modular base stations can be configured as sector and carrier (cabled for fullthree sector configuration):

■ Three sector, 1-3 carrier

■ Two sector, 1-3 carrier

The three-carrier/three-sector configuration supports 120 channelelements/carrier for a total of 360 channel elements

Power Provisions

The Modular base station requires an external power supply.

The Modular base station’s Power Converter Unit (PCU) supplies 24 VDC atseveral voltage levels.

AC Power

AC power is required for the outdoor Modular base station to provide power forthe heat exchanger’s heating coils and a convenience outlet. Up to three separateAC feeders can be brought into the primary Modular base station, of which twoprovide 240 Vac for the heat exchanger, and one provides 110 Vac for theconvenience outlet.

The AC power distribution from the power cabinets to the Modular base stationprimary and future growth cabinets is shown in Figure 7-31 on page 7-83

DC Power

The normal voltage measured at the input to the Modular base stationassemblages ranges from +25 to +28 V DC.

The Modular base station’s Transmit Amplifier (ULAM) has a DC to DC converterwhich enables the ULAM to maintain a constant bias voltage as the input voltagevaries within the +25 to +28 V DC range, therefore keeping the RF output powerlevel at a constant as the voltage drops.

Common Ancillary Equipment

An example of a configuration which could be found at Modular base station isshown in Figure 7-31 on page 7-83.

Issue 15 July 2002 7-83


Cell Site Types

Antenna Options

Modular base stations can be provided with one GPS antenna and any of thefollowing antenna configurations:

■ Two (one duplex Rx/Tx and one Rx) RF antennas. (The duplex RF antennaprovides combined transmit and receive.)

■ Three (one Tx and two Rx) RF antennas.

Figure 7-31. Common Modular base station Ancillary Equipment Example

Craft Access Housing

Depending on the type of configuration, this housing may provide access to

■ T1/E1 lines

■ an RJ11 voice jack

■ an RJ45 Ethernet maintenance port

■ a terminal strip for user alarms

This housing may also contain any needed facilities interface equipment, such asNetwork Interface Units (NIUs), HDSL modems, Customer-Provided CSUs.

Tower LightAntennas

GPS Tx/Rx Rx

GFI

Non-GFI

PrimaryAC

FeedPower

Cabinet(AC to DC)

TX Test Port

DC

PeripheralBus

T1/E1VoiceMaint. PortUser Alarms

CraftAccess

AC

Heaters

Modular base

7-84 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

User Interface

Support of the Modular base station requires that the technician be able to do thefollowing:

■ Monitor Modular base station operation.

■ Interact with the Modular base station to perform routine and correctivemaintenance tasks.

These abilities are provided through a Modular base station user interface. Twodifferent types of user interfaces are available to the technician:

■ Remote Maintenance Terminal (RMT) - A software package loaded on alaptop computer designed to support a specific set of scripted functions.The RMT is a Windows NT-based Graphical User Interface (GUI)specifically designed for use in the Flexent® product line.

■ ECP-based interface - Uses connections to the MSC to provide informationpertinent to the Modular base station. It connects directly to the MSCthrough a UNIX-based user interface. The ECP-based interface iscompatible with the interfaces to Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks.

RMT-Based Interface

The RMT-based interface is an optional, self-contained software package thatexecutes scripted operation and maintenance routines (macros). It is designed tointeract with the cell even in the absence of a connection to the MSC.

The RMT provides two sets of functionalities:

■ Connections to the MSC through the Application Processor Cluster (APC)to control the Modular base station

■ MSC emulation to test Modular base station “health” without requiringactual connection to the MSC

ECP-Based Interface

The ECP-based interface is made up of a number of different displays (craftshellor Technician Interface (TI), Read Only Printer (ROP) and Status Display Pages(SDPs).

The craftshell interface and the SDP are two different ways to seek and act uponinformation pertinent to Modular base station performance.

Although the interface behavior and display are not the same, the information thatis returned is identical in scope. Craftshell results are displayed in real time, whileSDP displays are updated at preset intervals.

Issue 15 July 2002 7-85


Cell Site Types

Output to both interfaces is recorded on the ROP, which is a continuous listing ofall system activities.

The functions provided by the ECP interface are as follows:

■ SDP - This is primarily a Graphical User Interface. SDPs are specificallydesigned to provide a snapshot of the status of a Modular base station andof its system environment.

■ Craftshell: The craftshell interface, also referred to as the TechnicianInterface (TI) is exclusively a UNIX-based, line command interface. Thecraftshell is specifically designed for line command input and messageoutput. A dedicated window in the SDPs supports craftshell operation.

■ Read Only Printer (ROP): This is exclusively a running report of systemsactivities.

The functions of these interfaces are complementary. In particular, theinterpretation of a cell condition reported by an SDP will often require reference tothe ROP to identify the cause of that condition. For instance, the ROP will indicatewhat event (for example, manual command) resulted in a component to be shownon an SDP as being out-of-service.

CDMA Technology

The interior construction and components of a CDMA Modular base station areshown in Figure 7-32 on page 7-85.

Figure 7-32. CDMA Modular base station Interior

7-86 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Functional Overview

Functionally, the Modular base station can be described in terms of circuit packsconnected by communication buses.

Circuit Packs

The CDMA Modular base station is supported by five different circuit packs:

■ CDMA Radio Controller (CRC)

■ CDMA Channel Units (CCU)

■ CDMA Baseband Radio (CBR)

■ Time Frequency Unit (TFU)

■ RF Amplifier (Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) on the Receive Path and TransmitAmplifier (Tx Amp) on the Transmit Path)

These circuit packs provide the following functions:

■ Manage a signaling and control interface to the RCS application instancethat executes on an AP (MC).

■ Pass signaling and control to/from the RCS from/to other Modular basestation is connected to it in a daisy-chain.

■ Route packet pipe to appropriate processing modules in a Modular basestation.

■ Collect and pass alarm and status information from the Modular basestation components to the RCS application.

■ Perform operations, administration, and maintenance control of theModular base station, under the control of an RCS instance.

■ Perform Modular base station initialization, coordinated from the RCS.

Communication Buses

The Modular base station’s components and processors communicate throughtwo buses, as shown in Figure 7-33 on page 7-87. The functions of these busesare described as follows:

■ The high bit-rate packet bus carries high data-rate information, such astraffic packets, between the CRC and CCU-20 components.

■ The lower bit-rate serial bus, also termed the peripheral bus, supportsOA&M communication with the other (non CCU-20) components of the cell.

Issue 15 July 2002 7-87


Cell Site Types

Channel Elements

The Modular base station supports up to 18 CCU-20s, each of which contains 20Channel Elements (CEs). Each CDM supports six CCU’s.

Figure 7-33. CDMA Modular base station Signal Flow

The CCU-20s provide the channel coding and decoding functions for a total of upto 360 channels. These channels consist of two overhead channels (pilot/synchronization/ access and paging) per face/carrier, and the remaining CEs areused for traffic channels.

Encoding

The CDMA transmission process uses several codes to ensure end-to-endcommunication.

maintenanceport (Ethernet)

peripheral bus

Packetbus

T1/E1

CDMAdatalines

CRC Filters,Couplers

CTRM

Tx/Rx

Rx

GPS

OM

RF

RF

frame and useralarms

19.6608 MHz/EvenSecTic

15 MHz reference

CTRM control

TFU

digit

reference

RF

CRC: CDMA Radio ControllerCCU: CDMA Channel UnitCBR: CDMA Baseband Radio

TFU: Time/Frequency UnitMCA: Multiple Carrier AmplifierCTRM: CDMA Test Radio Module

CCU-20

CCU-20

CCU-20

CCU-20

CCU-20

CCU-20

MCACBR

CBR

CBR

Rx

CDM 1

7-88 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Long Code

The Long Code is used to encrypt the content of the transmitted signal, and thusensures privacy.

Pilot Channel PN Code

The Pilot Channel PN code is used by the mobile to identify the antenna and thebase station with which the mobile is communicating.

Walsh Code

The Walsh code is used to uniquely define individual communication channels.

Walsh codes are “orthogonal” mathematical codes. As such, if two Walsh codesare correlated, the result is intelligible only if these two codes are the same. As aresult, a Walsh-encoded signal appears as random noise to a PCS CDMAcapable mobile terminal, unless that terminal uses the same code as the oneused to encode the incoming signal.

Channels

CDMA transmissions require two types of channels:

■ Supervision channels (Pilot, Paging, Sync)

■ Traffic (Voice) channels

Each channel is assigned a specific Walsh code. The supervision channelsoperate at pre-set power, using 22% of the total transmit power available. Trafficchannels share the remaining 78% of the transmit power.

Pilot Channel

The pilot channel (Walsh code 0) is transmitted at all times by the Modular basestation site on each active carrier. The following actions take place:

■ The CDMA mobile constantly monitors the pilot channel and measures thesignal strength of the pilot signal.

■ Prior to origination, the mobile monitors the pilot channel and estimates thepower level to use for origination (open-loop power control).

■ The mobile unit also assists the Modular base station site in the handoffprocess by measuring and reporting the strengths of the received pilotsignals.

Issue 15 July 2002 7-89


Cell Site Types

Because the power of the pilot channel determines the initial power of themobile’s transmitting origination, page response, or autonomous registrationmessages, its relative power level is adjustable.

The maximum power of the pilot channel is 1.2W (or 108 dgu (Digital Gain Units)representing 15% of the 8W total power.

Sync Channel

The sync channel (Walsh code 32) is used by mobile units operating within thecoverage area of the Modular base station site to acquire initial timesynchronization. The sync channel transmits at 1200 bps, and its function isassigned to the same CE as the pilot for the Modular base station site.

The nominal strength of the sync channel is 0.12 W (34DGUs) or 1.5% of totalpower.

Paging Channels

Paging channels (Walsh codes 1 to 7) are used by the Modular base station siteto transmit system overhead information and mobile-specific information (such aspages) to the mobiles. The characteristics of the paging channels are as follows:

■ Walsh code 1 is assigned to the primary paging channel

■ Paging channel are divided into 2048 80-ms timeslots.

■ They transmit data at either 9600 or 4800 kbps

■ They are assigned to specific CEs at the Modular base station.

Mobiles may monitor either all slots (non-slotted mode operation) or only certainslots (slotted mode operation). The slotted mode is required for optional mobilefeatures such as sleep mode.

Because there may be one or as many as seven paging channels from Modularbase station to Modular base station, an unused paging channel may be usedrandomly by the Modular base station to handle voice traffic.

The strength of paging channels is 0.44 W (64DGUs), or 5.5% of a total 8Wsignal.

Access Channel

The access channel is used to receive various types of messages from themobiles, such as call origination requests, autonomous registrations, and pageresponses. Functionally, it is the reverse of the paging channel. Physically, it is onthe receive side of the CE used for the pilot and sync channels.

7-90 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Traffic Channels

The rest of the CDMA Walsh codes (or 78%) will be used to carry voice traffic.

Flexent® CDMA Distributed BaseStation

The Flexent® CDMA Distributed Base Station provides a compact, low-cost basestation with flexible mounting options. The Flexent CDMA Distributed Base StationStation features the following:

■ Two basic modules to allow for modular growth:

— RF Unit (RFU)

— Baseband Unit (BBU)

■ Front access of the BBU for field upgrades and repairs

■ Treatment of the RFU as a Field replaceable Unit (FRU)

■ A variety of mounting options, i.e., pole, tower and wall

■ Utilization of up to two T1/E1 lines to exchange traffic and control data withthe switch

■ Support of up to 120 CDMA channel elements per BBU

■ Operation in PCS and Cellular frequencies

■ Sixteen watts of power in both the PCS and Cellular Bands

■ Sector and carrier configurations:

— 1 sector, 1-2 carrier



— 4 sector, 1 carrier

— 6 sector, 1 carrier

■ Support of simplex or duplex antenna configurations

■ Support of local and remote service provider diagnostics and alarmanalysis capabilities

■ Future growth to omni sector

■ Future growth to CDMA 2000 application

Issue 15 July 2002 7-91


Cell Site Types

Series II Cell Site Antennas

The design of the Series II cell site allow for omnidirectional, directional, and GPSantennas.

Omnidirectional Antenna

The omnidirectional antennas (see Figure 7-34 on page 7-92) are high-gain andvertically polarized. The power gain (averaged over 360 degrees) relative to thehalf-wave dipole is 9.0 dB. Omnidirectional antennas are end-supported butelectrically center-fed, which minimizes the antenna pattern squint angle changeover the frequency band. The antennas are approximately 14 feet long (includingthe mounting) and are placed in a 3-inch diameter fiberglass housing, providingstructural rigidity and weather protection.

The omnidirectional antennas are typically mounted at the corners of a triangularplatform at the top of a free-standing steel mast, as shown in Figure 7-34 onpage 7-92. Additional omnidirectional antennas may be mounted at the center ofeach face. Lucent Technologies offers several free-standing mast heights, up to150 feet.

In the basic all-omnidirectional configuration, up to six voice channel transmitantennas, one setup transmit antenna, and two receiving antennas are used. Thereceiving antennas feed all cell site voice channel radios, setup radios, andlocating radios. Note that a combination of the all-omnidirectional configurationmay be used with some combination of the 3-face/6-face directional configuration.

7-92 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 7-34. Omnidirectional Antenna

ANTENNA ARRANGEMENT(MAXIMUM CONFIGURATION)

TYPICALOMNIDIRECTIONAL

SETUPANTENNA

ACCESS PORT

WINCHLINEPORT

RADOME(DIELECTRICCOVER)

T2

T T T T0354

T1

CABLE PORT

Issue 15 July 2002 7-93


Cell Site Types

Directional Antenna

The directional antennas are vertically polarized and operate in the “azimuthal”direction. They have a power gain at the antenna beam center of approximately8.0 dB relative to a half-wave dipole. The maximum minor lobe level of theradiation patterns, in both the horizontal and vertical planes, does not exceed 15dB (compared to the maximum radiation level of the main lobe).

Directional antennas are mounted on each face of the platform, behind contoureddielectric covers. See Figure 7-35 on page 7-94. This enhances the appearanceof the antenna assembly and protects the antennas from ice. The antenna mastand platform assembly is designed to minimize deflection which could shift thevertical antenna pattern. The two major sources of deflection are wind and unevensolar heating of the steel mast. The antenna system was designed to meet twowind criteria: full performance under normal wind conditions and survival underextreme conditions (such as winds up to 100 miles per hour), with limitedperformance degradation. For special conditions, other mast designs areavailable.

In all systems, setup radios are fed from omnidirectional antennas. In the basicall-directional configuration, one omnidirectional setup transmit antenna and twoomnidirectional setup receive antennas are used. The directional antennas arelocated behind the radome cover of each face. Each face has a minimum of onetransmitting antenna and two receiving antennas. One or two transmit antennasmay be used with each face.

GPS Antenna

In addition to the omnidirectional and directional antenna, the CDMA Series II cellsite also uses a GPS antenna. The GPS antenna is separate from all other cellsite antennas and is approximately one foot high. The GPS antenna can beplaced anywhere near the cell site that is appropriate for the best reception of therequired number of GPS satellites. The antenna is usually mounted on the outsideof a building, not on a tower (see Figure 7-36 on page 7-95).

Any obstacles blocking the antenna’s view of the hemisphere could result indeteriorated performance. For further information, see Base Station CDMAReference Frequency Timing Generator and GPS Antenna System Description,Operation, Installation and Maintenance, 401-660-128.

Antenna Mast

Various antenna masts and mounting arrangements are available. “Guyed” and“un-guyed” towers are also available at various heights.

7-94 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 7-35. Directional Antenna

The antenna mast is normally 150 feet high for omnidirectional cell sites and 100feet high for directional cell sites. A 130-foot mast is also available to conform withFAA requirements for some areas. Some cell sites may not require the 100-, 130-,or 150-foot mast. Mast heights of 40, 60, 75, or 85 feet are also available.

Also, roof masts are available for mounting antennas on the top of buildings.Existing structures, or towers, may be used to mount the antennas; however, suchinstallations are nonstandard and must be individually job-engineered.

A conduit assembly is installed inside the mast, with an individual conduit pipe foreach cable. This conduit assembly makes for a more orderly installation of cablesand makes replacement and adding of new cables easier. As an option, the mastmay be installed without the conduit assembly.

TRANSMITTINGANTENNAS

ANTENNASRECEIVING

R

T

R

T

T

R

TYPICAL DIRECTIONALANTENNA ARRANGEMENT

(MAXIMUM CONFIGURATION)

DIRECTIONALRECEIVEANTENNA

DIRECTIONALTRANSMITANTENNAS

DIRECTIONALRECEIVEANTENNA SETUP

TRANSMITANTENNA

SETUPRECEIVEANTENNAS

T

R

Issue 15 July 2002 7-95


Cell Site Types

Figure 7-36. GPS Antenna and Satellite

Ideally, the mast is assembled on the ground and erected with a crane. However,vertical assembly of the mast is possible where space is not available to assemblethe mast on the ground.

Series II Filters

In Series II, the transmit and receive filter panels are located in the AIF, along withalarm and power distribution, reference frequency generator, calibrationgenerator, and RTU switch.

Series II RF Transmission

The RF transmission lines to the antennas are either pressurized air-dielectric orsolid foam-dielectric coaxial cables. Cables to the omnidirectional receive and thetransmit setup antennas are 1-5/8 inches in diameter with a loss characteristic of0.0065 dB per foot; all other antenna cables are 7/8 inch in diameter with a losscharacteristic of 0.012 dB per foot. Receive voice channel distribution inside the

GPS Satellite

Mobile 1

Mobile 2

Control

SpeechPackets

MSC

Cell Site

R0R1Tx

GPS Antennaon Building

7-96 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

cell site building is carried on flexible coax. When optional air-dielectric cables areused, the antennas and antenna cables are pressurized by air-dryer equipmentlocated in the cell site building.

Antenna Options

The following antenna options are available:

■ Ground-mounted masts (40 psf wind loading) — 150 feet, 130 feet, 100feet

■ Ground-mounted masts (50 psf wind loading) — 150 feet, 130 feet, 100feet, 85 feet, 75 feet, 60 feet, 40 feet

■ Roof masts — 40 feet, 35 feet, 30 feet, 25 feet, 20 feet, 15 feet, 10 feet, 6feet

■ Roof frames

■ Frame towers

■ Conduit assembly for routing cables through center of mast

■ Omnidirectional antennas

■ Directional antennas

■ Air dielectric, pressurized cables

■ Pressurization equipment

■ Foam-filled, nonpressurized cables

■ Side-mounted aircraft warning lights

■ Top-mounted aircraft warning lights

■ Optional wall mounting of alarm panel

■ Diversity receive omni antennas.

Lucent Technologies’ Cellular Engineering Group can design specialantenna-mounting arrangements.

Issue 15 July 2002 7-97


Cell Site Types

Related Documents

The following documents provide information on cell site operations,administration, and maintenance.

Series II Cell Site Description, Operation, and Maintenance, 401-660-102

Flexent® CDMA Microcell Operation, Administration, and Maintenance,401-703-342

Flexent® TDMA Microcell Operation, Administration, and Maintenance,401-703-347

Flexent® CDMA and PCS CDMA Modular Base Station Operation,Administration, and Maintenance, 401-710-122

Flexent® One BTS for TDMA Networks Operation, Administration, andMaintenance, 401-703-369

7-98 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Contents



8Power Products

Introduction 8-1

MSC Power Products 8-2

■ DC Power Products 8-2■ AC Power Products 8-5

Series II Cell Site Power Products 8-6

■ DC Power Products 8-6■ AC Power Products 8-8



401-610-006

Contents



8Power Products

Introduction

This chapter describes the power products for the MSC and Series II cell sites.

The ECP and DCS operate, primarily, on 48 V DC. Certain peripherals at theMSC, including the tape and disk drives, DCS auxiliary cabinet, line printer, andvideo terminals use 120 V AC. The cell site radio and control equipment uses +24V DC.

The AC power to the MSC and cell site buildings is covered in Chapter 15,“Building Requirements, Equipment Specifications, and Floor Plans.”



401-610-006

MSC Power Products

Power products offered with the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks consistof AC and DC power systems for the MSC and cell sites.

DC Power Products

The DC power for the MSC is provided by a 48 V DC power plant. This powerplant may be a J85500A LINEAGE 2000 battery plant (described in 115-007,Plant Manual) or equivalent.

The LINEAGE 2000 (or J85500A) microprocessor-controlled battery plant isshown in Figure 8-1 on page 8-3, and it shows the use of the 200-amp, 3-phaserectifier.



Power Products

Figure 8-1. LINEAGE 2000 Microprocessor-Controlled System Battery Plant with200 -Amp, 3-Phase Rectifiers

(THREE-PHASE)200 AMP RECTIFIERS

CONTROL CABINET

DISTRIBUTIONLOAD

PANEL

LOAD

CONTROLLERSMART PLANT

PANELSDISTRIBUTION



401-610-006

The LINEAGE 2000 battery plant, with backup batteries, consists of the followingunits:

■ Plant controller (with optional Microprocessor Controlled System [MCS]controller) described in 115-010, MCS Controller Manual

■ Rectifiers (3-phase, 200-amp or 1-phase, 125-amp) [described in 115-014,Rectifiers Manual)

■ Battery string (24 cells) — KS-20472 LINEAGE 2000 premium round cells(described in 157-629-701, LINEAGE 2000 Round Cell Battery ProductManual) or KS-15544 square cells (described in 157-601-701, StorageBattery Lead-Acid Type Requirements and Procedures).

The LINEAGE 2000 battery plant provides float and recharge capability and isfully automatic. Normally, all rectifiers are operated from commercial power tosupply the MSC load and to float the battery. After a commercial power failure hasoccurred and power is restored, the rectifiers automatically recharge the batteryand resume normal float regulation.

The LINEAGE 2000 battery plant may be equipped with premium round-cellbatteries or conventional square-cell batteries. The LINEAGE 2000 premiumround cells have advantages over square cells and other types of batteries in thatthey have increased safety features, longer life, the current capacity increaseswith age, and they have low maintenance requirements. The battery has 24 cellsper string with 2.17 volts per cell for a total of 52.08 volts. Additional strings ofbatteries may be used to increase the period of emergency protection. For atypical MSC, the battery holdover time is approximately four hours.

An optional microprocessor controller monitors the plant current, voltage, alarms,status, and so on. The controller determines load current, float, and rechargerequirements. Individual rectifiers are monitored and checked continuously forrectifier data, status, output current, alarms, and malfunctions. Periodically, themicroprocessor runs a self-diagnostic test and a system test to detectmalfunctions. The status of the plant may also be monitored remotely.

The following are LINEAGE 2000 battery plant options:

■ Conventional LINEAGE 2000 Battery Plant

■ MCS LINEAGE 2000 with remote and nonremote options.

The LINEAGE 2000 battery plant uses 3-phase, 200-amp rectifiers or 1-phase,125-amp rectifiers to power an ECP, IMS, and DCS. The total number of rectifiersused depends on the current drain and the current capacity of the power plant.



Power Products

Approximate DC current drain of MSC equipment is as follows:

■ ECP Tape/Disk Cabinet: 48 V at 31 amps

■ ECP Processors 0 and 1 Cabinet Bays: 48 V at 110 amps

■ IMS Cabinet: 48 V at 39 amps.

! CAUTION:These figures should not be used alone in sizing the power plant. Fusingand wiring need to be taken into consideration. The power plant should besized by the design organization.

For 5ESS® DCS power requirements, refer to 235-990-114 and 235-390-100(international) documents.

AC Power Products

Lucent Technologies uninterruptible power supply (UPS) and inverter systemprovide protected AC as shown in Table 8-1 on page 8-5.

The AC reserve may be supplied in the form of an emergency diesel alternator.

The AC power specification for the MSC is provided in Chapter 15, “BuildingRequirements, Equipment Specifications, and Floor Plans.”

Table 8-1. UPS Protected AC Power Supply

UPS Input Output

360, 500 VA

1, 2 KVA

3, 5, 10, 20 KVA

102 V AC

208 or 240

102 V

120/208/240 V AC

Inverters

500 VA,

1, 2, 3, 5, 10 KVA

-48 V DC 120/220/230/240 V AC



401-610-006

Series II Cell Site Power Products

DC Power Products

The DC power for a Series II cell site is provided by a LINEAGE 2000 (J85500E)Evolutionary Control System (ECS) power plant or equivalent. The LINEAGE2000 ECS, shown in Figure 8-2 on page 8-7, has Data Logger and VoiceResponse features.



Power Products

Figure 8-2. LINEAGE 2000 ECS Power Plant with 12 - 100-Amp Rectifiers

AT&T

AT&T

LINEAGE 2000



401-610-006

The Series II cell site battery plant provides +24 V DC. The LINEAGE 2000 powersystem is the ideal system for Series II cell sites. Its modular design allows it toeasily grow from 200A to 1200A. It is controlled by an internal controller.

The system can run on single or three-phase power. The LINEAGE 2000 powerplant has ability to power up a fully equipped 200-channel, 6-sector cell site in ourstandard prefabricated building. Batteries may be used to provide backup powerto protect the cell site in case of power failure. One battery string will provideseveral hours of backup for a lightly equipped system and approximately 10minutes of battery backup for a fully equipped system. Options available with thispower plant are:

■ Controller microprocessor pack

■ Up to 12 rectifiers (100-amp each)

■ Battery string.

The cell site battery plant provides float and recharge capability and is fullyautomatic. Normally, all rectifiers are operated from commercial power to supplythe cell site load and float the battery. After a commercial power failure hasoccurred and power is restored, the rectifiers automatically recharge the batteryand resume normal float regulation. The cell site battery plant may be equippedwith premium round-cell batteries, square cell batteries, the smaller valveregulated lead-acid batteries or other equivalent.

Approximate current drain of cell site equipment is as follows:

■ Primary Radio Channel Frame: 122 A at 24 V (56 RCUs)

■ Growth Radio Channel Frame: 122 A at 24 V (72 RCUs)

■ Linear Amplifier Frame: 352 A at 24 V (4 LACs)

■ Antenna Interface Frame: 10 A at 24 V (6-sector configuration).

The J85500E power plants have been tested with, and are considered part of, thetransmitter and receiver at the cell sites. A change in the power supply willinvalidate the FCC-type acceptance of the transmitter and receiver. Any change inthe power plant should be done with the approval of the Lucent Technologiesdesign organization.

AC Power Products

The AC reserve may be supplied in the form of an emergency diesel alternator.

The AC power specifications for cell site buildings is provided in Chapter 15,“Building Requirements, Equipment Specifications, and Floor Plans.”

Contents



9Cellular Engineering

Introduction 9-1

Planning 9-1

■ Locating Cell Sites and MSC 9-2■ System Layout 9-2■ FCC Application 9-3■ CGSA Planning 9-3

Cellular Configurations 9-4

■ Cochannel Cell Layout 9-4CDMA Impact on Frequency Reuse 9-4

■ Start-up Cell Configuration 9-5CDMA Impact on Start-up 9-7

Guard Bands and Guard Zones 9-7Handoffs 9-8Capacity 9-9

■ Growth 9-9CDMA Impact on Growth 9-13



401-610-006

Contents



9Cellular Engineering

Introduction

This chapter provides an overview of engineering considerations for cell sites.These considerations include location, system layout, and cellular configurationas well as specific considerations for Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA).

Planning

In the initial planning phase, the system operator, makes decisions concerning thearea and the service population. You may already have a fairly good idea of howlarge an area you will be serving and the traffic potential in your CellularGeographic Service Area (CGSA). Market studies must then be completed todefine, more precisely, the expected traffic in the CGSA. Then a cellular analysisis completed to plan for cell type and size, frequency planning, and so on. Acomputer program, WatchMark Prospect™is used to provide theserecommendations.

Based on those factors you can determine where to locate the cell sites and MSC,based on available real estate, possible tower locations, and so on. Finally, youmust file for a construction permit with the FCC. Assistance can be provided toyou by Lucent Technologies, especially in the area of cellular engineering, toenable you to plan your system and complete the FCC application.



401-610-006

Locating Cell Sites and MSC

In planning cell site and the MSC locations, you will probably want to takeadvantage of property which is already available to you. The cell site locationdepends on many factors besides real estate, including possible locations forantenna towers. In mounting cell site antennas, you may take advantage ofexisting towers, but you should take into account the shielding effect of mountingthe antenna on the side of a tower. Standard AUTOPLEX masts, which providethe best possible mounting for antennas, are available. Roof mounts are alsoavailable. To maximize coverage, an RF engineer should be consulted early in theplanning process.

Lucent Technologies offers the following cellular engineering services:

■ assist you in laying out the cell sites

■ determine RF propagation characteristics for each cell site

■ recommend the proper number of channels for each cell

■ recommend the right equipment for your needs

■ plan for future growth of your system.

Lucent Technologies can also provide technical information that you need to filethe FCC application for a construction permit.

System Layout

Basic questions that you should consider when you lay out your system includethe following:

■ Will you be serving more than one CGSA?

■ How many subscribers will you be serving at each CGSA?

■ Will you have more than one DCS?

■ Will a DCS be co-located with the ECP?

■ Will a cell site be co-located with the DCS?

■ How many cell sites will you need with each DCS?

■ How many channels will you need at each cell site?

■ Will you anticipate the growth of cell sites and plan for additional channels?

■ Do you plan any future cell sites?

■ Will you plan for any directional cell sites?

■ Will you plan for any dual (dual omni, dual directional, or dual omni/directional) cell sites?



Cellular Engineering

■ Do you need a multimodule DCS?

■ How many DCS data links will you need?

■ How many data links will you need between IMS and cell sites?

■ How many voice trunks will you need between each cell site and DCS?

■ How many voice trunks will you need between each DCS and network?

■ Do you plan to have redundancy options in the DCS?

■ Do you plan redundancy options at the cell sites?

■ Do you plan to use the dynamic power control option?

■ What other options will you want at the MSC or cell sites?

■ Will you use existing facilities for MSC or cell sites?

■ Will you use existing towers or building roofs for cell site antennas?

■ What height towers will you need at each cell?

FCC Application

Filing the FCC application is a critical step in establishing your wireless system.Although there have been changes in the way the FCC grants constructionpermits, there is still a great deal of information required on FCC Form 401 andassociated exhibits. Much of this information, such as information pertaining toyour business operation, can only be supplied by the system operator. LucentTechnologies can help you by supplying the technical information for yourapplication. We are also familiar with FCC applications, and our experiencedwireless engineering group can assist you in preparing your application.

CGSA Planning

The Lucent Technologies Cellular Engineering Group is available to provideassistance to customers in planning the cellular grid, establishing equipmentrecommendations and growth planning, and assisting with FCC applications.

It is absolutely essential that proper planning be done to ensure adequate cellularcoverage, to establish what equipment is needed for start-up and growth, and toensure that the FCC application is filled out properly. Mistakes in the planningphase can result in unnecessary expenses and lost revenues. As a wirelesssystem operator, you should plan to take advantage of this service. Contact yourLucent Technologies Account Executive for more information.



401-610-006

Cellular Configurations

Laying out cellular configurations can become rather complicated. The followingdescription should be used as a general reference only.

Normally, a CGSA will gradually grow from a low-traffic start-up to an increasingtraffic volume. During its evolution, the cell size, cell site, setup channels, etc., areconfigured differently because of the particular needs in each stage. However,during transition, changes to the existing equipment, channel assignment, cellsites, etc., are kept at a minimum to reduce expense and ensure uninterruptedservice.

Cochannel Cell Layout

The CGSA is sectionalized into hexagonal shapes to start the cochannel layout.One cell is chosen as a reference and labeled “A.” Chains of hexagons are drawnfrom the reference cell, one from each side, and terminate in a cochannel cell.These cochannel cells are labeled “A” (Figure 9-1 on page 9-5).

To continue the cellular layout, another cell close to the reference is chosen andlabeled (such as “B”). The six chains emanating from this cell also terminate in Bcochannel cells (Figure 9-1 on page 9-5). This procedure is repeated until asufficient number of cells have been labeled. These cells, as a group, are called acell cluster.

The number of cells per cluster determines how many channel sets must beformed out of the total allocated spectrum. The ratio of D (the distance betweenthe centers of the nearest neighboring cochannel cells) to R (the cell radius) iscalled the “cochannel reuse ratio (D/R)” (Figure 9-2 on page 9-6). The number ofcells per cluster is governed by the trade-off cochannel interference and trafficcapacity. As the number of cells per cluster increases, the relative separationdistance between cochannel cells increases. See Figure 9-2 on page 9-6 forpatterns such as N = 7 and D/R = 4.6. As the number of cells per clusterdecreases, the traffic capacity per cell increases. See Figure 9-3 on page 9-7 forpatterns such as N = 4 and D/R = 3.5.

CDMA Impact on Frequency Reuse

In CDMA, all signals share the same wideband spectrum. Individual signals arecoded so that they can be distinguished from other signals. As a result, the sameRF carrier frequencies can be used within the same and adjacent cells, asopposed to the analog system where frequency reuse is governed by the distancebetween cells.




Figure 9-1. Determination of Cochannel Cells with 7-Cell Reuse Pattern

See CDMA RF Engineering Guidelines (401-614-012) for detailed information onfrequency reuse in a CDMA system.

Start-up Cell Configuration

When an Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® Wireless Network is first planned and installed ina new service area, the system design goal is to have a start-up configuration toserve the CGSA at minimum initial cost. This implies, in most cases, using aminimum number of cell sites (that is, using the largest size cell which can stillprovide adequate coverage). For a start-up cell, the typical cell radius may rangefrom 8 to 10 miles.

B

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

B

B

B

B

B

B



401-610-006

Figure 9-2. Cochannel Reuse Ratio (D/R) for 7-Cell Reuse Pattern

Generally, in a start-up configuration, omnidirectional antennas and centrallylocated cell sites are used for each cell (Figure 9-4 on page 9-8). The cell radiusdepends on the terrain and environment of the particular CGSA of interest. It ispreferable to use start-up cells of uniform size in one CGSA. The total number ofcells required must be sufficient to cover the entire CGSA.

A typical pattern for voice channels in a start-up system is N = 7. Access channelsare assigned in an N = 21 pattern. In areas where there is minimum cochannelinterference, repeat patterns for voice channels of N = 4 or N = 3 may be used.Where interference is expected to be high, larger repeat patterns may be used. Itis desirable to use the smallest repeat pattern possible without cochannelinterference. As the system matures, pattern N = 7 or N = 4 will require the use ofdirectional antennas in a high-traffic area. This will maximize frequency reuse andtherefore will increase traffic capacity.

F2

G2

B2

C2

A2

G1

B1

C1

D1

E1

F1

E2

D2

A1

NOTE: 1. Seven-cell repeat pattern; D/R = 4.6 (seven channel sets: A-G). Each channel set is used twice (subscript 1,2). For example, channel set A is used in cells A1 and A2. This pattern is used in a growth configuration.

SE

PA

RA

TIO

ND

ISTA

NC

ED

RAD

IUS

R

R




Figure 9-3. Cochannel Reuse Ration (D/R) for 4-Cell Reuse Pattern

CDMA Impact on Start-up

The purpose of a CDMA cellular deployment is to provide wireless service forsignificantly more users within a given bandwidth than an analog system. Tomaximize the usage of the CDMA service, the CDMA region is normally defined inareas where usage is expected to be high; however, there are several factorswhich may influence how a CDMA region is defined.

Guard Bands and Guard Zones

A CDMA system can be deployed in an area with no pre-existing analog service,or it can coexist with an analog service. When a CDMA system coexists with ananalog system, a guard band is required at the carrier’s edges and a guard zoneis required in the surrounding area.

A guard band is RF spectrum where the CDMA bandwidth has been cleared toensure that CDMA and spectrally adjacent services do not interfere with oneanother. A guard zone is a geographic area where CDMA bandwidth has beencleared to ensure that geographically adjacent services that employ the same

C2

B1

C1

D1

A2

A1

NOTE: 1. Four-cell repeat pattern; D/R = 3.5

set is used twice (subscript 1,2). For example, channel set A is used in cells A1 and A2. This pattern is used in a growth configuration.

RAD

IUS

R

D2

B2

C2

SEPARATION

DISTANCE

D

(four channel sets: A-D). Each channel



401-610-006

Figure 9-4. Cells Served by Omnidirectional Antennas

carrier do not interfere with one another. Because of the guard zone, existinganalog services will experience a loss of capacity. This loss can be compensatedfor in several ways, for example, by placing the guard zones in areas of low traffic.

Handoffs

If a CDMA system is integrated with a larger underlying analog system, calls canbe continued when mobiles travel across the boundary by handing off to ananalog channel. However, once a call has been handed off to an analog channel,the call can only be handed off to another analog channel; analog to CDMAhandoffs are not supported. Therefore, CDMA regions should be connectedwithout significant gaps in coverage to avoid a forced handoff to an analogchannel.

If a CDMA system is a stand-alone system, it will drop the calls of mobiles thattravel beyond the boundary of the CDMA region.

CELL SITES

ONE OMNIDIRECTIONAL ANTENNAFOR EACH CELL SITE

IDEAL COVERAGEBOUNDARY OFOMNIDIRECTIONALANTENNA

CELLS




Capacity

Capacity considerations are fundamental to CDMA planning and operation. Thecapacity of a system is the number of users that can be supported simultaneously.In a CDMA system, capacity is ultimately restricted by transmit power constraintsand by the system’s self-generated interference.

Because each user’s signal is coded so as to appear as interference to the otherusers, sufficient power is needed to overcome the interference generated by theother users when placing a call. As additional calls are established, theinterference level seen by all users is raised. To overcome the interference, eachuser increments his transmit power. These adjustments, in turn, raise the level ofinterference that must be overcome by the next user. This process repeats itselfuntil a new user cannot achieve acceptable voice quality at the cell site. At thispoint, system capacity has been reached.

In order to maximize the system’s capacity, all CDMA signals must be controlledto be the lowest level necessary to provide acceptable voice quality. This control,known as Power Control, is a key feature for realizing CDMA capacity.

See CDMA RF Engineering Guidelines (401-614-012) for detailed information oncapacity and other factors impacting the deployment of a CDMA system.

Growth

A growth configuration is a pattern developed by using growth schemes after thecapacity offered by the start-up configuration is saturated. The demand for growthcan be met by the cell attachment technique when the demand is to serve newgeographical areas outside the existing CGSA or by the cell-splitting techniquewhen the demand is to serve more subscriber traffic within the existing servicearea. Cell splitting can be accomplished in several ways, including cell overlay,cell addition, or “going directional.”

Going directional can normally be accomplished by changing an omnidirectionalantenna configuration to a three 120-degree sector antenna configuration (whichis recommended) or a six 60-degree sector antenna configuration. By using the120-degree directional antennas, the complete coverage of each cell is providedby three different antennas at the centrally located cell site (Figure 9-5 onpage 9-10). The 60-degree sector configuration consists of two control frames (orcabinets), where each control frame controls its own half-cell with three 60-degreedirectional antennas; therefore the complete cell consists of six 60-degreeantennas. The 60-degree sector configuration reduces interference and allowsthe use of the N = 4 channel reuse pattern (Figure 9-6 on page 9-11).

9-10 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 9-5. Cells Served by Three Directional Antennas

This configuration is generally not recommended because the N=7/120-degreesector configuration provides somewhat better protection against interference.The use of directional antennas creates cells whose idealized boundaries form aregular hexagon, as in the omnidirectional case.

When the first cell split is required, the transition from start-up to growthconfigurations begins. The growth plan requires that, in addition to the use ofdirectional antennas, the cell radius be reduced by half (Figure 9-7 on page 9-12).Figure 9-8 on page 9-13 illustrates the details of locating new cell sites in acell-splitting process. New cell sites are added midway between two existing cellsites. The original site will remain in a smaller coverage area.

120

CELL SITE USING DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA

120

120

120

120

120 BEAMWIDTH ANTENNA

Issue 15 July 2002 9-11



Figure 9-6. Cells Served by Six Directional Antennas

For all subsequent cell splits, the cell radius is reduced to one-half of the previouscell radius. Using directional antennas in this arrangement reduces cochannelinterference.

In a realistic growth pattern, traffic demand may be heavy in only a few cells of theCGSA. Cell splitting may, therefore, initially involve only the few cells thatencounter the heaviest traffic. After such a cell split, the resulting pattern containslarger cells overlaid by a grid of smaller cells (Figure 9-9 on page 9-14).

CELL SITE USING DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA

60

60

60

60 BEAMWIDTH ANTENNA

9-12 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 9-7. Cell Split (Start-up-to-Growth Configurations)

ANTENNA

RADIUSR

1/2R

DIRECTIONAL ANTENNAS

CELL BOUNDARY

ANTENNA BEAM

CELL SITE

CELL SITE

CELLBOUNDARY

OMNIDIRECTIONAL

120 DIRECTIONAL

Issue 15 July 2002 9-13



Figure 9-8. Location of Cell Sites in Cell-Splitting Process

CDMA Impact on Growth

The demand for wireless service is expected to grow as will the proportion ofCDMA usage. The following list outlines basic ways of growing a CDMA system.The list is in order of least difficult/expensive to most difficult/expensive.

■ Add CDMA channels at cell sites up to the capacity limit of the cell.

■ Replace omnidirectional antennas with directional antennas.

■ Add up to six directional antennas to sectorized cells.

■ Add CDMA cell sites to AMPS-only cell sites.

ORIGINAL CELL SITE

ORIGINAL CELLS (RADIUS R)

NEW CELL SITE AT MIDWAY BETWEENORIGINAL SITES

NEW CELLS (RADIUS 1/2 R)

9-14 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 9-9. Cell Site Antenna Arrangement after Cell Splitting

■ Clear more AMPS channels so another CDMA carrier can be introduced atcell sites that need more capacity. (This step is viable only when theexpense of replacing the lost analog capacity is less than the expense ofadding new CDMA cells with a single carrier.)

See CDMA RF Engineering Guidelines (401-614-012) for detailed information ongrowing a CDMA system.

DIRECTIONAL ANTENNAS FORNEW CELLS

OMNIDIRECTIONAL ANTENNAFOR STARTUP CELLS

Contents



10Applications

Introduction 10-1

WIN 10-1

■ Network Overview 10-2

Cellular Digital Packet Data Systems 10-5

■ Overview 10-6Mobile Data Base Station (MDBS) 10-8Mobile Data Intermediate System (MDIS) 10-8Network Management System (NMS) 10-9

Cellular Gateway Switch 10-10

■ Introduction 10-10■ Overview 10-10

TTY/TDD for CDMA and TDMA 10-12



401-610-006

Contents

Issue 15 July 2002 10-1


10Applications

Introduction

Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks supports applications for the following:

■ Network — Wireless Intelligent Network (WIN).

■ Data — Cellular Digital Packet Data Systems (CDPD).

■ Cellular Gateway Switch.

■ Text Teletype Device (TTY/TDD) for CDMA and TDMA

The following sections provide high-level overview information about eachapplication. For detailed information about an application refer to the specificapplication document.

WIN

The Lucent Technologies Wireless Intelligent Network (WIN) enablestelecommunications network and service providers to create, deploy, and managenew services quickly and independently. WIN products are implemented as nodesthat are added to a service provider’s existing network.

Before the introduction of the intelligent network, development oftelecommunication services depended largely on the capabilities of the serviceprovider’s switching systems. Many networks currently in use include a mix ofdigital and analog switches from various switch vendors. Specific services are

10-2 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

based on the design and capabilities of the hardware and software of a givenswitch. As a result, it is difficult to deploy switch-based services rapidly anduniformly across a service area.

The Lucent Technologies WIN provides the ability to create and deploy flexibletelecommunication services through service control products that are independentof any vendor switching system. The WIN products provide the following benefitsto service providers:

■ Uniform Deployment — enables implementation of new telecommunicationservices quickly and easily across multiple-vendor switching systems.

■ Easy Updates — enables updates to software and hardware for signal andtransport services to keep pace with the evolving technologies. Theseupdates are accomplished without significant changes to the existingnetwork architecture.

■ Unique Services — enables deployment of specific network and enhancedtelecommunication services by using the signaling and message-handlingcapabilities of the existing network.

■ Reliable Platform — provides SUN computers in mated pair configuration,redundant control servers within the Wireless Service Control Point, andstandardized IS-41 interfaces.

■ Seamless Integration — services can be migrated between landline andwireless environments, and calls can be routed to users regardless of theirlocation.

Network Overview

Figure 10-1 on page 10-3 shows the Wireless Intelligent Network. The WIN iscomposed of the following products:

■ Wireless Service Control Point (WSCP) — a platform that stores servicelogic for applications and stores the subscriber records associated withthose applications. The cornerstone of the WIN product, the WSCP,provides a platform for WIN’s service applications, including the Stand-Alone HLR (SHLR) and the Authentication Center (AC).

■ Service Management System (SMS) — an operations, administration,management, data manipulation, and provisioning system that provides agraphical user interface (GUI) for technicians to manage service andsubscriber logic and data on the WSCP and Service Node. SMS providesservice and subscriber measurements, data audits, service versionmanagement, view management, and other related capabilities.

Issue 15 July 2002 10-3


Applications

Figure 10-1. Wireless Intelligent Network

■ Service Node (SN) — a service platform that supports a wide array of newtelecommunication services, which either assist or actually perform callprocessing. The basic purpose of the SN in the intelligent network is tosupport call-processing telecommunication services, such as

— Advanced messaging services

— Automatic call distribution

— Customized announcements

SCE

SSP

SMS

(MSC)

SSP

WSCPSTP

SN

BaseStation

(MSC)

ISDN Voice and Data LinkData Link

Service Creation Environment

Service Management SystemService Switching PointSignal Transfer Point

SCE

SMSSSPSTP

Signaling System 7 (SS7)Interoffice Trunk

WSCPWireless Service Control Point

Service NodeSN

Mobile Switching CenterMSC

10-4 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

— Calling name and profile delivery

— Integrated voice and FAX message delivery.

■ Service Creation Environment (SCE) — a set of software and developmenttools that allow Lucent Technologies, service providers, and third partyproviders to develop customized service applications.

Also required for the WIN Network are the following components:

■ Service Switching Point (SSP) — a switch that supports intelligent networkprotocols and call processing capabilities. The SSP performs the followingtasks:

— Identifies calls that require special processing

— Generates a request or query to an external network database forhandling and routing information

— Executes the instructions that are found in the handling and routinginformation

— Processes IS-41 origination triggers, which are triggers that specifycall type, for example, local call, inter-LATA call, international call.

■ Signal Transfer Point (STP) — an intelligent network packet switch thatprovides the Signalling System 7 (SS7) network protocol, internetworkgateway capabilities, and network surveillance and maintenance to anintelligent network.

For detailed information about the WIN application, see Lucent TechnologiesWireless Intelligent Network Product Overview (401-650-000).

Issue 15 July 2002 10-5


Applications

Cellular Digital Packet Data Systems

The Cellular Packet Data (CDPD) System is an overlay on existing AMPS cellularvoice systems, supporting packet data transmission over the same frequencies.Modular and flexible, the CDPD System can be integrated with existing AMPSsystems and can coexist with TDMA and CDMA technologies.

The Lucent Technologies CDPD System complies with the specificationestablished by the CDPD Forum, a consortium of leading companies in thewireless communications and computer industries.

Subscribers to CDPD services receive the following benefits:

■ Computer-aided dispatch

■ Immediate status information on field technicians

■ Higher productivity per worker

■ Better response time to customers

■ Immediate access to computer-based information that is current andaccurate

■ Rapid responses to emergencies.

With Lucent Technologies CDPD System, integrating wireless datacommunications capabilities into your Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® System Series IICell Sites allows you to offer significant new revenue-generating services tosubscribers without having to re-engineer cell sites.

The CDPD radios use existing Series II equipment for data transmission,eliminating the need for separate T1/E1 links, attennas, and amplifiers. Voice,data, and digital technologies can all be supported on the Series II wide-bandamplifier.

Lucent Technologies’ CDPD also integrates with any vendor AMPS cell site.

10-6 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Overview

The CDPD technology makes affordable, high-speed wireless datacommunications a reality over existing wireless voice networks.

CDPD allows data transmissions to occur during idles times on voice channelswithout adversely affecting voice quality. For AMPS networks, idle voice channelsare detected (sniffed), then switched to transmit and receive data (hopping).CDPD operates at 19.2 kbps and an actual throughput between 8 and 11 kbps.On TDMA and CDMA, frequencies are dedicated for this use.

Packet signals from multiple users are combined over the same channel,providing greater revenue per channel than circuit switched data solutions.Service providers are able to generate revenue and reduce costs to significantlyincrease profits.

Conformance to industry-standard protocols such as OSI/CLNP makes CDPDcompatible with all major public and private packet-switching networks withpermitting access to global markets. Use of an open systems architectureprovides flexibility and expansion beyond that of existing controller or router-based systems.

The CDPD System consists of three components. See Figure 10-2 on page 10-7.

■ Mobile Data Base Station (MDBS)

■ Mobile Data Intermediate System (MDIS)

■ Network Management System (NMS).

Issue 15 July 2002 10-7


Applications

Figure 10-2. CDPD Mobile Data Network

AdministrativeServer

Packet Server

Mobile DataIntermediate Systems

Corporate Gateway

Internet

Info Express

Advantis

CorporateDataNetwork

Mobile DataBase Station

AMPSBase Station

Base Station

Mobile Switching CenterAUTOPLEX® System 1000

Public SwitchedTelephoneNetwork

Mobile Computer

Mobile

Mobile Computer

Unit

10-8 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Mobile Data Base Station (MDBS)

The MDBS provides radio access, spectrum monitoring, and automatic channelhopping.

The MDBS consists of the following components:

■ Computer Control Module — management point for both control and datarouting. It is the primary connection to the Mobile Data IntermediateSystem and provides a link to the Network Management System via a DS0interface.

■ Power Supply Module — converts 24 volts CD from the main power busused at an AMPS cell site to provide the voltages required for the MDBSmodules.

■ Modem/Transceiver Module — supports one CDPD channel and handlesdigital signal processing while the radio transceiver generates the signalfrequency. Open channels are detected using a radio frequency sniffer.

The MDBS’s modular design allows six modem/transceiver modules to besupported with a computer control module and power supply module. This allowsgrowth as traffic requirements increase. Also, the MDBS shares capacity on theT1/E1 links from the Series II Cell Site back to the Mobile Switching Center.

Antenna diversity allows your MDBS to accept signals from two antennas,allowing superior radio reception with a constant, clear signal.

Mobile Data Intermediate System (MDIS)

The MDIS handles authentication, directory services, packet switching, andgateway services to landline data networks.

The MDIS consists of the following components:

■ Packet Server — routes packets between the transmitting and receivingend systems. It also collects accounting data for tracking traffic andnetwork usage.

■ Administrative Server — handles authentication, registration, messagetransfer, system accounting, and billing data collection.

In the optional high availability configuration, the Administrative and PacketServers are implemented on separate processors, with spare processorsproviding redundancy. This configuration minimizes downtime and allowssoftware upgrades without service interruption.

MDIS servers are based on the open UNIX System V Release 4.0 platform, usingthe TCP/IP protocol and OSI standards. Standard routers and gateways can beadded to access TCP/IP X.25 or SNA networks.

Issue 15 July 2002 10-9


Applications

Network Management System (NMS)

The NMS controls and centrally coordinates all network management functionsincluding fault management, configuration management, and performancemanagement.

The NMS consists of a SUN SPARC workstation, Postscript printer, 20-inch colormonitor, and a modem. Typically installed in the MSC’s office area, the NMS canbe used to maintain a regional network of CDPD equipment or a single system.

The NMS supports the following features:

■ Graphical User Interface (GUI) — permits customized network mappingand component-level diagnostics, configuration, and control.

■ Nerve Center — monitors network conditions in real-time, simplifyingdetections and reporting of faults and problems.

■ Common Management Interface Protocol (CMIP) — complies with CMIPstandards. Uses a seven-layer OSI protocol stack for CDPD networkmanagement, providing a single point of contact for all end-user problems.

For detailed information about the CPCD application, see CDPD NetworkManagement System User Guide (401-401-112).

10-10 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Cellular Gateway Switch

Introduction

Service Providers have experienced a tremendous rate of growth over the pastfew years. As a result, trunk planning and administration is becomingprogressively more difficult.

The present method of direct connections between primary customer servingswitches in the constituent networks could be eliminated in favor of a method inwhich all calls that connect out from their network of origin, are connected throughMSC-based Cellular Gateway Switches (CGSs) on at least one end.

Overview

An MSC-based CGS is essentially an MSC without cells and subscriberdatabases.

An MSC-based CGS provides a hierarchy in large cellular networks that allow thenetworks to avoid the limitations and inefficiencies which the aforementioneddirect connections would cause.

Figure 10-3 on page 10-10 shows a fully connected network with five nodes.Figure 10-4 on page 10-11 shows the hierachical connections by using a CGS

.

Figure 10-3. Trunking Fully Connected

DCS

DCS

DCS DCS

DCS

Issue 15 July 2002 10-11


Applications

.

Figure 10-4. Trunking-Hierarchical

A CGS uses the existing capabilities of the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® MSC includingthe Integrated HLR, Mobility Management and Call Delivery, and network trunkinterfaces to the PSTN. The CSG differs from traditional System installations inthat it does not handle any of the traditional MSC functions including calloriginations and support of cell sites.

CGS

DCS DCS DCS DCS DCS

10-12 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

TTY/TDD for CDMA and TDMA

A Text Teletype Device (TTY/TDD) is a communication device that is commonlyused by individuals who are deaf or hard of hearing that incorporates a FrequencyShift Keying (FSK) modem to provide a two-way text communication. TTY/TDDswere originally designed for the wireline network and are now required in thewireless network.

The TTY/TDD for CDMA feature, provides TTY/TDD signaling transmission overthe IS-95 CDMA voice channel as defined in the IS-127-2 and IS-733-1 codecspecifications. It is available for Cellular and PCS CDMA networks and is used inconjunction with IS-95 mobiles that comply with the IS-127-2 EVRC [2.1.1] and/orIS-733-1 13K [2.1.2] codec specifications.

The TTY/TDD for TDMA feature, supports TTY/TDD signal transmissions asrequested by the TTY/TDD User Community participating in the CTIA TTY/TDDForum and interoperates with TIA/EIA 136 Rev B mobiles that support thisfeature.

The TTY/TDD feature is transparent from both a user and a network point of view.

Contents



11Building Requirements,Equipment Specifications, andFloor Plans

Introduction 11-1

Mobile Switching Center (MSC) 11-1

■ Lighting 11-1■ Environmental Requirements 11-2

Temperature and Humidity 11-2Airborne Contaminants 11-3

■ Grounding and Surge Protection Requirements 11-4Grounding Requirements 11-4Surge Protection Requirements 11-4

■ Equipment Power Requirements and Heat Release 11-5Power Required 11-5

■ Equipment Specifications 11-9Floor Plans 11-9Aisle Spacing 11-12Cable Rack, End Guards, and Office Lighting 11-12

Series II Cell Site 11-15

■ Lighting 11-15■ Environmental Requirements 11-15■ Grounding Requirements 11-15■ Power Requirements 11-16■ Heat Release 11-16■ Equipment Specifications 11-17■ Floor Plans 11-17■ Fire/Intrusion Protection 11-17■ Antenna Installation 11-17

Antenna for CDMA 11-19



401-610-006

Contents

Issue 15 July 2002 11-1


11Building Requirements, EquipmentSpecifications, and Floor Plans

Introduction

This chapter provides building requirements, equipment specifications and floorplans for the Mobile Switching Center (MSC) and the Series II cell sites.


The following sections describe the building requirements, equipmentspecifications and floor plans for the MSC, which includes the Executive CellularProcessor (ECP) and the 5ESS® Digital Cellular Switch (DCS).

This information is for planning purposes only. Contact your Lucent TechnologiesAccount Representative to determine specific equipment and buildingrequirements.

NOTE:Lucent Technologies is engaged in continuous product improvement and reservesthe right to change equipment specifications and requirements.

Lighting

Preferred lighting of the MSC is 50 to 70 footcandles.

11-2 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Environmental Requirements

The following sections describe the temperature and humidity requirements forthe MSC, as well as the airborne contaminant limits.

Temperature and Humidity

Temperature and humidity requirements for the MSC environment are describedin Table 11-1 on page 11-2.

NOTE:Be aware of the following:

■ Maximum permissible temperature transient for an operation switch is0.5°C per minute.

■ Maximum Humidity Ration is .024 Kg water/Kg dry air.

■ If low-end relative humidity is anticipated, electrostatic discharge controlprovisions should be made.

■ Extreme Short Term is defined as a period not to exceed three (3) days at atime and fifteen (15) days per year.

■ Continuous operation at higher temperature and humidity levels may resultin higher maintenance costs due to higher circuit pack failure rates.

Table 11-1. Ambient Temperature and Humidity Limits for the MSC *

*Ambient refers to the conditions found at a distance of 1.5 m (59 inches) above thefloor and 0.4 m (15.8 inches) in front of the equipment.

Type of Condition Amount Allowed

Range of Optimal Equipment Performance

■ Temperature

■ Relative Humidity

18°C to 24°C30% to 40%

Normal Equipment Operating Range

■ Temperature


5°C to 40°C41°F to 104°F10% to 80%

Extreme Short Term

■ Temperature


0°C to 50°C32°F to 122°F50% to 90% non-condensing

Issue 15 July 2002 11-3


Building Requirements, Equipment Specifications, and

Airborne Contaminants

The MSC remains operational when located in the equipment atmosphericenvironment with the contaminants described in Table 11-2 on page 11-3.

Adherence to the following guidelines will minimize the exposure of the switch toairborne contaminants.

■ Maintain a positive pressure within the MSC equipment room of from 1/8 to1/2 inch (30 to 120 pa) of water above the outside environment. Positivepressure minimizes the migration of particles in the switch room when theoffice doors are opened.

■ Maintenance of positive pressure requires bringing outside air into theequipment room. The use of high efficiency filters on the outside air willreduce contaminant levels inside the equipment room. Proper filtermaintenance procedures should be observed, and when filters arechanged, the blowers should be shut down and the office doors shouldremain closed.

Table 11-2. Allowable Contaminants for the MSC

Contaminant Ambient (OUTDOOR) Equipment Room

Total Particulate Matter 185 micrograms per cubicmeter of ambient air.

75 micrograms per cubicmeter of ambient air.

Nitrate Particle Matter 12 micrograms per cubicmeter of ambient air.

5 micrograms per cubicmeter of ambient air.

Total Hydrocarbons 10 parts per million ofambient air.

10 parts per million ofambient air.

Sulfur Dioxide 50 parts per billion ofambient air.

50 parts per billion ofambient air.

Oxides of Nitrogen 300 parts per billion ofambient air.


Photochemical Oxidants 50 parts per billion ofambient air.


Hydrogen Sulfide 10 parts per billion ofambient air.


Gaseous Chlorine 10 parts per billion ofambient air.

5 parts per billion of ambientair.

11-4 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Grounding and Surge Protection Requirements

The following sections describe the requirements for grounding and surgeprotection for the MSC.

Grounding Requirements

MSC equipment is isolated into a ground plane that has no contact with buildingground or other foreign ground planes, except for a single connection to theequipment room floor office ground. The single point ground system eliminatesthe possibility of transient current flow through the MSC ground plane fromsources outside the system. A metallic water pipe ground is the preferredconnection for the office principal ground point; however, a driven ground rodperimeter system is an alternate method.

See Customer Information Bulletins 148B, 248B, and ED-5D022 and Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® Lightning Protection and Grounding Guidelines, 401-610-502 forfurther details. If a cell site is to be co-located with the MSC, then Cell Sitegrounding requirements must be adhered to without compromising the MSCsingle point ground.

Surge Protection Requirements

The equipment used in the MSC requires -48 Volt DC power. The distribution of-48 V power to this equipment provides protection from transient voltages. Batterypower of -48 Volts DC is connected to one or more power distribution cabinets.Capacitors inside the power distribution cabinets limit transients. From the powerdistribution cabinet, the power is distributed via 10 AWG power feeders to a fuse/filter unit in each equipment cabinet. A capacitor is connected across each feeder,which also limits transients on the -48 Volt DC power being supplied.

Power is then distributed via fuses in the fuse/filter panel to each equipment unit.In these units, most of the power is converted via power units to the requiredvoltage levels. Voltage transients on the -48 Volt DC input that remain within theinput regulation band of the power units, that is -42.75 to -52.50, will not adverselyaffect the output voltage of the power units. This is a result of the power unitsexcellent filtering on input and output. Any input transients on the discharge busare not expected to adversely affect the MSC powered through power units.

Transient voltage limits are described in Table 11-3 on page 11-5.

Issue 15 July 2002 11-5



Equipment Power Requirements and HeatRelease

The following sections describe the power requirements and heat release for theMSC.

Power Required

Power requirements for the MSC include commercial AC power, protected power,and rectifier/battery plant.

Three-phase 60 Hz (480 or 240), or 208 Volt Alternating Current (AC) commercialpower service must be supplied. For international applications, 380 Volt 50 Hzcommercial power may be specified. If three-phase power is not available,single-phase AC may be used as an option. The commercial service required maybe estimated by calculating equipment power requirements, including rectifiers,batteries, and other optional equipment for the MSC to be ultimately installed.Commercial service estimates must also include power required for other ACdriven equipment such as lights, air conditioning, terminals, modems, andmiscellaneous equipment.

Protected power is required to supply critical maintenance equipment such asVideo Display Terminals, Printers, Modems, and Data Sets. Lucent Technologiessupplies a full line of Rectifier/Battery Plants and inverters to provide continuedsystem operation during commercial power outages.

AC input power to the MSC shall meet the requirements described in Table 11-4on page 11-6

Table 11-3. Transient Voltage Limits

Type Limit

Transient voltage range due to a step loadchange

-54.9 to -47.3 Volts (V) for 300 milliseconds

Maximum transient voltage due to rectifierfailure

-53.5 V for 150 milliseconds

Transient voltage range due to faults beingcleared

-59.3 V for 20 microseconds to -41.8 V for200 microseconds

11-6 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

.

The rectifier/battery plant provides -48 V DC power to adequately meet systempower requirements. These requirements are a function of system size and maybe approximated using Table 11-5 on page 11-6 and Table 11-6 on page 11-8.Lucent Technologies MSCs are designed to optimally operate at -48 V DC.However, the nominal range of operation is from -42.7 to -55.0 V DC.

Table 11-4. AC Input Power to MSC

Type Amount

AC Power @ 60 Hz +/- 3.0 Hz

AC Power @ 50 Hz +/- 2.5 Hz

Table 11-5. System Power Requirements Part 1 (Page 1 of 2)

EquipmentType

CurrentDrain (Note)

Max. HeatDissipationBTUs/HR(Note)

Comments

ApplicationProcessor Frame(APF)

19.5 Amps @-48V DC(nominal) power

3195 Up to 3 APFs per MSC forRelease 16.0 and earlier. Note,current drain shown reflectsmeasured drain of componentsand does not include powerlosses or efficiency factors.

Cellular DigitalPacket DataSystems (CDPD)(1st Cabinet)

22 Amps @40 V DC

3004 Note, current drain shownreflects measured drain ofcomponents and does notinclude power losses orefficiency factors.

CDPD(2nd Cabinet)

22 Amps @40 V DC

15002 Note, current drain shownreflects measured drain ofcomponents and does notinclude power losses orefficiency factors.

Datalink Interface(DLI)(standard per each24 DSO digroup)

@-48 V DC12 AMPS

2053 Each DLI cabinet servesbetween one and four T1Digroups. Digroup equal 24DSO channels. Number ofcabinets required depends onnumber of DSO channelsrequired for data links.

Issue 15 July 2002 11-7



Note: Values indicated will vary based on unit and circuit pack equippage.

Executive CellularProcessor—3B21D ProcessorCabinet (ECPC)

@ -50.9 V DC33.3 AMPS MAX30.3 AMPS NOM

5800 One ECP Processor Cabinetper MSC.

Flexent MobilityServer (FMS

43 Amps @-48Vdc

7508 Up to 2 cabinets maximum.

Global PowerDistribution Frame(GPDF)

@ -48 V DC 11 One or more GPDFs requiredper MSC, depending on size.

InterprocessMessage Switch(IMS-RNC)

@ -48 V DC50 AMPS MAX38 AMPS NOM

9500 Minimum of one K type basiccabinet is required per MSC.Growth cabinets added asneeded. Each cabinet contains30 node positions arranged insegments of 15.

Operations andManagementPlatform forFlexent (OMP-FX)

@110 V ACProtected Power4 AMPS

1194 One OMP-FX required perMSC.

Over The AirActivation FunctionOTAF Cabinet

20 Amps percabinet

3277 Up to 2 cabinets per MSC.

TDMA Inter-Working Function(IWF) Cabinet

51 Amps @-40Vdc

9057 Up to 8 cabinets per MSC.

CDMA Inter-Working Function(IWF) Cabinet

43 Amps @-48 Vdc

8806 Up to 4 cabinets maximum.


EquipmentType

CurrentDrain (Note)

Max. HeatDissipationBTUs/HR(Note)

Comments

11-8 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006


Equipment Type CurrentDrain (Note 1)

Maximum HeatDissipationBTU’s/HR(Note 2)

Comments

AdministrativeModule ProcessorCabinet (CSPC)

@ -50.9 V DC33.3 AMPSMAX30.3 AMPSNOM

5800 One CSPC required per5ESS DCS. May be co-located with MSC orlocated remotely.

Common NetworkInterface Ring NodeCabinet (RNC/CNI)

@-48 V DC37 AMPS

6586 One or more RN cabinetsper 5ESS DCS dependingon networking facilitiesrequired.

CommunicationsModule-2 Cabinet(CM)

@-48 V DC65 AMPS

11544 Minimum of two CMcabinets per 5ESS DCSdepending on office size.Maximum is 12.

Switch ModuleController Cabinet(SMC)

@-48 V DC48 AMPS

8544 One SMC per 5ESS DCSModule (SM). Number ofSMs predicated on systemsize.

Line TrunkPeripheral Cabinet(LTP)

@-48 V DC11 AMPS

1954 Minimum of one per 5ESSDCS SM. Typical wirelessapplications include two orthree per SM dependingon application and digitaltechnology used.

MiscellaneousCabinet (MISC)

@-48 V DC3 AMPS

533 Number of cabinets to bespecified on an asrequired basis. Type ofAnnouncements sets andother miscellaneousequipment determines thenumber of cabinetsneeded, the amount ofpower, and the heatdissipation.

Issue 15 July 2002 11-9



Note 1: Nominal value unless otherwise indicated.Note 2: Values indicated will vary based on unit and circuit pack equippage.

Equipment Specifications

The following paragraphs provide information on the specifications.

Floor Plans

See Figure 11-3 on page 11-13 and Figure 11-1 on page 11-10 for typical floorplans depicting a non-Flexent, 16.0 configuration. See Figure 11-2 on page 11-11and Figure 11-4 on page 11-14 for typical floor plans depicting a Flexent/IS-63416.0 configuration.

Data Set Cabinet(DSC)

@-48 V DC15 AMPS

2664 Number of cabinets to bespecified on an asrequired basis. Number ofdata sets and modemsdetermines the number ofcabinets needed, theamount of power, and theheat dissipation.


Equipment Type CurrentDrain (Note 1)

Maximum HeatDissipationBTU’s/HR(Note 2)

Comments

11-10 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 11-1. Representative Non-Flexent 5ESS DCS Configuration (Release 17.0).

MIS

CR

NC

/CN

IG

PD

F

CS

PC

DFA

0100

002

GP

DF

01

CM

-2

0304

0506

0708

SM

002

SM

001

LTP

002

SM

C00

0LT

P00

1LT

P00

2S

MC

000

LTP

001

LTP

003

SM

003

SM

004

LTP

001

SM

C00

0LT

P00

2LT

P00

3LT

P00

1S

MC

000

LTP

002

SM

005

SM

006

LTP

002

SM

C00

0LT

P00

1LT

P00

2S

MC

000

LTP

001

LTP

001

SM

C00

0

SM

011

LTP

002

SM

009

SM

010

LTP

002

LTP

002

SM

C00

0LT

P00

1

SM

007

SM

008

LTP

001

LTP

001

SM

C00

0

SM

C00

0LT

P00

2LT

P00

1S

MC

000

LTP

002

Issue 15 July 2002 11-11



Figure 11-2. ECPC/PCS Access Manager Release 17.0 and Beyond (Flexent/IS-634)

NO

TE

:For

R16

.0a

max

imum

of22

2ce

lls.F

orR

17.0

am

axim

umof

384

cells

.

*

*Lu

cent

Tech

nolo

gies

Del

iver

yU

nitf

orC

ALE

A.

EC

PC

DLI

0A

PF

5A

PF

4A

PF

3A

PF

2A

PF

1

FM

S1

IWF

1

EC

PR

ELE

AS

E17

.0F

RO

NT

VIE

W

FR

ON

TV

IEW

FR

ON

TV

IEW

NE

XT

GE

NE

RA

TIO

N(N

GN

)N

ET

WO

RK

LTD

U*

GP

DF

0

OM

P

FX

MIS

C

DS

C0

RN

C

00/3

2R

NC

01/3

3

RN

C

02/3

4R

NC

03/3

5

Fut

ure

IWF

2

Fut

ure

IWF

3

Fut

ure

IWF

4

Fut

ure

IWF

5F

utur

e

IWF

6F

utur

e

IWF

7F

utur

e

IWF

8

OTA

F

1O

TAF

2C

DP

D

1

CD

PD

2

Fut

ure

FM

S5

Fut

ure

FM

S4

Fut

ure

FM

S3

Fut

ure

FM

S2

DA

CS

5D

AC

S4

Fut

ure

DA

CS

6

Fut

ure

DA

CS

3

Fut

ure

DA

CS

2

Fut

ure

DA

CS

1

Fut

ure

DA

CS

7

11-12 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

NOTE:The projected 17.0 information has been included as an aid in understandingfuture hardware implications.

Aisle Spacing

MSC and 5ESS DCS specifications for aisle widths are 2’6” (two foot six inches)minimum on the equipment wiring side, and 2’8” (two foot eight inches) for themaintenance aisle. A minimum aisle width of 4’ (four foot zero inches) is requiredin front of the Master Control Center (MCC). The maximum 5ESS DCS switchlineup length is 42’6” (42 feet 6 inches), or 17 cabinets. This limit is set togrounding and equipment precautions that must be taken.

Cable Rack, End Guards, and Office Lighting

The MSC and 5ESS DCS use a uniquely designed overhead cable rack system inwhich cable racks are directly supported by equipment frames. To accommodatethis system, a minimum of 8’1” (eight foot one inch) floor to ceiling height isrequired. Additional floor to ceiling height may be desirable for additional cableaccess. End guards are provided at the end of each lineup and at each exposedcabinet with the lineup. Aisle directories designating the cabinets in each lineup,lighting control switches, and convenience outlets may be provided on the end ofthe lineup end guards.

Issue 15 July 2002 11-13



Figure 11-3. ECPC/PCS Access Manager Release 17.0 and Beyond (Non-Flexent).

NO

TE

:For

R16

.0a

max

imum

of22

2ce

lls.F

orR

17.0

am

axim

umof

384

cells

.

*Lu

cent

Tech

nolo

gies

Del

iver

yU

nitf

orC

ALE

A.

EC

PC

DLI

1D

LI0

DLI

2D

LI3

DLI

4D

LI5

DLI

6

IWF

1F

MS

1

DA

CS

5D

AC

S4

LTD

U*

DLI

7

FR

ON

TV

IEW

FR

ON

TV

IEW

FR

ON

TV

IEW

EC

PR

ELE

AS

E17

.0

NE

XT

GE

NE

RAT

ION

(NG

N)

NE

TW

OR

K

GP

DF

0O

MP

FX

MIS

C

DS

C0

RN

C

00/3

2R

NC

01/3

3

RN

C

02/3

4R

NC

03/3

5

RN

C

04/3

6

RN

C

05/3

7

Fut

ure

IWF

2F

utur

e

IWF

3F

utur

e

IWF

4F

utur

e

IWF

5

Fut

ure

IWF

6

Fut

ure

IWF

7

Fut

ure

IWF

8

Fut

ure

FM

S5

Fut

ure

FM

S4

Fut

ure

FM

S3

Fut

ure

FM

S2

Fut

ure

DA

CS

6

Fut

ure

DA

CS

3

Fut

ure

DA

CS

2

Fut

ure

DA

CS

1

Fut

ure

DA

CS

7

OTA

F

1O

TAF

2

CD

PD

1C

DP

D

2

11-14 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 11-4. Representative Flexent/IS-634 5ESS DCS Configuration (Release 17.0).

MIS

CR

NC

/CN

IG

PD

F

CS

PC

DFA

0100

002

GP

DF

01

CM

-2

0304

0506

0708

SM

002

SM

001

LTP

002

SM

C00

0LT

P00

1LT

P00

2S

MC

000

LTP

001

LTP

003

SM

003

SM

004

LTP

001

SM

C00

0LT

P00

2LT

P00

3LT

P00

1S

MC

000

LTP

002

SM

005

SM

006

LTP

002

SM

C00

0LT

P00

1LT

P00

2S

MC

000

LTP

001

LTP

001

SM

C00

0

SM

011

LTP

002

SM

009

SM

010

LTP

002

LTP

002

SM

C00

0LT

P00

1

SM

007

SM

008

LTP

001

LTP

001

SM

C00

0

SM

C00

0LT

P00

2LT

P00

1S

MC

000

LTP

002

Issue 15 July 2002 11-15



See Table 11-7 on page 11-15 for the Flexent and non-Flexent related cabinetdimensions.

Series II Cell Site

The following sections describe the building requirements, equipmentspecifications and floor plans for the Series II cell sites.

Lighting

Preferred lighting for the cell site is 50 to 70 footcandles.

Environmental Requirements

Operational requirements for Series II cell sites are as follows:

■ Basic Environmental Ranges:

— Cell site ambient temperature: 40°F (4.5°C) to 100°F (38°C)

— Cell site humidity: 20 to 55 percent relative humidity

■ Short Term (no more than 72 consecutive hours and no more than 15 daysper year):

— Cell site ambient temperature: 36°F (2°C) to 120°F (49°C)

— Cell site humidity: 0 to 80 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.

Grounding Requirements

The cell site requires an interior/exterior ring ground system. The preferredgrounding medium: ring ground — 2 feet from building perimeter, buried 18 inchesdeep. See Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® Wireless Networks Lightning Protection andGrounding Guidelines for Mobile Switching Center (MSC) Equipment, 401-610-502 and Site Grounding, 401-200-115 for detailed information.

Table 11-7. Cabinet Dimensions

Cabinet Type Height (Inches) Width (Inches) Depth (Inches)

APF, CDPD, DLI, ECPC,FMS, GPDF, LTDU, MISC,IWF, OTAF

72 30 24

DLI, IMS-RNCOMP-FX

7272

3029

3030

11-16 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Power Requirements

Listed below are the power requirements for the Series II cell site building, radiochannel frame(s), linear amplifier frame(s) and antenna interface frame(s). Powerrequirements are for fully loaded frames.

■ Cell Site Commercial AC Power Input: 208 V/240 V, 60-Hz, single-phase orthree-phase

■ Primary RCF: +24 volts at 122 amps

■ Growth RCF: +24 volts at 122 amps

■ LAF: +24 volts at 352 amps (88 amps per LAC)

■ AIF: +24 volts at 10 amps (AIF-0 + AIF-1, 7 antenna faces).

The power plant for the Series II cell site consists of a LINEAGE 2000 ECS powerplant. In case of a power failure, a single string of 12 round-cell batteries provide+24 volts to the cell site for a minimum of an hour. Table 11-8 on page 11-16shows the battery holdover time based on the number of channels supported bythe cell site.

Heat Release

Heat release (for loaded and fully equipped frames):

■ Radio Channel Frame (RCF):

— Primary radio channel frame = 2900 watts/RCF

— Growth radio channel frame = 3000 watts/GRCF

■ Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF):

— LAF with 0 watt output RF power = 3000 watts/LAF

— LAF with full power output RF power = 7500 watts/LAF

■ Antenna Interface Frame(AIF):

— Antenna interface frame (one or two frames) = 240 watts.

Table 11-8. Full Battery Holdover Time

Channels Time

200 channels 1/2 hour

128 channels 1 hour

56 channels 2 hours

Issue 15 July 2002 11-17



Equipment Specifications

Table 11-9 on page 11-17 contains the dimensions and weight of the Series II CellSite equipment

.

Floor Plans

Typical cell site floor plan and hardware requirements for a cell site up to 200radio channels are shown in Figure 11-5 on page 11-18.

Fire/Intrusion Protection

Local codes prevail for fire protection. A method of intrusion protection will be atthe customer’s option; however, FCC rules require that the transmitters beprotected against unauthorized tampering.

NOTE:Fire and intrusion alarms may be monitored remotely through the alarm interface.

Antenna Installation

There are several options available for mounting cell site antennas. The standardFlexent®/AUTOPLEX® mast and platform combination provides the best meansof mounting the antennas.

Table 11-9. Series II Cell Site Equipment Specifications

Equipment Width(inches)

Depth(inches)

Height(inches)

Weight (lbs)

Primary RadioChannel Frame

26 22 81 800

Linear AmplifierFrame

26 22 81 1100

Antenna InterfaceFrame

26 20 84 600

Power Plant 26 20 84 650 (fullyloaded)

11-18 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Figure 11-5. Typical 200-Channel Series II Cell Site Floor Plan

Masts are available in lengths up to 150 feet. In site location planning the mastfoundation should be considered. A typical foundation is a cylindrical concretepier, about 6 feet in diameter and 20 feet deep; the mast is bolted to thefoundation using steel studs embedded in the concrete. The mast foundationshould be located no more than 25 feet from the cell site building to minimizecable loss.

Other types of mounting arrangements may also be used. Roof masts areavailable in heights of 6 to 40 feet so that the platform can be mounted on top of abuilding. Roof frames are also available for mounting omnidirectional ordirectional antennas on a building roof. Other types of frame towers for mountingantennas at various heights above ground level are also available. Antennas mayalso be mounted on an existing tower.

In the standard Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® mast, cables are routed through the centerof the mast using specially designed conduits. The conduit arrangement makesadding or replacing cables easier (for small cell sites where the cable density isexpected to be low, cable installation without conduit is optionally available). Thecables may then be routed through an underground concrete trench or through anabove-ground cable run into the cell site building. The cables terminate at wall-mounted filter panels.

4’4"

3’0"

6’6"

HATCHPLATE#1

LAF

FRONT

AIF0

11 0 0 1

RECTCONT

ANTENNAHATCHPLATE

RCF

#2 (OPTION)CONDITIONER FACILITIES INTERFACE

SECOND AIF

AIR

(OPTION)

SITEFOR 6-SECTOR

26’0"

7’8"

2’2"

X-CONNPNL

ANTENNA

21"

2

24V BATT A

11’3"

MAIN BRKRLTGN ARRTRFR SW

PNLAC

AIRCONDITIONER

HEAT VENT -HEAT VENT -

Issue 15 July 2002 11-19



FAA regulations may require that the mast have aircraft warning lights. The FCCapplication for each cell site requires that an FAA study be made to determine ifwarning lights are necessary for the height and location of the mast. Antennalighting kits, which meet FAA requirements, are available for the Flexent®/AUTOPLEX® masts and platforms.

Antenna for CDMA

For CDMA, a Global Positioning System (GPS) antenna is required. A GPSantenna can be placed anywhere near the cell site that is appropriate for the bestreception of the required number of GPS satellites. The antenna is separate fromall other cell site antennas and is approximately one foot high. The GPS antennais usually mounted on the outside of a building, not on a tower. For furtherinformation, see Base Station CDMA Reference Frequency Timing Generator andGPS Antenna System Description, Operation, Installation and Maintenance, 401-660-128.

11-20 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Contents



12Mobility Solutions Services

Introduction 12-1

■ Wireless Technical Support Service 12-2■ Wireless Consultation Service 12-2■ Wireless Expansion Services 12-3■ Wireless Integration Service 12-3■ Wireless Performance Management Service 12-3■ Wireless Program Management 12-4■ Wireless RF Engineering Service 12-4



401-610-006

Contents

Issue 15 July 2002 12-1


12Mobility Solutions Services

Introduction

Wireless operators need an end-to-end strategy to plan, design, implement, andoperate their networks. Our depth of global wireless, IP and Broadband expertiseis coupled with proven methodologies to help your clients meet their time-to-market objectives and build a network that keeps pace with evolving technology.Also, as their network grows in size and complexity we offer the services andtechnical support needed to fine-tune their network and maintain high-qualityservice levels.

■ Wireless Technical Support Services

■ Wireless Consultation Services

■ Wireless Expansion Services

■ Wireless Integration Services

■ Wireless Performance Services

■ Wireless Program Management

■ Wireless RF Engineering

12-2 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Wireless Technical Support Service

Technical Support Services (TSS) is a comprehensive suite of service capabilitiesthat delivers Remote Technical Support for Lucent's Flexent®/AUTOPLEX®

wireless systems during the warranty period and after. This service helps carriersmaximize the availability and performance of their Lucent wireless systems. Withthis service, Lucent support technicians troubleshoot and resolve systemproblems via phone or modem connection, answer the customer's questionsregarding system problems, and provide rapid service restoration if an outageoccurs.

There are three main categories of support:

■ Outage and Impairment

■ Assistance Request (AR) Support

■ Technical Consulting and Knowledge Transfer Support

Wireless Consultation Service

As wireless carriers operate their system, they are faced with the need toconsistently monitor, troubleshoot and correct a variety of network problems tomaintain the service quality needed to support customer satisfaction objectives.Often they are resource constrained, or the staff they have does not have the levelof detailed system expertise to keep their Lucent network operating at peakperformance.

Wireless Consultation Service helps carriers improve wireless network quality bytroubleshooting, reporting and resolving problems. The service provides thecustomer with an expert MSC Engineer/Technician, Cell Engineer, or RF Engineerto help the customer achieve their operating objectives. Each consultant reportsdirectly to the Customer Technical Manager and acts at his/her direction for workassignments. Lucent's engineer will not maintain any portion of the customer'snetwork or any portion of its network elements. This resource supplements thecustomer's technical staff to get the job done. They also provide a valuable on-the-job training opportunity for the customer's technical resources.

Issue 15 July 2002 12-3


Mobility Solutions Services

Wireless Expansion Services

Wireless Service Providers must continually modify, upgrade and add to theirnetwork to keep pace with the growing demands of their customer base. Addingnew technology and/or equipment to an existing network can impact theperformance of the system and can be reflected in the level of customersatisfaction experienced by the subscriber.

Wireless Expansion Services help wireless network carriers balance the trafficload on their network to support subscriber growth, network additions and swapouts. This suite of services helps the Service Provider expand their networks forsubscriber growth, subscriber migration, and network changes to support cellgrowth or balancing.

Wireless Integration Service

Wireless Integration Service helps wireless carriers integrate new equipment intoa live system to help ensure seamless communication and functionality across allnetwork elements. This is accomplished via a series of Network ElementConfigurations, Software Installations, Script Writing, Testing andTroubleshooting.

Integration Services provide the highly trained Lucent Technologies MSCresources necessary to help insure a new network element will be fullyoperational when it is deployed into the customer's revenue generating network.Lucent Technologies' MSC Engineers have been well trained on each NetworkElement and are supported by Bell Labs' Methods and Procedures organization tohelp insure that integration is performed with little or no risk. Integration Servicesare available for multiple technologies including TDMA, CDMA, and GSM withinthe Mobile Switching Center (MSC) environment.

Wireless Performance Management Service

Wireless Service Providers must continually modify, upgrade and add to theirnetwork to keep pace with the growing demands of their customer base. Addingnew technology and/or equipment to an existing network can impact theperformance of the system and can be reflected in the level of customersatisfaction experienced by the subscriber.

Wireless Performance Services help wireless network carriers maintain a highperforming network by identifying and correcting network issues as they operateand grow their systems. This suite of services analyzes RF performance and/orMSC capacity levels that are used to recommend actions that could includesystem parameter changes, frequency changes, or equipment additions andupgrades.

12-4 Issue 15 July 2002


401-610-006

Wireless Program Management

Wireless Program Management Service provides a technically competent team ofresources with the skills and experience to plan, coordinate and execute thedeployment of a wireless network. Our Program Management Team isexperienced in world-class program management methodology, disciplines,processes and tools as certified by ISO 9003 industry quality standards.

As a result, we partner with our Customers to establish and achieve site andprogram-specific plans and budgets. This includes program planning that clearlydefines the scope, schedule, timelines, objectives, budgets and other tasksrelated to the deployment of a full turnkey project. It also extends to include theidentification, procurement, and management of all the required resources fromLucent and/or subcontractors.

While Lucent Technologies has extensive experience and capabilities in all of theabove areas, selective outsourcing may be required by the scope of work, qualityof work assessments, competitive pricing and geographic location. LucentTechnologies will work closely with our customers to develop specific support forthese additional requirements.

Wireless RF Engineering Service

Wireless Radio Frequency Engineering Services are actually two services todesign and optimize clients' wireless networks to meet the coverage, capacity andquality demands of their subscribers.

Lucent Worldwide Services RF Design Service is a cost-effective, collaborativesolution that helps wireless carriers achieve successful deployment and growth oftheir network. Lucent can provide the total design solution for new mobilenetworks, overlay designs, in building or campus applications or wireless localloop networks.

RF Optimization is an iterative process that identifies problems and their sources,analyzes them, makes recommendations for remedies and verifies that theremedies are effective. The result is improved coverage, hand-off and quality ofservice.

Issue 15 July 2002 GL-1


Glossary

Numerics

3B21DThe 3B21D is the main hardware component for the Executive Cellular Processor Complex(ECPC). It is a fully duplexed, fault-tolerant computer with 256 MB of physical memory. The 3B21Dcontains the Input/Output Processor (IOP), the Central Processor Unit (CPU), the memory stores,and the disk file controller.

5ESSLucent Technologies Registered Trademark for its premier Electronic Switching System.

A

ACDNAdministrative Call Processing/Database Node — A CDN that has responsibility for assigning newcalls to CDNs for processing.

ACU (Analog Conversion Unit)The ACU combines the output of a given CDMA Cluster’s CCUs. A given ACU supports two CDMAclusters. ACUs are duplex, equipped as primary and standby.

AIFAntenna Interface Frame (Series II Cell)

AM (Administrative Module)A hardware component of the 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS. Provides switch maintenance,administration, traffic measurements, and network management. Includes the 3B21D processor.

AMAAutomatic Message Accounting — A combination of UNIX® and kernel processes that provides forthe storage and retrieval of billing information.

AMPS (Advanced Mobile Phone Service)The name given to the first Lucent Technologies wireless telephone system. AMPS is often used torefer to analog wireless service.

APApplication Processor

APCApplication Processor Cluster

APCCApplication Processor Cluster Complex

GL-2 Issue 15 July 2002

401-610-006


APF5ESS-type frame configured to house Application Processors.

ATMAsynchronous Transfer Mode

AUTOPLEX®

Lucent Technologies Registered Trademark.

B

bandwidthInformation-carrying capacity of a communications channel. The larger the bandwidth, the moreinformation it carries.

BBA trioThe combination of the BCR-BIU-ACU units for the new CDMA equipment configuration. See alsoentries for Baseband Combiner Radio (BCR), Bus Interface Unit (BIU), and Analog Conversion Unit(ACU).

BCR (Baseband Combiner/Radio)The BCR combines the I and Q signals from each of the Analog Conversion Units (ACUs) and (onthe forward link) converts the signal to RF with an RF up-converter. In the reverse path, it receivesRF signals and down-converts to baseband.

BHCABusy Hour Call Attempts — The total number of originating and terminating call attempts handledby the system in a typical one hour period. Note that this is a count of all call attempts, not justcompleted calls.

BRIISDN Basic Rate Interface

C

CCCommon Controller — Also known as the Central Control. The DCS main controller. Each DCS hasone pair of Common Controllers (numbered 0 and 1) for reliability.

CCCThe CDMA Cluster Controller controls 7 CCUs and provides the interface to the Series II cell's TDMBus.

CCITTInternational Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee (Geneva, Switzerland)


Glossary


CCS7Common Channel Signaling System 7

CCUThe CDMA Channel Unit are analogous to RCUs and DRUs. Each CCU supports 4 user channels.

CDCPCall Data Collection Point

CDGPCall Data Generation Point

CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access)CDMA uses a spread-spectrum form of modulations requiring a contiguous block of spectrum (1.25MHz) rather than the channelized approach used by analog and TDMA. See also entries for DirectSequence Spread-Spectrum and spread-spectrum.

CDMA CarrierA CDMA Carrier is the 1.25 MHz block of spectrum used for CDMA. This same block of spectrum isreused in every cell. In addition, the system/cell can support multiple carriers.

CDMA Channel Unit (CCU)CCUs create CDMA channels. Each CCU can be configured with two CDMA Channel Elements(CEs). Groups of CCUs are logically connected to form a cluster which is controlled by a singleCDMA Cluster Controller (CCC).

CDMA ClusterA CDMA cluster is a group of equipment consisting of one CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC) and upto seven CDMA Channel Units (CCUs). A cluster supports a maximum of 14 traffic channels.

CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC)A CDMA Cluster Controller is the controller for a group (seven maximum) of CDMA Channel Units(CCUs).

CDMA Speech Handler (SH)See entry for Protocol Handler for Voice (PHV).

CDNCall Processing/Database Node — A type of attached processor which is responsible for callprocessing activity.

CDN-IIICall Processing/Database Node - type III

CDN-IIIECall Processing/Database Node - type IIIE

CDPDCellular Digital Packet Data Systems

CE (Channel Element)A CDMA Channel Element (CE) contains the necessary circuitry to perform forward link andreverse link CDMA spread-spectrum processing. Each CE supports one CDMA channel. Each CEcan be assigned one or more of these channel functions: pilot, synch, paging, access, traffic.


401-610-006


cellA geographical area, usually depicted as hexagon-shaped, that is served by a wireless system.Cellular technology is based on the premise that a group of radio frequencies used within one cellcan be used again in distant cells.

CGSCellular Gateway Switch

CFRGCDMA Frequency Reference Generator

CGSACellular Geographic Service Area — A basic coverage area served by a wireless system.

ChannelA channel is a portion of the wireless frequency band designated for a single wireless telephoneconversation. It is an actual wireless RF channel as identified by the Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC), 30 kHz for analog and 1.25 MHz for CDMA.

CM (Communications Module)Part of the 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS hardware. The CM provides the fiber optic interconnections tothe Switching Modules (SMs), switches network data, voice, and control messages, and distributestiming and synchronization.

CNICommon Network Interface — The hardware/software which provides SS7 connectivity betweenend offices and a signaling network. It also provides an interface between PBXs and the LucentTechnologies signaling network.

CNI/IMSCommon Network Interface/Interprocess Message Switch — Part of the ECPC, the CNI/IMS Ringsupports a variety of nodes for signaling, call processing, and message routing. The Ring providesan interface between the cell site and the ECPC, and the ECPC and the DCS.

CPUCore Processor Unit — A component of the ECPC, the CPU provides high speed control functions,such as logic, control, and arithmetic processes as required by the 3B21D computer.

CRTUiCDMA Radio Test Unit Interface Board

CSCCustomer Service Center

Carrier-Specific Teleservices Transport (CSTT)CSTT consists of procedures that allow a potential wireless service subscriber to activate newservices (become authorized for services) without the intervention of a third party.

Cell Site Node Enhanced (CSNE)Link node which provides the interface between the Cell Site and the IMS ring. Each system has atleast 2 CSNEs. Each CSNE can have a maximum of 8 cell site data links.


Glossary


D

dBDecibels

DBNData Base Node

DCCHDigital Control CHannel

DCIDual-Serial Channel (DSCH) Computer Interconnect

DCSDigital Cellular Switch — A generic term for the switching fabric of a Flexent™/AUTOPLEX®wireless networks.

DFIDigital Facilities Interface provides the DS1 interface for packet pipes associated with a particularCell Interface Module (CDMA).

DFUThe Digital Facilities Unit. Now called Digital Facilities Interface (see DFI).

DiagnosticsTypically refers to the test run on a hardware unit; however, the ECP refers to trunk transmissiontesting as a diagnostic.

Direct Sequence Spread-SpectrumA type of CDMA classification, used in the Lucent Technologies CDMA product. A DS generatorencodes voice signals and assigns a unique code (PN Code) to each user. The DS system reducesinterference and ensures privacy. See also the entries for PN Codes and spread-spectrum.

DLIDatalink interface.

DLNDirect Link Node — a node which converts OSDS messages to X.25 or SS7 formats and routesthem to specific IUNs.

DLTUDigital Line/Trunk Unit

DMHData Message Handler

DSUData Service Unit

DSUDigital Services Unit


401-610-006


DTUDigital Trunk Unit

E

ECIDECPCall Identification

ECPExecutive Cellular Processor — The 3B21D computer which is the main processor for theFlexent™/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks.

ECPC (Executive Cellular Processor Complex)The 3B21D computer is the main processor for the ECPC. It controls the operation of the Flexent™/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks. The ECPC is responsible for mobility management, callprocessing, system maintenance, technician interfaces, and system integrity.

ECSUEcho Canceller and Signaling Unit — provides echo cancellation between the 5ESS-2000 SwitchDCS and the PSTN.

EDRUEnhanced Digital Radio Unit — a single-slot digital radio, providing all the functionality of theexisting DRU plus the ability to support additional capabilities and features.

EESDEnhanced Electronic Software Distribution (EESD)

EINEEthernet Interface Node Enhanced

ELIEIN Link Interface

F

FDMAFrequency Division Multiple Access — FDMA uses narrowband channels of spectrum, eachcarrying one telephone circuit, in a system where any mobile can access any one of thefrequencies.

FLEXENT™Lucent Technologies Trademark.

FMSFlexent Mobility Server


Glossary


G

GDSUGlobal Digital Service Unit

GPSGlobal Positioning System — a United States Department of Defense-sponsored global satellitesystem used to provide accurate time and position location.)

G-RCF (Growth Radio Channel Frame)Growth Radio Channel Frames can be added to the CDMA Primary Radio Channel Frame (P-RCF)to increase the capacity of your CDMA system.

H

handoffAn automatic transfer of a wireless telephone call from one cell to another, maintaining call qualityas the mobile user moves throughout the coverage area.

hard handoff (CDMA-to-analog)A CDMA-to-analog hard handoff occurs when the dual mode CDMA mobile is instructed to changeits mode from CDMA to analog during a call. Consequently, the assigned frame selector will beremoved from the call configuration.

HCAMAHigh Capacity Automatic Message Accounting

HLR (Home Location Register)The database in charge of managing mobile phone subscribers. The HLR stores a permanent copyof a mobile subscriber’s subscription information, and some location information to enable callrouting to the MSC where the mobile subscriber is located.

HzHertz (Cycles Per Second)

Hard HandoffA hard handoff is the name given to traditional handoff where the MS must retune its radio and thesystem may have to reconfigure itself. Hand-offs between CDMA carriers are hard.

Hard HandoffInter-CDMA carrier handoff similar to conventional handoff.

High-Powered AmplifierThe High-Powered Amplifier feature upgrades the single-channel amplifiers used in both thecellular CDMA minicell and the PCS CDMA minicell.


401-610-006


I

IDSHOInter-DCS Soft and Semi-Soft Handoff. The IDSHO feature permits soft and semi-soft handoffs ofCDMA calls across multiple Digital Cellular Switches (DCSs) that are within the same AUTOPLEX®

System 1000.

IMSInterprocessor Message Switch — A token ring developed by the IMS organization in Columbus.Messages from the 3B21D to any other processor on the system (Cell, DCS, ring nodes) will travelon the ring to get to their destination.

IMSHOInter-MSC Soft Handoff

Inter-Hyperband OperationsInter-Hyperband Operations feature provides support for dual-hyperband mobiles, that is, mobilescapable of operating in both the PCS (2GHz) and cellular (850 MHz) hyperbands. The featureallows PCS service providers to hand off dual-hyperband mobiles to cellular service providers.

IPInternet Protocol

IRNIntegrated Ring Node — The basic hardware building block of an IUN. One of the boards in an IUNthat serves as the main processor (except for CDNs).

IS-41TIA Standard for Cellular Radio telecommunications Intersystem Operations adopted October 8,1987. Both X.25 and SS7 protocols are supported with the basic application of IS41 called Rev. 0.Rev. A and Rev. B provide additional features.

IS-95TIA Industry Standard for Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) based on Qualcommspecifications.

IUNIMS User Node — Any node on the ring. For AUTOPLEX® System 1000 this includes CallProcessing/Database Node (CDN), Enhanced Cell Site Node (CSNE), Ethernet Interface Node(EIN) and Ring Peripheral Controller (RPC).

IWFInter-Working Function

K

KBKilobytes


Glossary


KHzKilohertz

L

LACLinear Amplifier Circuit/Combiner

LAFLinear Amplifier Frame (Series II Cell) — The LAF combines and amplifies transmit signals andsends them to the Antenna Interface Frame (AIF).

LAULinear Amplifier Unit — contains the LAC.

LTDULucent Technologies Delivery Unit

LILink Interface (node) — A type of LN which provides an SS7 link interface between the Flexent™/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks and another SS7 system.

LMTLocal Maintenance Terminal

LNLink Node — A type of IUN which includes the CSNE.

M

MBMega Byte

MCModule Controller — The DCS network controller. This controls a maximum of 768 trunk circuitsused within the DCS.

MHzMegahertz

MM-APMobility Manager-Application Processor

MSCMobile Switching Center (formerly MTSO) — All of the control and switching elements for a wirelesssystem are contained at the MSC. For the Flexent™/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks. the MSCconsists of the ECPC, the CNI/IMS Ring, and the 5ESS DCS.


401-610-006


N

Neighbor CellA neighbor cell is a cell that is adjacent to the cell currently serving a mobile subscriber.

Neighbor GroupA group of cell sites near the cell site serving a call. When a handoff is required from the serving cellsite, the system will try to hand off the call to one of the cells in the group.

Neighbor ListA list of cell sites in a neighbor group.

NRCNetwork Reliability Center

O

OA&MOperations, Administration & Maintenance — Generic name given to AUTOPLEX® System 1000functions such as TI, diagnostics, SM, etc. This does not include CP and System Integrity.

OMP-FXOperations and Management Platform for Flexent— The OMP-FX is an element of the Flexent™/AUTOPLEX® wireless networks distributed architecture which is dedicated to the support of allsystem OA&M activities.

Optical Interface FrameThe OIF is the interface between the radio frame and the microcell, it is located at the cell site, andIt has its own set of diagnostics.

OTAOver The Air Activation - a TDMA feature that allows a service provider to activate a new service fora mobile station or subscriber.

OTAFOver The Air Activation Function

P

PCSPersonal Communications Services (PCS) are services planned for new digital RF equipmentoperating in the 2GHz spectrum. It is planned that PCS will allow person-to-person communicationsand eventually replace most 'wired' networks.


Glossary


PHAProtocol Handler for Asychronous Transfer Mode — provides an interconnect vehicle amongmultiple Packet Switching Units (PSUs). The PHA connects a Frame Relay Protocol Handler(FRPH) in one PSU to a Protocol Handler for Voice (PHV) in another PSU.

PHVProtocol Handler for Voice, a part of the functionality and circuitry of a Packet Switching Unit(PSUs).

PLMPower Level Management — a functionality of SAT-SINAD that allows the service provider toanalyze and reduce RF interference.

PN (Pseudo-Noise) CodesPseudo-Noise is the name given to the Mobile Station (MS) communications over the CDMA carrier(RF) and is identified using a specific code. This PN Code is given to the MS at setup time and iswhat the cell and MS use to communicate with each other. Each MS has a unique PN Code whileactive with a call.

Pound Send FeatureThe Pound Send feature for CDMA allows a single pound sign (#) to be a valid destination. With thisfeature, the dialed # digit is routed to a peripheral device connected via a trunk.

PSK (Phase Shift Keying)Phase Shift Keying (PSK) is a type of encoding or modulation technique for transforming digitaldata into analog signals.

PSUPacket Switching Unit (Part of 5ESS Switch Module) — The PSU is one of the new componentsrequired to support CDMA on your existing AUTOPLEX® System 1000. The PSU consists of threecircuit packs: the Protocol Handler for Voice (PHV), the Frame Relay Protocol Handler (FRPH), andthe Protocol Handler for Asynchronous Transfer Mode (PHA). The PSU handles CDMA traffic toand from the CDMA mobile unit through the cell site. The 5ESS Switching Module (SM) provides aninterface to a single PSU.

Packet PipeA special trunk group consisting of 1 to 24 DS0s on a given DS1 that is used to send packetizedvoice and data between a given cluster and the DCS service circuits.

Q

Quick-Drop Soft HandoffThe Quick-Drop Soft Handoff feature speeds up the process for dropping a leg of a soft handoff.This new process reduces the time it takes to drop a leg, reducing it down 2 seconds, to about 0.5seconds. Quick-Drop applies to both intra-MSC and inter-MSC soft handoffs.


401-610-006


R

Radio ChannelActual cellular Radio Frequency (RF) channel as identified by the FCC. For analog, the channel is30 kHz wide. In CDMA, the radio channel is 1.25 MHz wide.

RC/VRecent Change & Verify — The user interface for updating databases in the system.

RCCRadio Control Complex also Reliable Clustered Computing

RCFRadio Channel Frame

RCGReference Calibration Generator

RCSRadio Cluster Server

Remote DCSA remote DCS is a DCS not serviced by the frame selector involved with the call and could be aDCS on another MSC. Cells on a remote DCS can be thought of as remote cells.

RFRadio Frame — Cell site unit used to house radio hardware.

RFRadio Frequency

RF Call TraceRF Call Trace is one of the optional features developed for CDMA. It provides for call performanceassessment from the mobile. By measuring the signal strengths of mobile calls from various cellsites, a system operator can analyze the quality of the radio environment.

RFTG (Reference Frequency and Timing Generator)Provides synchronization signals to the Synchronized Clock and Tone (SCT) board. It is also usedto provide the CDMA and analog radio reference frequency. It makes use of the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) receiver to synchronize the CDMA signals.

S

SAT SINADSupervisory Audio Tone SIgnal-to-Noise And Distortion — a call quality management feature thatimproves voice band signal quality by reducing the audible noise which might occur on analog voicechannels when RF interference is present during a conversation.


Glossary


SEESystems Equipment Engineering.

Semi-Soft HandoffA semi-soft handoff occurs when the same frame selector being used for a call prior to the start ofsemi-soft handoff is employed during and after the semi-soft handoff as long as no subsequent hardhandoff occurs.

SHSpeech handler—the software and data contained in the PHV needed to process CDMA speech.

SHLRStand-alone Home Location Register

SII-CSSeries II Cell Site

SMSwitching Module - 5ESS Switch — The SM provides switching functionality and voice connectivityto the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) and the cell sites. The SM contains two newcomponents necessary to support CDMA: the Packet Switching Unit (PSU) and the PSU PacketBus.

SMSShort Message Service — The SMS feature for CDMA has the ability to display short “canned”messages, and display a Reach Me Number (RMN). The SMS feature incorporates a MessageCenter (MC) which provides Voice Response Functionality (VRF) and Store and ForwardFunctionality (SFF).

SMSService Management System (SMS) — a provisioning system that enables the service provider toadminister subscriber profile data and other intelligent network application services, includingservice logic and subscriber data distribution to network elements.

Soft HandoffSoft handoff occurs when the system establishes a second communication path to the MS (fromnew cell) and monitors both streams selecting the best one. A MS may be in soft handoff for theentire call.

Softer HandoffA softer handoff occurs when a CDMA Channel Element utilizes two CDMA channels between itselfand the mobile unit.

SpectrumA range of frequencies available for radio transmission and reception. The FCC has set asideportions of the spectrum for wireless service, while other portions of the spectrum are allocated tomedia such as television, FM radio, and satellite transmissions.

Spread-SpectrumSpread-spectrum technology refers to an entire family of radio transmission techniques that areused to organize the distribution of radio frequency energy over a range of frequencies.


401-610-006


SS7Signaling System 7 — a set of protocols and services for out-of-band trunk signaling (CCITT). TheSS7 node is responsible for application level signaling messages. This node provides the physicaldata link connections to the network. Each SS7 node provides one high-speed data link to a SignalTransfer Point (STP) in the network, which handles message routing.

SMESignaling Message Encryption — a feature that encrypts selected air interface messageparameters. The encoding protects information (such as the identity of a calling party) being sent toan IS-54B-compatible or IS-136-compatible mobile and information being sent from the mobile(such as a private identification number or custom feature request). In addition, SME protectsagainst channel hijacking, a method used to gain fraudulent system access.

T

T1A T1 is a four-wire voice/data trunking transmission facility that carries 24 duplex channels in 64kbps time slots.

T1 CarrierA T1 is a four-wire voice/data trunking facility that carries 24 duplex channels via 64kbps timeslices.

TDMATime Division Multiple Access — TDMA divides each carrier frequency into a number of time slots,each of which constitutes an independent telephone circuit. Many current North American digitalwireless systems use TDMA.

TTY/TDDText Teletype Device

TIOPTechnician-Interface Output Process

U

UNIXA Registered Trademark in the United States and elsewhere for the UNIX® Operating System.

User ZoneA user zone is a geographic entity specified in an individual system by Private System Identifiers(PSIDs) and Residential System Identifiers (RSIDs).


Glossary


V

VCDXThe Very Compact Digital Exchange (VCDX) enables service providers to serve rural and suburbanlocations with standard and advanced digital telecommunications services in a cost effectivemanner. The VCDX is a reduced-sized switch based on the 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS, and it is asmaller version of the CDX switch. VCDX supports both TDMA and CDMA. It provides standardtelephone services, such as equal access, ISDN, and Centrex.

Virtual System AMA Event Recording (for CDMA)The Virtual System AMA Event Recording feature generates Automatic Message Accounting(AMA) records for segments of a call. With this feature, AMA event records are written when aswitch boundary is crossed and data for a portion of the call is required.

Virtual System Call Routing (for CDMA)(VSCR) — the Virtual System Call Routing feature makes it possible to define multiple systemswithin one AUTOPLEX® System 1000 for the purpose of controlling originations, terminations, andhandoffs.

Virtual System Input Message (IM) Restriction (for CDMA)The Virtual System Input Message (IM) Restriction feature allows the system administrator torestrict or allow certain input messages on a per-terminal basis.

Virtual System Output Message (OM) Routing (for CDMA)The Virtual System Output Message (OM) Routing feature allows the system administrator to routecell and DCS output messages to specific devices or log files. The feature enables the administratorto specify where an output message gets routed.

Virtual System Tones and Announcements (for CDMA)The Virtual System Tones and Announcements (VSTA) feature allows the service provider to definecall treatments (tones and announcements) on a virtual switch basis.

VLRVisitor Location Register

Vocoder (voice encoder)A vocoder is part of the 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS and is necessary to support CDMA. The vocoderconverts encoded compressed voice packets to Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) voice samples andback.

W

WINWireless Intelligent Network


401-610-006


X

X.25Communications Protocol

Issue Number Issue Date Revision Number Revision Date IN-1


Symbols

2G, 3-11, 3-123G, 3-113G-12X, 3-123G-1X, 3-11, 3-123G-3X, 3-123G-6X, 3-123G-9X, 3-125ESS DCS (Intl)

architecture, 6-16GSM, 6-17hardware components, 6-17overview, 6-16SM-2000, 6-17

5ESS DCS (U.S. version)description, 6-7switching principles, 6-7

5ESS DCS (U.S.)AM, 6-8architecture, 6-3CDMA impact on SM, 6-10CM, 6-9CNI Ring, 6-7hardware components, 6-6overview, 6-3SM, 6-10switching module, 6-14

A

ACU, 7-27AIF, 7-10

antenna interface frame, 7-10AIF (Antenna Interface Frame)

cabinet description, 7-47Alert message, 2-12amplifiers

transmit, 7-45AMPS

cellular frequency spectrum allocation, 6-13AMPS/TDMA

call scenarios, 2-6Analog Conversion Unit, see ACU

antenna installation, 11-17for CDMA, 11-19

Antenna Interface Frame, see AIFAP

application software, 5-30, 5-32Golden Image software, 5-31platform software, 5-30, 5-31

APFLocal Maintenance Terminal, 5-29

Application ProcessorAP, 5-24, 5-25, 5-26, 5-28, 5-29, 5-33, 5-34

Application Processor ClusterAPC, 5-33

Application Processor Cluster ComplexAPCC, 3-3, 5-5, 5-26, 5-33, 5-34

Application Processor FrameAPF, 5-26, 5-27, 5-28, 5-33, 5-34

Audible ring, 2-12

B

Base Interface Unit, see BIUBase Station

CDMA Distributed, 7-3, 7-89IS-634, 7-3MultiRange, 7-3, 7-56OneBTS t850, 7-3

Baseband Combiner and Radio, see BCRB-Band Cascade Filters, 7-46BCR, 7-27Beacon Channel, 7-23BIU, 7-27

C

Cabinets, 7-48call processing

call scenarios, 2-4cell site, 2-3mobile units, 2-3signaling paths, 2-4System Elements, 2-3voice paths, 2-4

000-111-222


IN-2 Issue Number Issue Date Revision Number Revision Date

call scenariosAMPS/TDMA land-to-mobile, 2-12AMPS/TDMA mobile-to-land, 2-6AMPS/TDMA mobile-to-mobile, 2-19CDMA land-to-mobile, 2-41CDMA mobile-to-land, 2-35CDMA mobile-to-mobile, 2-49

CCUs, 7-25CDMA, 1-3

call flow, 2-26call scenarios, 2-35capacity, 9-9cellular frequency spectrum allocation, 6-13guard bands, 9-7guard zones, 9-7handoffs, 2-51, 9-8impact on frequency reuse, 9-4impact on growth, 9-13impact on start-up, 9-7land-to-mobile call, 2-41mobile-to-mobile call, 2-49Text Teletype Device, 10-12timing and synchronization, 7-27

CDMA Cell Site, 7-25CDMA Channel Units, see CCUsCDN, 4-11CDPD System Overview, 10-6Cell site

hardware components for Series II, 7-4Cell Site Trunk (CST), 2-7cell site, see Cell Typescellular configurations, 9-4Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDCP)

components, 10-6Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD), 10-5cellular engineering

CDMA capacity, 9-9CDMA handoffs, 9-8CDMA impact on frequency reuse, 9-4CDMA impact on growth, 9-13CDMA impact on start-up, 9-7CGSA planning, 9-3cochannel layout, 9-4configurations, 9-4FCC application, 9-3growth, 9-9guard bands/zones, 9-7locating sites, 9-2start-up, 9-5system layout, 9-2

cellular, definition, 1-1CEs, 7-26CGSA planning, 9-3Channel Elements, see CEscochannel layout, 9-4CST, 2-7CSU (Channel Services Unit), 7-46current drain

cell site equipment, 8-8MSC equipment, 8-5

D

data links, 2-4, 3-7Database Management System

DBMS, 5-4DFI, 7-27Digital Facilities Interface, see DFIDigital Radio Unit, see DRUDigital service circuit model 3 (DSC3), 2-12Distinct Ringing on Mobile-Terminated Calls, 2-43DLN, 4-11DRU, 7-20DSC3, 2-12

E

ECParchitecture, 4-3, 4-5functions, 4-3interfaces, 4-4software, 4-8

ECP Complexbenefits, 4-2

ECP hardwarepower distribution cabinet, 4-7processor cabinets, 4-7

ECSN, 4-12Element Management System

EMS, 4-25Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU), 7-23Enhanced Electronic Software Delivery

EESD, 3-5



Enhanced Electronic Software DistributionEESD, 3-10

Enhanced Ethernet Interface NodeEINE, 4-13, 5-29

environmental requirementsfor MSC, 11-2for Series II, 11-15

equipment specificationsfor MSC, 11-9for Series II, 11-17

Ethernet Inteface Node/Enhanced, 4-13Ethernet Interface Node

EIN, 4-13, 5-25, 5-29EVRC (Enhanced Variable Rate Coding)

supported by PHV-4 board, 6-14Executive Cellular Processor (ECP), 4-3Executive Cellular Processor Complex

ECPC, 3-3

F

FCC application, 9-3FDMA, 1-3filters, 7-45Filters, Cascade and Notch, 7-48fire/intrusion protection

for Series II, 11-17Flexent Mobility Server

FMS, 3-13, 5-33, 5-34FLEXENT/AUTOPLEX

cell site hardware, 3-6remote options, 3-5

floor plansfor Series II, 11-17

frequency reuse, 9-4CDMA impact on, 9-4

G

GPS (Global Positioning System), 7-29receiver, 7-29

GPS antenna, 7-92, 11-19grounding requirements

for MSC, 11-4for Series II, 11-15

growth, 9-9GSM, 1-3

H

handoffsAMPS/TDMA hard handoff, 2-21CDMA inter-SM soft handoff, 2-58

heat releasefor MSC, 11-7for Series II, 11-16

High Speed LinksHSL, 5-5

how to use document, xxvi

I

I and Q signals, 7-27IMS/CNI, 4-9

growth in IMS cabinet, 4-14IUN, 4-9LN, 4-12RAP, 4-10RPCN, 4-9

IMS/CNI cabinet configurationCDN-II, 4-14

intended audience, xxvInter-DCS Soft and Semi-Soft Handoff, 2-60Interprocess Message Switch/Common Network Inter-

faceIMS/CNI, 3-3

IS-136, 1-3, 1-11, 1-12, 1-13, 7-23IS-2000, 3-1, 3-11IS-41, 2-51, 10-2, 10-4IS-54, 1-3IS-634, 3-4, 5-24, 5-29, 5-32, 11-9IS-95, 1-3, 3-11, 3-12IS-95A, 1-15, 1-18, 1-20, 1-22, 3-12, 7-28IS-95B, 3-1, 3-11, 3-12IUN, 4-9

000-111-222



L

LAF, 7-9Land-to-mobile call

AMPS/TDMA, 2-12CDMA, 2-41

lightingfor MSC, 11-1for Series II, 11-15

LINEAGE 2000, see LINEAGE Power Control Unit,8-2

LINEAGE Power Control Unit, 8-2, 8-6Linear Amplifier Frame, see LAFLink Node

CSN, 4-12SS7E, 4-12

Local Maintenance TerminalAPC, 5-28

Locate Radios, 7-23Locate RCU, 7-7Loop-around trunk, 2-19

M

Microcellantenna configurations, 7-66antennas, 7-62battery backup, 7-64CDMA, 7-3CDMA circuit packs, 7-69CDMA communication buses, 7-70Characteristics, 7-58cooling fan, 7-60daisy-chain, 7-62External Structure, 7-58functions, 7-62heating pads, 7-60Indoors, 7-60Outdoors, 7-60Power Distribution Cabinet, 7-65Series IImm T1/E1, 7-2Series IImm T1/E1 Microcell, 7-39specifications, 7-59TDMA, 7-3

TDMA communication buses, 7-74Microcell Power

AC service panel, 7-65AC voltage, 7-63DC voltage, 7-63

MIN, 2-7Minicell

850 CDMA Compact, 7-2, 7-54PCS CDMA, 7-2, 7-53Series II Cellular CDMA, 7-2, 7-44Series IIm T1/E1, 7-2Series IIm T1/E1 Minicell, 7-38TDMA PCS, 7-3, 7-55

MM-APbase growth frame, 5-4, 5-34

Mobile, 1-1Mobile Data Base Station (MDBS), 10-8Mobile Data Intermediate System (MDIS), 10-8Mobile Identification Number (MIN), 2-7Mobile Switching Center, 2-3, 3-1

software, 2-2mobile units, 2-3

analog, 1-26classes of, 1-26digital, 1-26dual-band, 1-26

Mobile-to-land callAMPS/TDMA, 2-6

Mobile-to-mobile callAMPS/TDMA, 2-19CDMA, 2-49

Mobility Manager-Application ProcessorMM-AP, 5-33

Modular CellCDMA and PCS CDMA, 7-3

Modular CellsAC power, 7-81antenna configurations, 7-81antennas, 7-80CDMA circuit packs, 7-85CDMA communication buses, 7-85characteristics, 7-77DC power, 7-81functions, 7-80specifications, 7-77structure, 7-77user interface, 7-82

MSCAC power products, 8-5DC power products, 8-2



environmental requirements, 11-2equipment specifications, 11-9floor plans, 11-9grounding/surge protection, 11-4key features, 3-5lighting, 11-1locating, 9-2power/heat requirements, 11-5remote options, 3-5

N

Network Interface Trunk (NIT), 2-7Network Managment System (NMS), 10-9NIT, 2-7Notch Filters, 7-46

O

OMP-FX, 3-3, 4-1, 4-15OSDS, 7-15

P

PCSPersonal Communications Services—1.9 GHz

band for wireless service, 1-1Personal Communciations Services, 1-1PHV-4, 6-14power requirements

for MSC, 11-5for Series II, 11-16

Protocol handler for voice (PHV) board, 6-14purpose of document, xxiv

Q

QCELP (Qualcomm Code Excited Linear Prediction),6-14

R

Radio Cluster ServerRCS, 5-24, 5-29, 5-30, 5-34

Radio Control Channel, see RCCRadio Control Unit, see RCURadio Frame Set, see RFSRadio Transmission Unit, see RTURAP, 4-10RCC, 7-5RCU, 7-7

Locate, 7-7Setup, 7-7

reason for reissue, xxvReference Frequency and Timing Generator, see

RFTG, 7-27RFS, 7-5RFTG, 7-27, 7-45Ring Attached Processor

CDN, 4-11DLN, 4-11

ROP Evolution, 5-4RSP (Radio Test Unit Switch Panel), 7-48RTU, 7-8

S

Second Generation2G, 3-11, 3-12

Series II Cell SiteAC power products, 8-8DC power products, 8-6duplication, 7-17environmental requirements, 11-15equipment specifications, 11-17grounding, 11-15

000-111-222



hardware components, 7-2hardware options, 7-12heat release, 11-16IIm/IImm RF Distribution, 7-40IImm-T1 Microcell functional overview, 7-40IIm-T1 Minicell functional overview, 7-40IIm-T1 Minicell hardware, 7-38, 7-39lighting, 11-15locating, 9-2power, 11-16power options, 7-17software, 7-15test equipment, 7-17

Service Creation Environment, 10-4Service Managment System, 10-2Service Node, 10-3Setup Radios, 7-23Setup RCU, 7-7Signaling path, 2-4SIU (CSU Shelf Interface Unit), 7-46SMR (Specialized Mobile Radio), 7-46Software Updates

EESD, 3-5, 3-10SS7E, 4-12Stand-Alone HLR (SHLR), 10-2Synchronized Clock and Tone board, 7-27system concepts, 1-1system layout, 9-2

T

Talk path, 2-12TDM Bus, 7-20TDM bus, 7-27TDM Buses, 7-5TDMA, 1-3

cellular frequency spectrum allocation, 6-13converting cell site, 7-19hardware options, 7-24Text Teletype Device, 10-12

TDMA Radio Test Unit, see T-RTUTechnician-Interface Output Process

TIOP, 5-4terminals

dual-mode, 1-26Third Generation

3G, 3-11

3G-1X, 3-11, 3-12, 3-13Three-port conference circuit, 2-22Time Division Multiplexed Buses, see TDM Busestiming, 7-29TTY/TDD, 10-12

V

Validation process, 2-6Virtual System AMA Event Recording (for CDMA), 19Virtual System Call Routing (for CDMA), 19Virtual System Tones and Announcements (for

CDMA), 19Voice channel, 2-12Voice path, 2-6

W

WatchMark Prospect, 3-9, 7-46Wireless Intelligent Network, 10-1

components, 10-2Wireless Service Control Point, 10-2